Home

The Information Edge User's Guide

1. z Q Fund Analyses L3 Fund Analysis Pivot Table for REI GIFTS 0 Analytics Al Z uu ope IEEE ERE TRES tee miles 12 SH fes Se ata ie ie So Configuration Date Type 7 2004 All Type Fund Category 7 Fund Constit Count Count Amount Balance Gift Avg B Blank 17 22 145 415 00 0 00 6 609 77 El Annual 55 78 71 480 00 15 500 00 916 41 El Capital 50 62 188 120 00 0 00 3 034 19 El Endowment 28 29 20 005 00 0 00 689 83 El Membership 21 22 107 325 00 1 250 00 4 878 41 E Scholarship 14 15 273 150 00 0 00 18 210 00 Grand Total 145 228 805 495 00 16 750 00 3 532 87 MS Fund Analysis Chart Chart for REL GIFTS 0 MADE B 20 sr 9 e WO 24 Fh Date Fund Category 7 Fund Category z Afr All Fund Category All Date All Fund Catego Emna Saa TountiF 600 000 00 Amount 1999 Annual Fund 1 400 00 175 1999 Membership Fund 310 00 4 2000 Annual Fund 6 005 00 E 00 000 00 D 2000 Membership Fund 2300 00 4 2001 Annual Fund 31 155 00 2 ey Diop Senes Fiel 2001 Membership Fund 173500 0 00 2002 Annual Fund 61 160 00 4 s 2002 Membership Fund 10 920 00 21 2003 Annual Fund 28 190 00 2 Vnus 2003 Membership Fund 8 600 00 1 Fund 2004 Annual Fund 37 005 00 Atv 2004 Membership Fund nT E When you select Dashboards in the navigation ba
2. Solutions In this Appendix Pledge Valuation Analytic eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennn ne 320 Regular and Irregular Pledges 0 0 cc cece eens 321 Preparing Your Raiser s Edge Data 20 0 0 eee eee 321 Identifying Irregular Pledges 1 2 0 0 0 c cece eee nee 321 Handling Write Offs 20 0 0 teen eee 322 Creating Queries 1 0 eee hn 322 Timing Considerations 0 0 cece eens 323 Installing the Pledge Valuation Analytic 0 0 0 eee ee 323 Creating the Data Mart 2 0 0 ccc cee ene nee 324 Using the Pledge Valuation Analytic 00 eee eee eee eee 324 Viewing the Results ina Pivot Table 0 00 0 eee eee ee 325 Pledge Valuation Analytic Smart Fields 0 00 00 325 Federal Interest Rate Smart Field 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 326 Periods Per Year Smart Field 0 0 0 eee 326 Irregular Payment Schedules Smart Field 0004 326 Pledge Valuation Smart Field 326 n fa o a a lt 320 APPENDIX B In addition to all the reports you can create using The Information Edge analytic packages are available as optional modules to help you perform analyses to get precisely the information you need about specific areas of your fundraising Pledge Valuation Analytic Long term pledges are pledges paid over a period of time greater than one year The donor may promise to pay a l
3. The primary goal of business intelligence is to help you make informed decisions faster as a result of high speed interactive data reporting and analysis Blackbaud s comprehensive business intelligence solution The Information Edge extracts data from transactional and operational programs including The Raiser s Edge manipulates the data and quickly displays it back in significant ways such as interactive reports The Information Edge enables Management Reporting by making it easy to navigate through huge amounts of data and delivering a high level view of your organization The Information Edge is fast It can deliver most responses in seconds with even the most complicated reports taking no more than approximately twenty seconds The Information Edge is also analytical Using online analytical processing OLAP it can handle any business logic and statistical analysis relevant to your organization and present the data in a way that can be easily understood The Information Edge is multidimensional It can organize data into meaningful business structures such as constituents gifts regions and time The Information Edge provides a multidimensional conceptual view of the data allowing diverse bits of information to be cross tabulated against each other to deliver matrix reporting and graphs This includes the use of hierarchies that enable you to drill down from one level to another for example Country into City Understand
4. BIZINTEL_AP_INVOICE_SYSTEM_ID y JAdd 3 Remove M Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 2 Select an Output data type for the field When you create the condition for this field later in this procedure the value you specify to enter for records that meet your condition criteria must be valid for the type you specify here Currency Value can be any positive or negative numeric value Currency values can include as many as four places to the right of the decimal Values with more than four decimal places are rounded to the last number e Date Value must be a valid date for example 06 05 05 Numeric Value must be numeric can contain a decimal point Integer Value must be negative or positive whole numbers Text Value can be text or mixed value types such as a date and a numeric value 3 In the Default value frame select the value that you want to appear in the field on records that do not meet the criteria you establish When you select NULL no entry appears in the field 3 You can mark Use this value and enter a value or mark Use this field and select a field whose value will populate the smart field on records that do not meet your criteria To create input parameters for the smart field click Add at the bottom of the screen The Expression screen appears Properties Lx Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to
5. iH amp Done POP RE My Computer When viewed with Internet Explorer version 5 x or higher on a machine with Office XP installed the selected item is fully interactive Users can manipulate fields and views and perform the actions available for an item from within The Information Edge 4 Close your browser to exit the publication CONFIGURATION Schedules On the Schedules tab you can set up schedules to refresh your data marts automatically at specified time intervals For example you can specify to refresh the data nightly or whenever there is less activity on your network In order for data marts to run on a schedule the SQL Server Agent service must be running on the machine on which The Information Edge database is located gt Scheduling automatic data mart processing Please note the following if you are scheduling an automatic refresh for a data mart that includes a Crystal Report When a data mart processes via a schedule the SQL Server Agent logs in as the user specified in the properties for the MSSQLSERVER service The Local System Account is selected by default although you can specify another account and password to use in the properties for the service If the account specified for use by the SQL Server Agent does not have a printer installed and the data mart includes a Crystal Report a No Default Printer error occurs when the scheduled data mart processing takes place When processi
6. Invoice ioe B Invoice amount gy Not B Invoice balance Attributes B Invoice date Rg Distribution B Invoice number Miscellaneous Entry B Vendor ID Payments B Vendor name 1099 Distribution Distribution B Debit account number B Amount Transaction Distribution B Project ID B Project Description B Amount 04 13 2004 j 7 On the Output tab select the fields containing the data you want to include in your export The Available Fields box displays a list of all fields available for your export The Output box displays the fields you select for your export Additionally from the View menu you can select Export Field Names This changes the display in the Output box to show the actual field names as they appear in the database tables which is how they will appear in The Information Edge 52 CHAPTER 3 u In either view an icon indicates tables that have a one to many relationship with the parent table E FE Express Data Mart Jol x File Edit View Help E Save and Close Payment B AP_PAYMENT PAYMENT_BANKACCOUNT AP PAYMENT PAYMENT BANKDESCRIPTION AP_PAYMENT PAYMENT_CHECKAMOUNT AP_PAYMENT PAYMENT_CHECKFORMAT AP_PAYMENT PAYMENT_CHECKNUM Percent AP PAYMENT PAYMENT PAYEENAME AP PAYMENT PAYMENT PAYEEUSERDE
7. Decrease the number of offers per segment You can do this by editing the segment and adjusting the sample size Reducing the sample size reduces the total number of offers which decreases the overall variable cost for the segment Remove segments entirely You can exclude entire segments and mail to them at a later date when funds become available gt Completing the Segmentation Budget Expenses tab 1 When creating or editing a Segmentation select the Budget Expenses tab E Segmentation Wizard New segmentation 2 Ioj xj File View cols Actions Help ipjSave Edit General Filter iBu Packages Properties Budget Amount 4 000 00 Fixed Cost 4 200 00 Package Costs 6 427 80 Balance 2 427 80 Variable Cost Total Cost 2 00 948 00 1 00 948 00 0 35 331 80 2 Enter the Budget Amount you have allotted for this segmentation If the segmentation has a total cost for example the cost of sending it to a mailing or fulfillment house enter the amount in the Fixed Cost field The Package Costs field automatically includes costs for packages currently in use you may have some packages that are not currently being used The Balance amount automatically includes segmentation and package costs 3 Click OK to save your changes Properties On the Segmentation Wizard Properties tab you can specify that custom properties you created previously be applied to the current segmentati
8. Drop Column Fields Here Drop Row Fields Here Dron Totals or Detail Fields Here Field List window appears From the Field List window select the Constituent_BIO_GENDER field and drag it to the Drop Column Fields Here area Select the Year field and drag it to the Drop Row Fields Here area The row and column fields are used to summarize and compare data These fields display the unique items of data within a field down rows or across columns The cell at each row and column intersection summarizes the data for an item WH Ss 2 zi o y aga 05 zis ie 3 al Drop Filter Fields Here Drag items to the PivotTable list Drop Column Fields Here RE EXPRESS GIFTS X Totals p APPEAL z E APPEAL LL CAMPAIGN E Quarter E Month FUND TYPE Drop Totals or Detail Fields H F E Constituent_BIO_GENDER stituent_BIO_GENDER Add to Row Area X A We recommend you leave the Commands and Options screen open as you work in a Pivot Table because the available options on the screen change as you select different items in a table To access the screen right click anywhere in a Pivot Table and select Commands and Options 2972 CHAPTER 4 You can group items Select the items you want to group by pressing CTRL and clicking them After they are
9. AND DATE ADDED BETWEEN LASTENDPOINT AND RENTENDPOINT The incremental attributes are CurrentTimeStampSQL SELECT CURRENT TIMESTAMP e TimeStampFormat yyyy MM dd HH mm ss DOnlySQL SELECT ID FROM PEOPLE UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR When processed the 9 LASTENDPOINT macro will be replaced by the time the data mart was last processed The CURRENTENDPOINT macro is replaced by the value selected using the CurrentTimeStampSQL statement Both dates are formatted using the TimeStampFormat string If the data mart was last processed on 1 1 2005 at 1 00 am and the next night the data mart is processed at 2 00 am the macros are replaced by LASTENDPOINT 2005 01 01 01 00 00 CURRENTENDPOINT 2005 01 02 02 00 00 Yielding a WHERE clause of WHERE DATE LAST CHANGED BETWEEN 2005 01 01 01 00 00 AND 2005 01 02 02 00 00 OR DATE ADDED BETWEEN 2005 01 01 01 00 00 AND 2005 01 02 02 00 00 The first part of the WHERE clause ensures that only those records that were changed after the last time the data mart was processed 1 1 2005 at 1 00 am are selected The second part of the WHERE clause includes records that were added since the last refresh When the data mart finishes processing the Last End Point is set to the Current End Point
10. Display Type Grid Eum O GIFTS Count O Year to Date Amount O Year to Date Gift count CO Amount previous year O Count previous year e zi n E NET Sn ae rubus _ 1647 CHAPTER 4 Cua When you select Grid you can choose any number of measures At least one measure is always selected at the top of the list This measure determines the length of the bars when you switch to Bars view two measures may be locked if you also selected a Color in bar view To remove this measure from the view select Bars in the Display Type field and enter a measure in the Length field that you want to include in the view 10 Select the Template Measures tab Dimensions Measures Template Measures Change or add template measures to be used in the view Change from last year Average children s length Number of children Change in year to date of total length of members in filter Change from previous period Edit Remove Copy Cancel Apply In addition to the measures displayed in the lists you can use the Template Measures tab to create your own measures and include them in the view When you click Add a Template Measure Editor screen appears on which you can build multi dimensional expressions to create data calculations For more information about the Template Measures tab and the other tabs on the View screen click the Help button on the lowe
11. Export type MEEA CA Slur I Include header MV Enclose fields in quotes T Open file after export Field delimiter Output type Single file Output path C Miles C3 File name RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT csv Sample path C Miles RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT csv Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish For more information about Export see Exports on page 89 Publications Publications enable you to save a Pivot Table Chart or Crystal Report on a Web page which can be viewed on your intranet by anyone with a browser This tool enables you to extend the power of Information Edge interactive reporting across your entire company Z C Program FilesHTMLPubs p1 html Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt A A Aseach Favorites GPMedia D amp w 5 Links gt Blackbaud s The Information Edge Donor Level Bim gt xX Sms 2S 2 242 So wo Drop Filter Fields Here GIFTS Count 100 80 504 APPEAL 40 20 Blank Gold Platinum Silver Donor level 7 Done fey My Computer For more information see Publications on page 123 GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE 2 Understanding Segmentation If you have the optional module Marketing Segmentation you can create segmentations that enable you to decide how to best target you
12. numericPrecisionz 30 numericScalez B lt FIELD name 0 dataT ypez Int size 4 id CAMPAIGN ID field lt FIELDSET gt lt SOURCESET gt DATAPROVIDER SharedProviderID SHAREDSQLConn1 FastLoad true gt lt COMMANDTEXT gt SELECT New XML definition Creating Data Marts with XML You can define data marts in an XML file and then import the marts into The Information Edge When creating XML files to define data marts a key point to consider is that the XML must conform to the BIPACKAGEDEFINITION XSD schema included with The Information Edge and available in the The Information Edge BIN folder An XML schema specifies how to formally describe the elements in an XML document When you create an XML file using The Information Edge XML Editor the schema supplied with The Information Edge is automatically attached to the file and used to verify that each item of content in your XML file adheres to the description of the element in which the content is to be placed The XML is validated against this schema For more information about using the editor see The Information Edge XML Editor on page 221 For more information about the XML elements specific to Information Edge data marts see the XML Schema Reference on page 241 Adding Universal Source Connector Data Marts To add a custom data mart you must specify a name and prefix for the mart then indicate the location of the XML file from whic
13. 1 if all your pledges are annual If you have any pledges other than annual you need to create a smart field that will translate the installment frequency into a number such as 4 for a quarterly frequency You then need to specify that this field be used in per period A Periods Per Year smart field is included in the Core Solution for this purpose 4 Inthe Cash flows field select a field to identify values to use for periodic cash flows For example you can select the BALANCE field for your pledges 5 In the Order cash flows by field select a date field that will be used to sort periodic cash flows in the order in which they were received 6 If you have irregular pledges mark the Irregular cash flow checkbox The Core Solution includes an Irregular Payment Schedules smart field that determines whether a cash flow is irregular Otherwise you must create a smart field to determine this and enter the value it creates for irregular pledges 7 In the Pledge date field select the field containing values for when pledges were made Present Value Category Financial What it Does A Present Value smart field calculates the present value of an annuity based on periodic fixed payments to be paid in the future and a fixed interest rate When Would I use a Present Value Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the present value for an annuity Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Present Value smart
14. Completing the FE Express General tab on page 48 You must define the Financial Edge export file on which the data mart data is based For more information see Completing the FE Express Export Definition tab on page 49 Youcan specify options such as whether you want to automatically create cubes and measures in the data mart For more information see Completing the FE Express Cube Options tab on page 53 You can specify a relationship between an RE Express data mart when creating an FE Express data mart This enables you to later pull Raiser s Edge constituent and gift information onto the Transactions table for each transaction For more information see Completing the FE Express Raiser s Edge Source tab on page 54 You can add data from other tables to the FE Express data mart For more information see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 After you add exports and HTML Publications to a data mart you can specify that they process automatically whenever the data mart processes For more information see Completing the FE Express Publications tab on page 56 When you are finished establishing the properties of your data mart click Finish to install it A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view FE Express data mart tables contain several ID fields that are generat
15. Enter the criteria that will be used when assigning this code to a donor Description os Months 1 Gift 10 14 99 Criteria Frequency j Monetary Value largest gift Minimum o Minimum fi Minimum 10 00 Maximum e Maximum fi Maximum fi 4 99 Test Percentage 20 Code Value 0 6 Mos 1 Gift 10 14 99 r Recency in months Cancel 5 In the Description field enter the text that will identify this segment on the Input Parameters screen In this case we are creating a segment to include constituents with an RFM history of 0 6 Months 1 Gift 10 14 99 Specify the Minimum and Maximum values for Recency Frequency and Monetary Value of gifts that will qualify constituent records to be included in this segment For example this segment includes records with a Recency measured in months minimum of 0 and maximum of 6 a Frequency number of gifts minimum and maximum of 1 because this segment is for donors who have given only one gift in the last six months and a Monetary Value minimum of 10 00 and maximum of 14 99 In the Test Percentage field specify a percentage of records to be included in a test segmentation For example if you enter 20 the test segmentation will include a random sampling of records equal to twenty percent of the total records in the segment Leave 100 as the entry if you want all records that qualify for this s
16. on page 97 Exports can be in character separated value Excel or XML formats In a character separated export you select the field separator The XML format describes the data in your export file and provides a consistent means to share information You can create filters so only selected records are exported gt Creating an export definition If you are creating an export directly from a monitored field view or table click Export in the action bar and skip to step 4 of this procedure 1 On the tree view click the plus sign beside the name of the data mart for which you want to create an export 2 Right click on Export Definitions and select New Export Definition The Export Definition screen appears on the General tab where you can provide a name and description for the export For information about the General tab see the next procedure 3 You must specify the table containing the fields you want to export and then select the fields themselves For more information see Completing the Export Columns tab on page 91 N You can create export definitions for Monitored fields Views and tables directly from those items however those exports are not saved on the Export Definitions page N 90 7 CHAPTER 3 4 You can specify options such as the export type and the path and file name For more information see Completing the Export Options tab on page 92 You can filter the i
17. 0 ccc cece ce cece cere eee eee ences 8 D p ndencie ov 5 isons haces Se RE n ERES RI E a 21 CONFIGURATION ux aate Rer REOR Re babe qox e y C Re RE a 23 Dp ented IU DIVI ea nee EE E EE EE EER E aes ES 26 Tables 5sesesesesieene e a S ee E E MEE 61 CUD OS itp re sete e ea oa em 6 6 Ee SERE BRENNEN REN MATT 63 Parameters 222 022 0 6 99 be ES RR R3 EYE FREE EVER d D E RE d 75 VIE WS eioen e score io e eren epo Ere E S er Da ERU eR NS D NEN RU 80 Snapshots e o vec o e i tr ep en ea 86 Monitored Fields eerie UE EE hw Re pu RE VERRE QA NUR RT Rea SR n arn 87 REPOLES morem 89 Dv Uu M ELE 89 smart Fields oce rr Arr Eve US PRISE WO B88 HE Bele Walev ela E RC PR RR 100 Selections s eure RR EUR CKRNDLUACE EUER E RR er ea RR ace tors Garters e Rc 111 WriteBacks mv Re mae r9 E RR ERR RR RR E Ua EVI Re 118 Publications 5 9 hore ES SC UEBER I esce EE rece nier 123 Schedul S 2 2 29 p v x RETEERRE Wb Ain CO ETE RN EET Wie REECEAMECPRE MS 127 Data Sources 2 ees pee REA SURE RUTAS EN my Seva a bean See amon EE MS 129 Security oes v ke v n DER REPRE FE EES ESE Ee kOe Bowe VE VET ES 136 ANALY COS T T X 141 Creating Reports esee t ere uiii VR E LR EV a m ere a 142 Quick Tips for Using Pivot Tables and Charts 0 cece ee eee noes 143 Iul 145 Chablis ux sr oU DERE TUE RUPEM URS RM E dede Pe URS 154 Data Analyzer V
18. 3 Packages are the mailings available for a segmentation If you want to assign a default package for all segments in the segmentation enter the package in the Package field You do not have to specify a default package but if you do it is only a default You can specify other packages for specific segments after you generate the segments For information about adding packages see Packages on page 183 4 Youcan enter an expected Response rate to your mailing You can also You can also add new specify the expected Gift amount from respondents Entering this packages on the information enables you to compare the expected versus actual response Packages tab rate when you analyze the segmentation later 5 To enable test segments mark the Create test segments for each segment checkbox If you mark the checkbox you can specify settings for test segments as subsets of your main segments It is important to understand the difference between test segments and test segmentations A test segment is useful if you have a new package or appeal you are introducing When creating test segments here you are sending the test out with the main mailing all at the same time If the test segment is successful in a future mailing you may want to switch from the old package to the new package Cai 180 2 CHAPTER 5 Test segmentations can be created by copying a percentage of an existing segmentation You can then send a mailing to only
19. 398 398 398 South Carolina Transportation A 288 288 288 Tyler amp Hanson Associates 583 583 583 United Broadcasting Company 386 386 386 Inman s Industrial Supply 438 438 438 Dynamic Engineering 292 292 292 South Carolina Blood Bank Kathleen R Bently You can drill through to individual records or create a WriteBack from the list When you click Export you export the records included in this segment from this screen For more information about exporting see Exporting Segmentations on page 194 Click OK to return to the Segmentation Wizard You can view and edit properties for individual segments within the segmentation Double click a segment The Segment Wizard appears On this screen you can edit the properties established on the Create Segments screen for only the selected segment Changes you make here do not affect the rest of the segments Click OK to return to the Segmentation Wizard You can rearrange the order of the segments using the up and down arrows in the toolbar on the General tab The order of segments is important because records can only be in one segment and criteria is processed from top to bottom So a person can be in a segment of City Los Angeles or State California but not in both Which segment they are part of depends on how the segments are ordered ey When viewing test segment records a random sample appears so the same records do not always appear in the view
20. 7 ADDRESS x 7 APPEAL TruncateTable mart refresh Indicates whether or not to trucate the data in this table before a data APPEAL EXPENSE of gt New XML definition Z StagingTable Specifying this attribute indicates that the table will not be visible in The Information Edge user interface and enables a second attribute TruncateAfterRefresh When using Incremental refresh with FastLoad True you must also specify the IDsChangedSQL if you want to use FastLoad True and have the incremental process use bulk loading See Incremental IDsChangedSQL on page 208 for more information 208 CHAPTER 6 TruncateAfterRefresh This attribute defaults to True When True it indicates that after a refresh has completed the staging table should be truncated and all data removed from the table For a true staging table this will typically be the case However in advanced Extract Transform and Load processes you may want to keep data in the staging table for the purposes of incremental refresh support In those rare cases you can specify False so that the data remains in the table after the refresh Another attribute Hidden True is available as well In 1 7 this is similar to StagingTable True because it hides the table from the The Information Edge user interface Incremental IDsChangedSQL In previous versions the USC incremental process could determine only the IDs that changed bas
21. Current Parent Foundation C orporation BALANCEf Pledge Valuation 186 540 80 180 00 159 47 7 993 23 50 000 00 42 809 56 Individuals Non apr Alumnus 6 125 00 Parent Graduate Widow 350 00 288 458 19 5 617 49 1 784 88 255 12 337 50 12 50 245 243 03 43 215 16 507 51 Endowment Campaign Total Campaign for Excellence Alumni Foundation C orporation Individuals Non Alumnus Grand Total 1 264 619 0 1 034 354 01 230 265 02 17 500 0 13 474 30 Current Parent 9 675 00 8 745 26 929 74 Former Faculty 1 000 00 878 00 122 00 Former Parent 20 000 00 19 138 76 851 24 4 025 70 2 000 000 00 3 60 1 252 22 1 913 875 60 Parent Graduate Campaign for Excellence Total 3 312 794 03 2 990 465 91 322 328 12 3 235 708 94 86 124 40 365 543 28 SOLUTIONS Regular and Irregular Pledges The Pledge Valuation Analytic can handle pledges with either regular or irregular payments Regular payments are those paid in installments equally spaced over time Examples of regular payment schedules are annually quarterly monthly and those payment installments have a specific beginning and end date Irregular payment schedules include pledges that are paid with varying intervals of time between payments and pledges that are promised to pay in g
22. eee eee eh hh hh hh ehh e eher 313 Seguer erer rb weno e E e UO oS See Be RE PESCE PCPVEEV RN KE NS 313 Soundex 4 5 oie 5 99e pha estes SE ERUNT ES URGE EN Eae sare ine 313 Standard Deviation ocx ess ye kh rer esr xs eT ERE Sls HE S E 314 Straight line Depreciation 0 cece ccc ccc c cece cece enone 314 SUM ves Eesentr Ue Se Hh wo Y REX Oe TR E I T E bb a are ere uen 315 Sum of Years Digits Depreciation eee eee 315 SYBUNT exe a REFERT A EE EA REE RA E Ue o 315 This Month zusenden ha nm res ette rr Bre serere eene 315 This Year s vy oren naen nE Er RE RE wre wre ee VET Eee mes 316 USA ZIP Distance ss unes th rh RES sia snet Re e a eevee 316 SMART FIELD DETAILS n th Item Category Miscellaneous What it Does An n th Item smart field finds any numbered child record in a collection and returns a value from the record So within a set of gifts you can find any item in the list and pull data from it For example you may want to look for patterns from data associated with the second gifts from your constituents A key difference between this smart field and the First Gift and Latest Gift smart fields is that the n th Item smart field can include more than just the gift date it can also include data such as campaign fund and appeal When Would I use an n th Item Smart Field Use this smart field when you need flexibility in pulling data from specific numbered gift records For example
23. gt d 2004 12 31 gd Right Click to select field from list Expression Wizard amp Preview Value for fields that meet this criteria Use this value Curent Donor C Use this field JBIZINTEL_ID z The join statement is now followed by your condition statement However the full expression is not yet valid Because the Wizard cannot predict what you are trying to achieve with your statement at this point you need to make a few changes To validate this statement we need to remove the closing parentheses after CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL ID on the fourth line and add it to the end of the statement This moves the date criteria inside the parentheses because we want it to affect the count of gift records We then need to specify the actual count to close out the statement In this case we want to locate any gifts given this year so we include anything greater than zero Your final statement looks like this SELECT CDUNTIRE ExPREss airrsg Removed RE EXPRESS GIFTS WHERE parentheses RE EXPRESS BIFTS BIZINTEL PARENT RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL_ID and RE EXPRESS GIFTS DATE gt d 2004 12 31 0 Added closing parentheses then count amount Now that your expression is complete click OK The Conditions screen appears displaying the condition you created Click Next The Name screen appears Click Finish A message appears indicating that the field has been saved SMART FIELD DETAILS 22 If you
24. 00000000 53 Completing the FE Express Raiser s Edge Source tab 54 Completing the FE Express Additional Tables tab 0 4 55 Completing the FE Express Publications tab 0 0 00 0000 ee 56 Installing a data mart created by Blackbaud 0 000000 58 Processing a data mart manually 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 59 Viewing or exporting refresh history for a data mart 60 Adding a dimension 0 0 0 0 0c cece cece cedis a nnes daas 65 Adding a measure 2 0 cee ee cette nena 66 Adding a calculated member 0 0 c eee eee eee eee eee 67 Creating a parameter isses TI Creating a Data View 1 25 rede de eyes bts o RR oe e 80 Completing the View General tab 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 81 Completing the View SQL tab 0 ke cee eee 82 Completing the View Results tab 0 2 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 83 Creating a snapshot table 0 ee cence eee 86 Adding a Monitored Field 0 0 0 cee eee eee 88 Creating an export definition 0 0 0 cee eect eee 89 Completing the Export General tab 90 Completing the Export Columns tab eee 91 Completing the Export Options tab 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 92 Completing the Export Filters tab 2 0 0 eee eee 94 Completing the Export Pivot Options tab 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 96 Completing the Export Address Fields tab 0 0 0 0 00000 eee 98 Completing the Export Posta
25. 7 After you complete and process the export when you open the exported file in Excel Sheet 1 includes a flat file of all the fields you included in the Selected Fields box on the Columns tab Sheet 2 contains a Pivot report with the rows columns data and filters page you specified C D E F PREF ADDRESS CITY All z Male Unknown blank 36 54545455 40 33333333 Average of BIO AGE Grand Total Alumnus 35 5 Board Member 42 33333333 Corporate Member Corporation Business Current Parent 49 Development Staff 43 5 Employee 37 33333333 Friend 43 69230769 PivotT able Field List Drag items to the PivotTable report BIZINTEL ID f BIZINTEL RE RECORSDII BIO SYSTEM ID E BIO NAME EjBIO ID BIO_KEY_INDICATOR FjBIO CONSTIT CODE 47 14285714 Grandparent B3 Major Donor Major Donor Prospect Matching Gift Company Member E BIO GENDER Online Donor BIO AGE Parent PREF ADDRESS ADDRLIT Y Parent Corporation Patient Prospective Donor Staff Doctor Student Subsidiary Corporation 26 Supporter Trustee Volunteer Volunteer Site Add To Row Area Grand Total 41 7037037 44 43835616 Postal Discount Exports If you have the optional module Postal Discounts you can create an export of records using country specific mail sort options Records are sorted based on the Presort ID field generated when the addresses are processed Because running a Postal
26. C Select records based on expression Expression Cancel lt Back Mert Finish 2 Mark the Include all records option to export all records in the fields you specified previously or in the table View or Monitored field for which you are creating an export Mark the Select records based on a field value option to include only those records with a specific field value The Field dropdown contains only those smart fields in the source table you previously selected Select the Value that records must have to be included in the export Mark the Select records based on expression option if you want to use a SQL expression to filter records You can enter text directly in the Expression box Right clicking in the box enables you to select from a list of fields in the target table You can also use the Expression wizard to create your SQL expression To access the wizard click the button to the top right of the Expression box CONFIGURATION 95 a On the Select Field screen select the field for which you want to create an expression All fields in the selected source table including any other smart fields you have already created are available b Click Next The Select Condition screen appears Select a Condition and specify the Values for that condition The available values vary depending on the selected condition For more information about the available conditions see Expression and Selection Wizard C
27. CONSTIT CODE D Smart Fields Ez a Segmentation BIZINTEL BIZIN BIZINTEL BIZIN BIO SYS Syste BIO N Name BIO ID ID BIO KEY Key In BIO CO Consti BIO GE Gender BIO AGE Age PREF_A Prefer PREF_A Prefer PREF_A Prefer VarChar PREF_A Prefer VarChar PREF_A Prefer VarChar Data Type Size Indexed VarChar 200 Yes Int 10 0 Yes Int 10 0 Yes VarChar 255 Yes VarChar 20 Yes VarChar 1 Yes VarChar 100 Yes PREFA Prefer vac Window 50 Yes 3 Yes 10 Yes VarChar 255 Yes AgeRang AgeR No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No No No No No No No GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE Alu In the console you can store frequently used items in a personal Dashboard and access other main areas of the program such as Configuration and Analytics In Configuration the tree view enables you to easily select a function The display on the right depends on your selection in the tree view Tree View The tree view is a central location for you to create items and run functions in several areas of the program Different items are available in the tree view depending on the area of the program it is accessed from Each item in the tree view contains a menu you can access by right clicking the item The right click menu contains options
28. Incremental vs Full Refresh A full refresh processes all records in the data mart An incremental refresh processes only those records that have changed since the last time you processed the data In most cases you can use an incremental refresh when available however in some specific situations a full refresh is necessary When is a Full Refresh Needed When a change is made to the structure of a database column which is used in an Information Edge data mart the changed column is dropped and re added to the data mart in order to update the structure When this happens all values in that column are set to NULL When you perform a Full Refresh all values in the table are updated and the NULL values are updated to the latest information However if you perform an incremental refresh records that have not been edited since the last refresh are not updated and contain NULL in any fields whose structure has changed New versions of Blackbaud products often contain changes to the database structure Therefore you should always perform a full refresh after updating The Raiser s Edge The Financial Edge The Education Edge or any other Blackbaud products that you use in your Data Marts to ensure that all fields have the latest structure and values Some other examples of when you would want to run a full refresh include f you have used the Raiser s Edge table entry cleanup utility to remove inconsistencies in your entries such as
29. Is not like The is not like condition selects the records that are not spelled like the entry you define You can also use the and wildcard characters with this operator Begins with Selecting begins with as the operator means that records selected must have an entry beginning with the value you define For example if you choose Last Name begins with Bell only constituents whose last name begin with Bell are selected for example Bell Bellmont or Bellingham You can use wildcard characters with this operator Does not begin with When you choose does not begin with as the operator the records selected must not have an entry beginning with the value you define For example if you choose Last Name does not begin with Bell only constituents whose last name does not have Bell at the beginning are selected You can use wildcard characters with this operator Ends with Selecting ends with as the operator means that records selected must have an entry ending with the value you define For example if you choose Last Name ends with son only constituents whose last name ends with son are selected for example Johnson or Williamson You can use wildcard characters with this operator Does not end with When you choose does not end with as the operator the records selected must not have an entry ending with the value you define For example if you choose Last Name does not end with son
30. Lift Chart and the chart appears E segmentation Wizard Summer Mailing File View Tools Actions Help gd Save X Export V Copy Chart to Clipboard Q Add to Dashboard inl xl w Cumulative Response w Response 95 by Segment w Amount Raised by Segment General Filter Budget Expenses Packages Properties D Lift chart Range 0 00 x to 1 25 Sort order Ju z Desc x Show Jor Jl Y segments Litt 6 Cumulative Lift Baseline 0 00 Under3 Range 30 49 Over 50 Each chart features different viewing options For example you can filter the Lift Chart by Range of lift sort the lift in ascending or descending order and specify to show a specific number of top or bottom performing segments Click any of the other items along the top of the segmentation pane to view information such as cumulative response and response percent by segment gt Analyzing all segmentations 1 From the tree view click the plus sign beside Cubes in a data mart for which you have activated one or more segmentations Select the cube named Segmentation Data The Information Edge File View Tools Help 333 9 ee BEES T MyDashboards 21 New v X Delete 2 Refresh E jl RE Express TEE Tables s 3 Dimensions gi nou Package Eit Cubes 14 Package Reply Envelope Siig GIFTS BY Segmentation tig Pivot Tables X Segment SM charts 1A TestSegment
31. Pivot Report you can Appeal from the Field List and drag it to the Drop Filter Fields Here area hide the toolbar and drop areas by right clicking and ms EVI vs AEn selecting Commands and Microsoft Office PivotTable 10 0 Options Select the Drop Filter ggelds Here Drag items to the Pivot Table list Behavior tab and unmark the Pers I0 GENDER 7 mu Totals Drop areas and Toolbar Year AMOUNT GIFTS Count AMO ei APPEAL checkboxes For more 2001 114 150 00 79 114 150 00 79 information about E2002 315 190 00 122 315 190 00 122 PE CAMPAIGN n m2003 118 365 00 65 118 365 00 65 T E CondtipilnE BID GENDER publishing iba 2004 65 620 00 28 865 620 00 28 D er Publications on page 123 E2005 40287 00 17 40 287 00 17 ra Year Grand Total 653 612 00 311 653 812 00 311 Bl Quarter B Month E FUND a E TYPE Add to Row Area T You can now click the down arrow beside Appeal and select individual appeals for which you can view gift information by gender 14 Click Save in the toolbar You can perform a variety of functions with the table For example from the action bar you can click Save to Clipboard to create an image of the table you can paste into an e mail presentation or other file In the toolbar you can click Export to Excel In Excel the Pivot Table is hot linked to the Information Edge database which means any changes you make to the Pivot Table in Excel are reflected in the current data
32. St versus Street or otherwise changed the descriptions of your code tables Or if you used the Raiser s Edge financial institution cleanup utility f you change the name of fields or tables If you perform a global change or import in The Raiser s Edge If you edit the export on which the data mart is based f you specify a different data source for the data mart The Raiser s Edge Date Last Changed Full refreshes are actually needed rarely For example if you change a fund s description the Date Last Changed flag in the database is set for the fund record but it is not set for every gift associated with that fund The gifts have not changed at all only some of the details about the fund to which they are linked Therefore gifts that have already been brought into the data mart would not see their Fund name change until the next full refresh However if you globally change gifts to replace Fund A with Fund B instead of renaming the fund the change is recorded on the Gifts and they will be included in an incremental update Similarly if you import new constituent addresses to numerous existing records or globally add an attribute to 100 000 constituents those changes are detected and the updated records brought into the data mart To understand what records are updated during an incremental refresh it helps to know What causes a timestamp to be updated in The Raiser s Edge database What timestamps The Inf
33. The Property which corresponds to a field in the table appears on the right You can add an unlimited number of properties 2 To create a new property click New The Add Property screen appears Add Property Lx Add a Custom Defined Property for Package Specify the name For this property in the space below Property Cancel In the Property field enter the name of the property such as Reply envelope or Weight You can enter text numbers or dates but all entries are stored as text with no special formatting 3 Click OK you return to the Custom Properties screen where your new property now appears 4 Click Close to exit the Custom Properties screen and return to the console You can now access the property from within the Segmentation Wizard For more information see Adding a segmentation on page 174 MARKETING SEGMENTATION 193 Activating Segmentations Before you can analyze the effectiveness of a segmentation you must activate it By activating the segmentation you are specifying a way to distinguish donations made as a result of the segmentation from all other donations received by your organization Once you activate the segmentation you can use analysis tools such as Lift charts as well as Pivot Tables and other Charts to determine the effectiveness of the segmentation gt Activating a segmentation 1 From the Segmentation page select the segmentation you want to acti
34. The same is true when viewing a segment with a fixed number of records or if the segment sample size is less than 100 percent The records are not actually determined until the segmentation is activated You can right click on the grid to add a test segment The order of segments is important because records can be included in only one segment Segments are processed in order from top to bottom If a record meets the criteria for more than one segment the first of those segments that is processed will include the record 178 7 CHAPTER 5 Each time you rearrange the order the entire segmentation recalculates Depending on the fields and filters used in the segmentation and the amount of data it contains this may take some time You can turn automatic recalculating off by selecting Tools Use manual calculation from the menu bar When you do this the segments are not recalculated when you move them After you finish rearranging the segments you can recalculate them by clicking the recalculate toolbar button fel Save Generate segments p Filter T Budget Expenses 9Packages A List Members Name Decie Description Mailing based on donors RFM score as disi Expenses 673 30 Budget 750 00 Filter Include all records frc 15 When you have completed working on the segmentation click Save in the toolbar From the File menu select Close You return to the Segmentation page where the new segment
35. You can also add new packages on the Packages tab 182 39 C CHAPTER 5 gt Adding or editing individual segments 1 From the segmentation General tab right click on an existing segment and select Open or to create a new segment right click and select New Segment The Segment Wizard appears on the Segment tab Segment Wizard _ O x 3 Segment Test Segments Properties Name Major Donors Description Selection selection 1 7 33 C Field z aa Value SY Package aede O mz i 5 Cost 1 00 Response rate so Yo Gift amount 0 00 Sample size w Percent v Help OK Cancel A Enter a Name and Description for the segment Specify whether you want the segment to consist of records included in a Selection or with a specific value from a Field If you select Field you must enter the Value that records must have to be included in the segment If necessary you can click the icon beside the field to create a new selection or smart field Packages are the mailings available for a segmentation Enter the mailing for this segment in the Package field If necessary you can edit an existing package or add a new one by clicking the icon beside the field For more information about adding packages see Packages on page 183 You can enter an expected Response rate for the segment You can also specify the expected Gift amount from respondents Enterin
36. You can specify the number of decimal places you want to display with the percentage You should mark this option only if the expression is complete as a standalone and the value will not be manipulated in another expression Percentage of Dimension Total m Expression Type m Parameters MDX Expression Show AMOUNT Difference Percentage of measure as a percentage of the total for the current Percentage of dimension total member of the dimension Percentage of parent total FUND Top or Bottom List RUNG across children Preserve the numeric value an Previous date value C Format as n with iz decimal places Year to date value p CONFIGURATION This expression calculates the value of a measure as a percentage of the current member of a dimension For example you may want to Show the value of your total gift Amount as a percentage of the total for the current member of the dimension Fund to show how much of your total giving is brought in by each individual fund In a Pivot Table the value in a cell is the intersection of a pivot In the Percent of Dimension Total expression current member refers to a cell that is current in context selected or in view For more information see About Dimension Hierarchies and Members on page 74 Mark the Preserve the numeric value option if you want the calculated value to display as a number Mark this opti
37. a Starting Date and Ending Date to create a date range and then select whether you want to measure the difference between them in days weeks months or years Days Since Category Fundraising What it Does A Days Since smart field calculates the number of days since a donor last gave When Would I use a Days Since Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to learn how many days have elapsed since selected donors have last donated to your organization Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Days Since smart field you must select a date which will form the basis for the field s value Decile Category Statistical What it Does A Decile smart field divides data from a selected field into ten groups 28203 2 2001 10 APPENDIX A When Would I use a Decile Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to divide data into ten distinct groups For example you may use a decile field as part of a marketing segmentation to divide the mailing into ten segments Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Decile smart field you must select a field containing data you want to break into ten groups You must indicate whether you want the groups to be sorted in ascending or descending order and whether to include zero value gifts in the smart field Depreciation Category Financial What it Does A Depreciation smart field calculates the depreciation of an asset for a specific time period using the double declinin
38. annuity In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series of future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made Again you select either a field or value In the Guess field enter your best guess for what the rate will be Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Interest Rate Category Financial What it Does An Interest Rate smart field calculates the interest rate per period for an annuity When Would I use an Interest Rate Smart Field Use this smart field when you need to determine the interest rate per period Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Interest Rate smart field in the Payment Periods field you must specify the number of payments in an annuity In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series o
39. automatic data mart processing on page 127 With The Information Edge Enterprise you can use the Warehouse feature to construct data warehouses by combining the data in multiple marts This enables you to compare and analyze data from a variety of sources in your reports For example you may want to combine separate data marts from different chapters within your organization or you may have a separate ticketing data mart that you would like to combine with a data mart created from Raiser s Edge information All the features of The Information Edge are available to analyze data warehouses you create from your data marts Key Values One of the most important considerations for a data warehouse is a key that can be used across data marts to identify records that are the same in multiple marts You may already have an ID field that serves this function in your data marts or you may need to create a key using a Key Value smart field By creating Key Value smart fields based on the same criteria in your data marts you can use the results to find matching records in the marts If you are a Raiser s Edge user the Key Value smart field is very similar to the concept of duplicate criteria you set up in Configuration to identify constituents who may have more than one record The Key Value smart field concatenates your input parameters to match keys in other data marts For more information about creating Key Value smart fields see Key
40. eee eee teen enn ened 129 Importing Blackbaud databases automatically 2 200 4 134 Adding database users and setting security access for them 136 26 _ CHAPTER 3 When processing an RE Express data mart a record refers to a constituent and all related information including gifts A constituent with fifteen gifts and five actions would be considered one record when processing the mart Your selections in Configuration affect functions defaults and settings throughout The Information Edge Use Configuration options to create data marts set up security rights for access to the data marts schedule automatic refreshes of data marts and more The main areas of Configuration are Data Marts Create and manage all aspects of data marts including cubes reports smart fields WriteBacks publications and more Data Sources Specify the Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge databases that will be included in your data marts For more information see Data Sources on page 129 Schedules You can specify recurring schedules for when your data marts are refreshed For more information see Schedules on page 127 Security You can add users to The Information Edge and specify whether they have rights to edit properties for all or specific data marts For more information see Security on page 136 Data Marts Data marts are the central component of The Information Edge When a data
41. f Amount by Fund EA Time mE anatyzer Views 14 Month gs CONSTITUENT B Quarter eppes 14 Year cu Segmentation Beam i Pivnt Tables You can include segmentation charts in your Publications For more information see Publications on page 123 N 202 CHAPTER 5 2 The Segmentation Data cube contains information for all active segmentations You can use analytical features such as Pivot Tables and Charts to analyze the segmentations and compare and contrast them with each other For more information about analyzing data in cubes see Cubes on page 63 Universal Source Connector Contents New Features in The Information Edge 1 7 205 Creating Data Marts with XML ccc cece cece eee eens 214 Adding Universal Source Connector Data Marts seu 214 The Information Edge XML Editor cece cece reece eee 221 Accessing the XML Editor 20 0 0 cee eens 221 Using The Information Edge XML Editor 0 0 000 0004 222 Microsoft Access Database Wizard 0 00 c eee eee eee ee 226 Primary Keys and the Access Wizard 0 0 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 226 Microsoft Excel Wizard 0 0 cee needa a i E eA 229 Primary Keys and the Excel Wizard 0 0 0 eee eee eee 230 Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard 00 c eee eee eee eee 234 Microsoft SQL Server Wizard 0 0 0 eee 236 Validating XML Piles aici cad y
42. gt Adding a Selection On the tree view under the data mart for which you want to create a selection right click Selections New The Selections Wizard appears opens to the General tab as 117 CHAPTER 3 2 On the General tab specify basic information such as the name and description of the selection For more information see Completing the Selection General tab on page 112 3 On the Criteria tab specify which records will be included in your selection For more information see Completing the Selection Criteria tab on page 113 4 Onthe Results tab you can view the data included in your selection by columns For more information see Completing the Selection Results tab on page 117 5 Click Finish to save the selection A message appears asking whether you want to process the selection now If you want to process it at this time click Yes Depending on the number of records to process this can take some time If you do not want to process the selection now you can click No and process it later gt Completing the Selection General tab 1 While creating or editing a selection select the General tab E selection Wizard ConstituentAgeUnder loj x General Criteria Resuts Name ConstituentAgeUnder Description Under 50 Dynamic Static IV All users may access this Selection v All users may modify this Selection Help Next gt ros
43. gt Completing the FE Express Raiser s Edge Source tab This tab is available only if you have already created an RE Express data mart 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the Raiser s Edge Source tab E New Data Mart Lx General Export Definition Cube Options Raiser s Edge Source Additional Tables Publications The Information Edge can create relationships between Financial Edge transaction data and Raiser s Edge constituent and gift data These relationships enable you to create powerful Smart Fields that merge data between the two programs If you have posted gifts from The Raiser s Edge to The Financial Edge and would like to take advantage of these Smart Fields please select an RE Express data mart that corresponds to this FE Express data mart IV Create relationships RE Express Data Mart RE Express Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 Ifyou have posted gifts from The Raiser s Edge to The Financial Edge and would like to create smart fields that enable you to merge data from the two programs mark the Create relationships checkbox 3 From the RE Express Data Mart dropdown select the RE Express data mart containing gift information that has been posted to The Financial Edge This information can be used in a Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field For example if you select an RE Express data mart here when you create a Blackbaud Transaction Data smart
44. in order to create the image file The Information Edge must first process the report which can increase processing time when publications are included in cube and data mart refreshes Because of the potential for slowing down processing we recommend you mark the Publish static reports checkbox only when you are sure the static versions will be needed by your users Click Charts on the left and mark checkboxes by any charts you want to include in the publication Repeat for Pivot Tables and Reports If you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module your activated Segmentations appear and you can mark checkboxes to publish the charts included in them After you select all the items you want to include in the publication click OK A message appears asking if you want to publish the selected items to HTML Click Yes You return to the console where the publication name appears in the console gt Viewing a Publication 1 Locate the folder where you specified to save the publication All files needed by the publication are stored in the directory CONFIGURATION 125 When you create publications on a client machine you can specify the path and Folder on the client machine However when you specify in a data mart s properties that publications process automatically each time the mart is processed because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the publication to the specified path and fol
45. key and columns to be used in this warehouse The master tables from all marts in the warehouse will be merged into a single master table Data Mart ne Express E Master table RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITUENT z Key columni ero svsrEM 1D This table contains both master and detail records Master columns to include BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO NAME BIO ID BIO KEY INDICATOR BIO CONSTIT CODE BIO GENDER zl OK Cancel 3 The Data Mart field drop down includes all data marts already added to The Information Edge Select a data mart to include in your warehouse lt lt lt lt lt lt 4 10 11 DATA WAREHOUSES In the Master table field select the table upon which detail tables in this data mart will be dependant in the warehouse In most cases the Master table will be the constituent or donor table The Master tables from all data marts are merged into one master table in the warehouse In the Key Column field enter the column which will be compared to other data marts to identify the same records in multiple marts For more information about key values see Key Values on page 260 Mark the This table contains both master and detail records checkbox if the table is flattened to include data such as both constituent and gift information Data Mart Custom Source flat Master table CUSTOM 1 FLATGIFTS E Keyc
46. new dimension appears in the right pane Adding Measures You can add new measures for each dimension Measures are numeric values assigned to dimensions These are the actual numbers on which you base your reports A measure is always a quantity or a representation that yields a quantity You must have at least one measure to perform any type of analysis A measure is a quantity that is analyzed across multiple dimensions by The Information Edge For example a cube may include gift amounts by month by appeal and by constituent The measure in this case is gift amount and each intersection of the three dimensions has a different gift amount value gt Adding a measure 1 On the tree view click the plus sign beside Cubes under the data mart containing the cube for which you want to add a dimension Right click on the cube and select New Measure The Measures screen appears Add New Measure Ea Measures Measures are aggregates based on numeric fields You can form a measure from any numeric Field on this cube s Fact table Use this dialog to add new measures that you will use in your reports m Data Source Use the dropdown below to select the numeric field that will serve as source for this measure Table IRE EXPRESS GIFTS Field AMOUNT 7 Settings Name SUM_AMOUNT Aggregate Sum h DK Cancel 3 In the Data Sources frame the Table field is locked with the nam
47. only constituents whose last name does not have son at the end are selected You can use wildcard characters with this operator Is blank If you select blank as the operator the records selected must have a blank in the field you specify For example if you choose constituent ID is blank the program selects records with an empty ID field Is not blank When is not blank is selected as the operator the selected records must have an entry in the field you specify For example if you select constituent ID is not blank the program selects all records with an entry in the ID field Contains Choosing contains as the operator selects records containing the defined value anywhere in the field For example if you select Last Name contains G any records with the letter G anywhere in the Last name field are selected You can use wildcard characters with this operator 86 CHAPTER 3 Does not contain Choosing does not contain as the operator selects records that do not have the defined entry anywhere in the field you specify For example if you select Last Name does not contain G only records without a G anywhere in the Last name field are selected You can use wildcard characters with this operator Snapshots Snapshot tables enable you to take a picture of data as it appears at a certain point in time You can use snapshot tables to compare data from a certain time with current
48. property with values of Postage Paid Postage Required and None When you add a property for a segmentation the property is available to associate with all segmentations in all data marts the property defaults to blank In addition to segmentations you can use the properties you define in segments test segments and packages Properties you create are available in the Segmentation cube as dimensions so you can use them in your analyses For example you may want to know whether a package with a heavier weight and mailing cost generates a reasonable return on investment compared to a lighter mailing or whether including a postage paid envelope with your mailing generates more donations Only users with administrator rights can add properties however those with user rights can still use properties in records and add values for properties Properties you define can also appear as properties in a Pivot Table or Chart f A917 C 192 2 CHAPTER 5 gt Creating custom properties 1 From the menu bar select Tools Custom Properties The Custom Properties screen appears E cust n Properties fel Eg Custom properties can be defined For the record types listed below These properties will be available in the segmentation cube and through the edit dialogs For items listed Record Type Property if New gt lt Delete The Record Type box lists the table types for which you can create properties
49. see the following procedure gt Adding Key Value smart field criteria 1 When creating a Key Value smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x General Type Tables Criteria Filter Advanced Input parameters Field Name Name 255 s il Remove M Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel J SMART FIELD DETAILS 301 2 Click Add to specify a key value component The Field Element screen appears Field Element Select the field to be included and the desired length 3 Enter the Database Field for which you are establishing the key value For example you will probably want to use donor name as one of the components of your key value Enter the Length in characters you want the program to examine for the field For example if you enter 255 the program will include a key value consisting of the first 255 characters of the donor name field 4 Click OK You return to the Fields screen where your key value now appears Smart Field Wizard Ea Fields Add or modify the components of the key value field in this step Input parameters Field Name Sample Donor DonorN ame 255 Sample Donor City 255 Sample Donor PostCode 15 You may want to specify other values such as address information as elements for your field 4 302 i APPENDIX A Latency Category Fundraising What it Does A Latency smart field returns the
50. you may want to create separate n th Item smart fields to look for trends in which funds were associated with the first second and third gifts from your donors Or you may want to look for patterns among the appeals associated with the last five gifts from your constituents Criteria On the Criteria tab for an n th Item smart field you must specify the data that the field will return the value that will determine the order of the values you selected to return and which specific value you want to return first second third etc For more information see the following procedure gt Adding n th Item smart field criteria 1 When creating an n th Item smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard E Filter Advanced General Type Tables Result field Amount pe Order by field Amount ad Find the 1 Amount from the start C from the end For each record in RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT find its collection of items in RE EXPRESS GIFTS sorted by Amount and return the value of Amount for the 1st item from the start of the collection Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 2 In the Result field select the data that will be returned in the smart field 267 47 _ 268 APPENDIX A 3 In the Order by field select the value that will determine the order of the n th value For example if you select AMOUNT and specify to see the t
51. 00 00 OR 01 01 2005 01 00 00 AND lt CDATE 01 02 2005 02 00 00 The first part of the WHERE clause ensures only those records that were changed after the last time the data mart was processed 1 1 2005 at 1 00 am are extracted DATE LAST CHANGED gt 01 01 2005 01 00 00 OR DATE ADDED gt 01 01 2005 01 00 00 The second part of the WHERE clause prevents records from being selected that may be changed after the data mart starts processing 1 2 2005 at 2 00 am DATE LAST CHANGED 01 02 2005 02 00 00 Data Warehouses Contents Key Values be LI Re Ia dry Sa a dere ree ERE Adding Data Warehouses 00 e cece cece cece eee c eee eeeeee Procedures Adding a Data Warehouse 0 0 cece eee enee Completing the Warehouse General tab 000 cece eee eee Completing the Warehouse Data Marts tab 0 0 0c eee eee Completing the Warehouse Publications tab 2 000 5 N m Q m Q 4 ic O 260 CHAPTER 7 When refreshing a warehouse the individual marts contained in the warehouse should be processed before the warehouse so it will contain the most recent data If you create a schedule that automatically refreshes a warehouse you should specify that each mart in it process before the warehouse For more information about scheduling data mart refreshes see Scheduling
52. 243 Version You can optionally provide a number to help you keep track of different versions of this definition UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 243 a N TABLE Used to define the tables from your data source that will be pulled into The Information Edge Parent to the FIELDSET and SOURCESET elements which specify the data fields and their sources BIPACKAGE SEGMEHTATIOHIHFO TABLE Attributes Comments FriendlyName Supports the View Friendly Name feature The Information Edge XML Editor can auto generate Friendly Field Names FriendlyName is available on all lt FIELDSET gt MEASURE and DIMENSION elements Hidden Specifying True indicates the table definition should be hidden from The Information Edge user interface Name Name of table PrimaryKey Unique identifier ID Unique identifier for this table The Information Edge XML Editor can auto assign table IDs Re7TableType Identifies the table as having a specific type of Raiser s Edge record Can use Re7TableTypeEnum to specify a value of Constituent Gift or None StagingTable Specifying this attribute as True means that the table will not be visible in the user interface and enables a second attribute TruncateAfterRefresh TruncateAfterRefresh This attribute is available only when StagingTable True and it defaults to True When True it indicates that after a refresh has completed the stagi
53. 245 246 2 CHAPTER 6 DATAPROVIDER Attributes Comments CommandText SQL SELECT statement that populates the table If you are using incremental processing you will need to modify the WHERE clause of the command text to include the LASTENDPOINT and CURRENTENDPOINT macros For more information see Incremental Command Text Macros and Examples on page 256 CommandTextHasMacros True if the SQL statement above contains one or more of the predefined macros to be expanded at runtime You can use these macros as placeholders for certain text strings For more information see Macros on page 254 FastLoad Defaults to False When pulling data from OLEDB or MS SQL Server sources setting this to true causes The Information Edge to use the SQL Server bulk load feature the OLEDB IRowSetFastLoad interface available via the DTS DataPump API However not all CommandText SQL statements can be used with FastLoad True If the SQL statement contains any expressions that are not direct column names from a table or view then the expression must have an alias For example the statement Select First Name Last Name ID from dbo RECORDS would not be eligible for FastLoad True because the first column in the select statement is an expression that has not been named If you change this SQL to Select First Name Last Name as Name ID from dbo RECORDS then FastLoad Tru
54. Activated Date Program Code E Tables Fal Mailing Active Wednesday October 12 2005 RE EXPRESS GIFTS APPEAL OPENHOUSE H Cubes g Parameters B Views Ei ij Snapshots New segmentation 2 Inactive Undefined j New segmentation 3 Inactive Undefined Configuration E Monitored Fields Efi Reports H Exports E BM Smart Fields EIS Selections SY ConstituentAgeUnder Gifts EA WriteBacks H Publications Fall Mailing New segmentation 2 New segmentation 3 From the Segmentation page you can access all items related to your segmentations including creating new ones and editing and viewing existing ones 29174 LP CHAPTER 5 Creating Segmentations Segmentations target your mailings A segmentation is based on a selection or field value in The Information Edge For example if you have an RFM smart field to score recency frequency and monetary value of gifts for your donors you can create different segments for each of these groups Additionally you can create different packages for the individual segments in a segmentation Segment packages are the mailings you send to your donors For example your year end mailing may consist of several different pieces each targeted to a different group You may have a glossy calendar for your best donors a post card for your lowest donors and several pieces in between You can also track budget amounts versus actual costs for the segmentation and
55. Cancel 2 Enter a Name and Description for the selection This information appears on the main Selections page of Configuration 3 When you select the Dynamic option the selection is automatically refreshed each time it is used Any new records meeting the criteria you specify are included each time the selection is run When you select the Static option only the records included when the selection is originally created are included in it Any records added or edited after the selection is initially saved are not included even if they meet the criteria CONFIGURATION 113 4 The All users may access this Selection checkbox is locked as marked so the selection can be used by other users of the program If you want to unmark it you must first unmark the Other users may modify this Selection checkbox to indicate that other users cannot edit the properties of this selection 5 If you are creating a new selection click Next to access the Criteria tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing selection click Finish to save your changes and exit the Selection Wizard gt Completing the Selection Criteria tab 1 While creating or editing a selection select the Criteria tab E Selection Wizard ConstituentAgeUnder i E x General Results Available fields Apply these filters eal Tables gt BIO AGE Is Less Than Or Equal To Sin
56. Definition Additional T ables Publications M Create Cubes v Automatically create dimensions Date Hierarchy Yea Quarter Month bud Year starts January hed he Include these calculated members in gift cubes Year to Date Amount Year to Date Gift count Amount previous year Count previous year of Previous Year Amount of Previous Year Count Avg Amount lt lt lt lt lt lt I Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish To take full advantage of all features in The Information Edge mark the Create Cubes checkbox The only time you may want to unmark this checkbox is if you do not intend to use this data mart with any of The Information Edge interactive features for example you may intend to use the data only in Crystal Reports not in Charts or Pivot Tables If you unmark the Create Cubes checkbox none of the other options on this tab are available If you want to create dimensions mark the Automatically create dimensions checkbox In an RE Express data mart dimensions are any code table included in the export file Creating the dimensions now gives you flexibility in your reports later and saves you the time of adding them manually Select a Date Hierarchy to determine how date dimensions nest in the cube and appear in reports Specify when the Year starts for your organization For example if your fiscal year begins March 1 you can
57. Discount export requires you to specify information such as the types of mailing reports you want to print you cannot include Postal Discount exports as part of a scheduled data mart refresh The scheduled refresh would stop at the point where you are required to specify information When you select address fields to map for address processing with Postal Discounts not all fields are required In a Postal Discount export data is shifted to the left to fill in any blank cells For example Addr Line 1 Addr Line 2 Zip Code 742 John St Apt 1 Charleston SC 20492 104 Dockwell Rd Charleston SC 29402 Addison Adler 4 97 A 2 98 CHAPTER 3 Because the table is selected here the Table Name field is not available on the Columns tab as it is in other types of exports Additionally the Available Fields list on the Columns tab includes address processing fields indicated by brackets surrounding the name These fields vary depending on the country setting and whether or not the program has been enabled for address certification CASS Fields are exported in the selected order Becomes F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Addison 742 John St Apt 1 Charleston SC 29492 Adler 104 Dockwell Rd Charleston SC 29492 In addition to the standard export property tabs a Postal Discount export includes two additional tabs For information about completing the tabs on a standard export defini
58. Editor menu bar select File New If you already have a file open you are asked whether you want to discard any current edits The Tree Property View tab appears showing the lt BIPACKAGE gt element E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition olx File Tools Help aul Aag S Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection 4l Description created by BBNT davidow 0 SegmentationInfo Mone Tables Collection Version 1 Add Table Add Cube Cubes The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart New XML definition The lt BIPACKAGE gt element is parent to all the elements that define the tables and fields from your data source The default information is based on the BIPACKAGEDEFINITION XSD schema included with The Information Edge UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 223 s Cue 2 Youcan add items to the file individually or in collections To add a single At any time you can new table to the file click Add Table click the Text View and Web View tabs to change the view of the file you are editing or creating 2 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help Aa 5 is 3 Additionally you can type ESI irea Text view E web view directly into the Text View f tab display pane However Ajj lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection E Description created by any comm
59. F1 on your keyboard from either of the tabs Although the export parameter tabs are essentially the same here as when they are accessed from within The Financial Edge for a given export type all the fields that are available from within The Financial Edge may not be available in the export you are creating from within The Information Edge This is because some fields may be available in a different node For example if you create an export directly from The Financial Edge for Projects transactions are available to include in the export However in The Information Edge Projects and Transactions appear as separate checkboxes under General Ledger When you edit the Project export settings transactions are not available there because all transactions are available for export by selecting that checkbox If they were available in both places you could potentially have duplicate information in the data mart When the data mart is created The Information Edge automatically creates any necessary relationships between the tables in this case the relationship between the PROJECT and TRANSACTIONS tables On the Filters tab determine which records you want to consider for your export You can choose to use all records from your database or selected records from your database using a query DS CONFIGURATION coy 6 Select the Output tab E FE Express Data Mart of x File Edit View Help Available Fields Alb g
60. Finish Pe ee 40 gt CHAPTER 3 To add a new data source click Add The Create Table or Append Data screen appears IE Properties Create Table or Append Data Select the method of including data from the options below 3 When you select the Create new table option a new table is created in the data mart from the source you will specify in later steps Later you can also optionally specify to create a relationship between this table and another table in the mart If you select the Append fields to an existing table option you will specify a common key to add a table from another source to a table you export from The Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge The key field is a field in both tables that share the same value It is the common value that links the two tables CONFIGURATION 41 4 Click Next The Data Source screen appears Table Properties Data Source Choose the type of data source from the options below and enter the data source You can use the ellipsis to the left of the Data Source field to search for a file or server Microsoft Access M C Files ClientContact mdb 5 Select the Type of data you want to add Browse to the location of the file or server containing the data and select it in the Data Source field If you select an Access database that requires a password for entry enter the Password If you select a SQL Server database specify w
61. NetCommunity The Information Edge WealthPoint and ProspectPoint are trademarks or registered trademarks of Blackbaud Inc The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners
62. Primary Keys and the Excel Wizard When you use the Excel Wizard in the XML Editor a Field named BBIC AUTO PK is added to each table The IsIdentity property for this field is set to TRUE so the field will auto increment and it is marked as the Primary Key for the table This is done so you do not have to manually create a Primary Key for each table E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help ud E xg Tree Property View S Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt DataType Int c Calllog D f lt FIELDSET gt CallId ContactId CallDate Resourceld ResultsId Comments BBIC AUTO PK Blow aes E Contacts og bbic_auto_pk field NoIndex False EA n LS E53 E53 CSCS E53 E E Organizations E Results H E tblorganizations Fe IsIdentity True if this is an autoincrement field Not recommended New XML definition Z The BBIC AUTO PK field is the last field in the list of fields for the table and the SELECT statement should not include a column for this field If n fields are defined BBIC AUTO PK must be the nth 1 field and the SELECT statement must only contain n columns The IsIdentity property is set to true for the BBIC AUTO PK field When there is no true Primary Key in the source and if you do not want to use the BBIC AUTO PK field you can remove th
63. RE EXPRESS GIFTS BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID FROM RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT In this example the SELECT clause uses the COUNTY function to return a count of the non null values in the BIZINTEL ID field of the RE EXPRESS GIFTS table A291 4 298 APPENDIX A The WHERE clause is used to restrict the count to a specific constituent identified by the BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID field in the RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT table by joining it to the foreign key field BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID in the RE EXPRESS GIFTS table First Gift Category Fundraising What it Does A First Gift smart field indicates the first gift given by a donor in a specified date range When Would I use a First Gift Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine when constituents gave their first gifts in a date range Criteria On the Criteria tab for a First Gift smart field you must select the date on which the field will be based and whether the field should include all records in the field or only those within a specific range you set Future Value Category Financial What it Does A Future Value smart field calculates the value of an annuity based on periodic fixed payments and a fixed interest rate When Would I use a Future Value Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the value at some point in the future of a present amount
64. RFM smart field 291 data analyzer view 162 data from other sources in RE Express and FE Express 39 data sources 129 data view 80 database users 136 dimension 65 measure 66 monitored field 88 pivot 148 pledge valuation smart field 310 RE WriteBack 118 segmentation 174 test segment 189 test segmentation 190 universal source connector data marts 214 Warehouse data warehouses 260 alias see friendly names 12 amount raised by segment 200 analyzing segmentations all segmentations 201 amount raised by segment 200 cumulative response 199 individual segmentation 200 lift charts 199 response by segment 199 test segment performance 200 average smart field 268 B bin smart field 268 BIPACKAGE 242 BIZINTEL IDs FE Express 57 RE Express 46 BIZINTEL TABLENAME SYSTEM ID 57 BIZINTEL FE ID 57 BIZINTEL PARENTID FE Express 57 RE Express 46 BIZINTEL PARENTID TABLENAME 57 BIZINTEL REID 46 BIZINTEL RERECORSDID 46 C calculated member templates 69 calculated members 67 Charts about Charts 154 adding a new Chart 158 concatenation smart field 274 condition smart field 275 contributor smart field 285 copy smart field 285 copying segmentations 190 count smart field 290 creating crystal report 165 custom properties 192 data mart Access database from 226 Excel spreadsheet from 230 FE Express with 46 OLEDB Data Source Wizard with 234 RE Express with 26 SQL Server Wizard with 237 data mart with FE Expre
65. Results tab 1 While creating or editing a View select the Results tab E view Wizard OE x File Edit View Help General SQL i Only the first 100 records will be displayed Constituent ID BIO NAME BIO_AGE 616 Agnes M Co 82 609 Alan C Hayes 43 608 Alan R Hayes 34 582 Alexander M 30 495 Allison D Go 33 1188 Allison E An 44 266 Andrea L Ti zh 482 Andrew Cren 23 333 Angela Dires 37 260 Anne C Sinc 44 201 Anthony S E 50 230 Audrey Lor 33 196 Autumn L C 29 Barrett J 0 lt Back Next Cancel Help nisn The Results tab displays the first 100 records data organized in columns resulting from your Criteria Output and Sort field selections 2 Ifyou are editing the properties of an existing View click OK to save your changes and exit the View Wizard If you are creating a new View click Finish to save it and return to the main Views page Expression Wizard The Expression Wizard is available to help you create several types of smart fields and to create filters for numerous functions To use the Expression Wizard on the Select Field screen select a field for which you want to create an expression All fields in the selected target table including any other smart fields you have already created are available Click Next The Expression Wizard Select Condition screen appears Select a Condition and specify the Values for that co
66. Source Connector feature in the Enterprise version of The Information Edge enables you to create your own data marts so you can add your data sources for analysis A data mart consists of a series of data structures such as tables and cubes and the data to populate those structures To create a data mart you write an XML file that defines the tables fields data types and cubes for your data mart You can create multiple tables within an XML file and use multiple data sources to populate one table The Universal Source Connector also includes The Information Edge XML Editor This utility helps you to create and validate XML files Additionally the editor includes wizards to help you create data marts from Microsoft Access databases Excel spreadsheets and OLEDB data sources You can bring data in from a variety of sources Youcan use SQL statements to bring in Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge data You may want to bring in specific subsets of RE Express data Any ODBC or OLE data source This includes Access databases as well as numerous other database types Proprietary API systems not ODBC or OLE are supported You must create the code that interacts with these APIs Youcan specify a subset of Information Edge data for even faster processing For example you may want to include only records from a certain region New Universal Source Connector Features in The Information Edge 1 7 Performance Optimizations Several
67. Tools When you purchase an Information Edge optional module you are given an activation code To unlock the module select Tools Unlock Codes A screen appears for you to enter your code With the optional module Marketing Segmentation you can specify Custom Properties for your segmentations For more information see Custom Properties on page 191 Additionally some other options are available on the Tools menu depending on the type of item you have selected in the tree view For example when you have a cube selected you can specify whether or not the cube should refresh automatically each time the data mart to which it belongs is refreshed Actions The available items vary depending on the currently selected item in the tree view For example if you select a data mart in the Configuration tree view you can refresh the data or restart a previous refresh The Restart option is available only when a previous data mart refresh was interrupted for some reason To save time you can begin processing from the last checkpoint instead of starting over Help Access help topics to assist in using The Information Edge and learn more about the particular version you have installed Action Bar fjNew 3 X a SjRefres T Several Action bar buttons are available no matter what item is selected in the tree view and are sensitive to the item selected in the tree view For example if a selected item can be refreshed smart fie
68. VarChar 200 Yes No No BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIZINTEL RE Int 10 0 Yes No No C Segmentation EA BIO SYSTEM ID System Record Int 10 0 Yes No No H Cubes Bev BIO NAME Name VarChar 255 Yes No No amp EN 1 i BIO ID 1D varchar 20 Yes No No amp Bal un ioe BIO KEY INDICATOR Key Indicator VarChar 1 Yes No No amp Gg Monitored Fields BIO_CONSTIT_CODE Constituent Code VarChar 100 Yes No No E amp Parameters Bl smart Fields BIO GENDER Gender VarChar 255 Yes No No d B Ri i BIO_AGE Age Int 10 0 Yes No No F i hund PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE1 Preferred Addr VarChar 150 No No No G 1 ed 2 PREF_ADDRESS_ADDRLINE2 Preferred Addr VarChar 150 No No No HE e ina 5 PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 Preferred Addr VarChar 150 No No No H e on ae PREF_ADDRESS_CITY Preferred Addr VarChar 50 Yes No No wm cere PREF ADDRESS STATE Preferred Addr VarChar 3 Yes No No E FE Express PREF ADDRESS ZIP Preferred Addr VarChar 10 Yes No No Concat Concat Test VarChar 255 Yes No Yes SmartField 2 SmartField 2 Money 19 4 Yes No Yes CurrentDonor Current Donor VarChar 255 Yes No Yes RFM RFM Int 10 0 Yes No Yes DecileRFM DecileRFM Int 10 0 Yes No Yes For more information about tables Snapshot Tables and Monitored Fields see Tables on page 61 Understanding Cubes OLAP online analytical processing cubes are one of the keys to analytical reporting OLAP is a type of data processing that enables you to easily and selectively
69. When you click View Designer you access the View Designer to assist you in creating a SQL statement a On the Source Tables screen click the right arrow to move the tables you want to include in the View from the Available Tables box to the Selected Tables box Click Next The Fields screen appears b Click the right arrow to move the fields you want to include in the View from the Available Fields box to the Selected Fields box Click Next The Condition screen appears c You can filter the records included in the View using SQL statements You can enter a SQL statement directly in the box or use the Expression Wizard to help you create a statement For more information see Expression Wizard on page 83 Click Next The Sort screen appears d Specify the fields on which you want to base sorting for the View and specify whether the values for the fields should be sorted in ascending or descending order e Click Finish You return to the SQL tab 4 When you click Load you can select either File or Query to access a SQL file or previously saved query Once you select the file or query the SQL appears in the text box on the SQL tab CONFIGURATION 5 If you are creating a new View click Next to access the Results tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing View click OK to save your changes and exit the View Wizard gt Completing the View
70. a value only if one exists for the current period checkbox if no value exists in the selected time period no value shows for the calculated member Year to Date Value Parameters Get the YTD value of AMOUNT m in the dimension DATE m Expression Type MDX Expression Difference Percentage of measure Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Rank Previous date value You can create an expression that calculates the year to date value for a member For example you may want to Get the YTD value of your total gift Amount in the dimension Date for use in comparisons with other years giving amounts 73 c 2 y ar 4 C 74 xu CHAPTER 3 74 About Dimension Hierarchies and Members You can view the hierarchy between parent and child dimensions In the following example the Date dimension is parent to the Month Quarter and Year dimensions EC Dimensions APPEAL T CAMPAIGN 14 Constit BIO CONSTIT CODE 14 Constit BIO GENDER DATE TA Month 1A Quarter 1A Year 14 FUND lA TYPE All dimensions are part of a hierarchy but for some dimensions the hierarchy is implied In the previous example the Fund dimension may not appear to be a child of any other dimension but it is actually a child of the All Member dimension Members are the items that make up dimensions All Me
71. about parent and child dimensions see About Dimension Hierarchies and Members on page 74 CONFIGURATION Rank r Parameters Rank FUND by GIFTS Count r Expression Type MDX Expression Difference Percentage of measure Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Previous date value Year to date value This expression ranks the entries for a selected dimension by a value you select For example you may want to Rank the members of your Fund dimension by the Gift count each has brought in so you can analyze how each of your funds is performing Previous Date Value Parameters Show Rank 123 Years prior in the dimension DATE Return a value only if one exists for the current period r Expression Type MDX Expression Difference Percentage of measure Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Rank Previous date value Year to date value You can use the wizard to create an expression that gets the value of a measure in a previous time period you select For example you may have created a Rank calculated member for your Appeals and now need a calculation to Show the value of your funds Rank 1 year prior in the dimension Date When you mark the Return
72. and are available as soon as the new segmentation is activated 6 If the segmentation you are copying has not yet been activated the Copy expected response rates option is locked as marked If the segmentation has been activated you can select to Use actual response rates from this segmentation in the copy instead of the expected response rates 7 Ifthe segmentation you are copying has not yet been activated the Copy expected gift amounts option is locked as marked If the segmentation has already been activated you can specify to Use average gift amounts from this segmentation in the copy instead of the expected entries Click OK to create the copy 9 The Segmentation Wizard appears with the specified information copied from the existing segmentation The name defaults to Copy of existing segmentation After you create a test segmentation you can activate it to analyze its success in bringing in donations If the test segment is successful you can use filtering to send the mailing to rest of the segment without sending duplicates to the test segment For more information about activating segmentations see Activating Segmentations on page 193 For information about filtering segmentations see Filtering Segmentations on page 184 Custom Properties You can define properties for use in segmentations Once you define a property it is available for use in all data marts For example you can create a Reply Envelope
73. at the bottom of the can affect the speed tab Records included in the previous segmentation will not be included in with which you can the current one rearrange segments For more information see 7 Click OK to save your settings Adding a segmentation on page 174 To enable analyzing the success of a segmentation you must activate it For more information see Activating a segmentation on page 193 Budget Expenses You can enter the amount you have budgeted for a segmentation so you can view at a glance whether or not it has exceeded the budget If enough money is not budgeted to mail to all members of a segment that row is highlighted in red on the General tab grid You can address this in several ways ncrease the budget amount although this may not always be possible Change the filters for the segmentation You can specify a field value as criteria for your mailing The segmentation will then include only those members who have that specific value You can also choose to exclude members of a previously activated segmentation For example you can reduce costs by excluding people from your Summer Appeal if they were included in the Spring Appeal For more information see Analyzing Segmentations on page 198 Change the packages Some packages may be more expensive than others You can bring costs under control by using a less expensive package for a segment or segments as 186 CHAPTER 5
74. be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Expression Right Click to select field from list Expression Wizard amp Preview Value for fields that meet this criteria Use this value C Use this field BIZINTEL_RE_RECORSDID If you are familiar with creating SQL statements you can enter text directly in the Expression box Right click in the box to view a list of fields in the target table you selected as well as any related tables Properties Lx Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the Fields that meet this criteria Expression a Constituent 3 Fields Age S a Gifts gt Dei Smart Fields gt Constituent Code Insert a Subquery iJ Parameters Gender Ri ID W Undo Constituent m Key Indicator Cut Name da Lopy System Record ID GA Paste BIZINTEL_ID E Delete BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID Ok Preferred Address address line 1 Select All Unis Preferred Address address line 2 Preferred Address address line 3 Preferred Address city Preferred Address state Preferred Address ZIP The data type you select for the smart field also restricts your options for setting a default value for records that do not meet your criteria Any entry in the Use this value field must be valid for the output data type for example a date for a Date type field and only fields with a matching data type appear in the Use th
75. be displayed in the view Dimensions O APPEAL O Blackbaud_Non_Contributor L1 CAMPAIGN O Constituent BID GENDER O DATE O FUND C PREF_ADDRESS_CITY O TYPE Cancel Ae In the Dimensions box check the dimensions you want to include in the view ANALYTICS 163 2 Cad 8 Select the Measures tab Dimensions Measures Template Measures Select the measures to be used in each type of display Display Type Bars hd Length AMOUNT of Previous Year Amount Cancel Apply 9 Select whether you want to view a Display Type of Bars or Grid With bar charts you can select only two measures and the Length and Color of the bars are used to display them For example the amount of gifts for a region may be measured by the length of a bar and the total of gifts compared with last year may be measured by color So the length of a bar may indicate which region produces the most gifts while the color represents how the region is performing compared to last year The color range falls between red and green By default red represents values that you might be concerned about such as high cost or negative giving growth Green represents the opposite low cost or outstanding giving growth You can change the color defaults once the View appears by clicking the Color Scale toolbar button If you select a Display Type of Grid the Analyzer View displays data in tabular format
76. be thought of as two dimensional a multidimensional database considers each data attribute as a separate dimension OLAP software can locate the intersection of dimensions For example all gifts given to an appeal during the month of April by constituents over 55 who live in Florida and display them Attributes such as time periods can be broken down into subattributes OLAP can be used for data mining or the discovery of previously unseen relationships between data items Using Export in The Raiser s Edge or Open Database Connectivity ODBC in other programs data can be imported from existing relational databases to create a multidimensional database for OLAP OLTP OLTP online transaction processing is a data processing system designed to record all the day to day transactions of an organization as they occur The Raiser s Edge is an OLTP system OLTP systems are designed to run the day to day raw data of an organization which requires efficient detailed processing of transactions such as gift entry OLTP systems operate in real time and continuously Because they are already meeting these demands OLTP systems have little analytical ability Packages Packages are mailings in segmentations For example you may have glossy calendar brochure and post card packages which you assign to different segments within a segmentation Parent A member that is directly above another member in a hierarchy Pivot Table A Pivot Tabl
77. create the condition for this field later in this procedure the value you specify to enter for records that meet your condition criteria must be valid for the type you specify here Currency Value can be any positive or negative numeric value Currency values can include as many as four places to the right of the decimal Values with more than four decimal places are rounded to the last number e Date Value must be a valid date for example 06 05 05 Numeric Value must be numeric can contain a decimal point Integer Value must be negative or positive whole numbers Text Value can be text or mixed value types such as a date and a numeric value 3 Beside Default value select the value that you want to appear in the field on records that do not meet the criteria you establish When you select NULL no entry appears in the field 4 5 SMART FIELD DETAILS You can mark Use this value and enter a value or mark Use this field and select a field whose value will populate the smart field on records that do not meet your criteria To create input parameters for the smart field click Add The Criteria screen appears Properties Lx Criteria Enter the Blackbaud system and record type as well as the value to be assigned to the Smart Field For transactions that meet this criteria Blackbaud system The Raiser s Edge Y Record type Gift v m C Use this value Use
78. dbo AP7CREDITMEMOATTRIBUTES C dha DncChEDTTMENONOTEC 6 Ifthe connection string is valid the Tables and Views tabs include all those items from the selected database Mark the checkboxes by any tables and views you want to include in your Universal Source Connector data mart 239 240 CHAPTER 6 7 After you select the tables and views you want to include in the XML Editor click OK You return to the editor where the information from the data source now appears 2 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition Eile Tools Help uv A xg TreejProperty View E Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt FieldSet E ACCOUNTSECURITY E ACTIONREMINDERS E ADDRESS E ADDRESSLINKPHONES E ADDRESSLINKS E ADDRESSPHONES E ADJUSTMENTS E AGINGBUCKETS E aP1099BOXES E aP71099MANUALAMTS E AP7ATTRIBUTETYPES E AP7CONSOLIDATIONLINKS AP7CREDITMEMO1099DISTRIBUT E AP7CREDITMEMOAPPLICATIONS E AP7CREDITMEMOATTRIBUTES Name AP7CREDITMEMONOTES The name of the SQL Server table to create Collection APTORGADDRESSPHONES Lab APTORGADDRESSPHONES PrimaryKey AP7ORGADDRESSPHONES PH RE TableType None SourceSet Collection TruncateT able True Remove Auto assign table ID Auto assign all field IDs A a DR E Be EHE H E E p7cbDEnrTMEM OS N
79. existing bins click OK The Properties screen for the selected range appears g Smart Field Properties Age Band x Specify the number of bins to be created or specify the interval between bins Number of bins to create 1 3 Increment between bins 1 Use the options below to sepcify the boundaries for this bin Round bins up to nearest 10 First bin maximum ii Last bin maximum 4 Specify a prefix and or suffix to use For the bin names Prefix Suffix Details Bins 1 Interval 94 1st bin 0 2nd bin none Last bin 0 3 You can specify to create bins based on the number of bins you want to use or based on the increment between bins Number of bins to create For example for your Monetary Total Banding you may want to create three bins in which to group your donors based on total giving amounts In this case you would mark the Number of bins to create option and enter 3 in the numeric field The program determines the minimum criteria for inclusion in each bin based on the number of bins you create and in this case the range of gift amounts you have received Increment between bins The number of bins created is based on the increment you select For example you may want to generate your own bins for Age Band If you mark the Increment between bins option and enter 20 in the numeric field five bins are created in increments of twenty years If you enter 1
80. field The Raiser s Edge appears on that smart field as an available program enabling you to pull constituent and gift information onto the transactions table for each transaction For more information about the Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field see Blackbaud Transaction Data on page 271 4 If you are creating a new data mart click Next The Additional Tables tab appears For more information about adding data from other tables to an FE Express data mart see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION 55 Ceci gt Completing the FE Express Additional Tables tab 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the Additional Tables tab General Export Definition Cube Options Raiser s Edge Source Additional Tables Publications add Remove Si Properties Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 To add a new data source click Add The Create Table or Append Data screen appears For information about how to complete the Create Table or Append Data screens see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 3 When you complete the Create Table or Append Data screens and return to the Additional Tables tab Name and Type of the additiona
81. for your report Add to You can use the Add to button as an alterative to dragging and dropping information from the Pivot Table Field List Highlight a field select an area of the report in the drop down and click Add to Pivot Table Commands and Options You can access the Commands and Options tabs from the toolbar or by right clicking anywhere in a Pivot Table and selecting Commands and Options from the shortcut menu that appears The Commands and Options screen consists of three tabs ANALYTICS Captions Tab Captions Report Behavior Captions Select caption Report title bar Caption Microsoft Office PivotTable 10 0 Format pr U E sl 5 ad m e Advanced information Property value Data provider name MSOLAP 2 Data provider version 8 00 760 Data source version 8 00 534 On the Captions tab you can customize the look of elements in the pivot table including alignment font size and background color When you adjust an element the change appears on the Pivot Table screen On the Captions tab you can also view advanced information such as the data source and data provider For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the Pivot Table and select Help Report Tab Captions Report Behavior Report options Display totals as Column headings C Row headings Calculate totals based on visible items only All items including hidden it
82. imported into The Raiser s Edge Depending on the number of records being imported this process may take some time If any errors occur when running the segmentation plug in a message appears telling you that a log file has been created in the folder with The Information Edge Export files After the import is complete the data is available in The Raiser s Edge Notes About Importing Appeal Comments The value of the Appeal Comments field on Raiser s Edge constituent records is limited to 50 characters When importing segmentation information the comments generated can result in values larger than 50 characters for some constituent records This depends on the option you selected for the Comment field in the segmentation plug in and the length of your segment and test segment names Any comment over 50 characters is truncated to the first 50 characters You can avoid truncated comments by using shorter names for segments and test segments If truncation results in comments that are not useful here is how you can make changes to them Right click the segment in The Information Edge and select List Members The Drill Through screen appears Create a WriteBack query in The Raiser s Edge Usethe query in a Raiser s Edge constituent Global Change to change the entry in the Appeal Comments field for the constituents included in the selected segment If you want to globally change Appeal Comments to different values for a segmen
83. in The Raiser s Edge enables an organization to use the specific write off method The accounting office needs to analyze the effect of these specific write offs on the balance of the Allowance account This analysis should be performed before running the Pledge Valuation Analytic in The Information Edge Creating Queries When you install the analytic the records pulled into The Information Edge for analysis should be based on a Raiser s Edge query that includes only constituents with long term pledge gifts Constituent Query Create a dynamic constituent query named Constituents with Pledges that have Installments On the Criteria tab specify criteria of Gift Type equals Pledge On the Output tab you can select the following fields if you want to run the query in The Raiser s Edge for reference purposes to verify that the proper records are included Constituent Name Constituent ID Gift Date Pledge Balance Number of Installments Installment Dates Last Installment Date Last Payment Amount Last Payment Date Fund Fund ID Gift Query Create a gift query that retrieves all pledges that need to be discounted plus all pledges that were open and unpaid as of the end of the fiscal year but that were paid off between the fiscal year end and the date you are running the query to determine long term pledge values SOLUTIONS On the Criteria tab specify the following Gift Type equals Ple
84. in the database 15 To exit the Pivot Table select another item in the tree view Accessing Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge Records from Pivot Tables If you have The Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge you can drill through to open a record directly from a Pivot Table You can also edit the record if necessary gt Drilling Through a Pivot Table to records This procedure shows how to open a Raiser s Edge constituent record from a Pivot Table You can use similar steps to open a Financial Edge record 1 From the tree view under a cube open an existing Pivot Table 2 From the Pivot Table select a cell containing records you want to view in The Raiser s Edge ANALYTICS 153 3 With the cursor in the selected cell either double click or select Drill Through under the Percent toolbar New Delete ig Save Rename B3 Copy X Copy to Clipboard mbli Ep 659p Drop Filter Fields Here v Normal APPEAL Percent of Row Total Percent of Column Total Percent of Parent Row Item Percent of Parent Column Item Drill Through The Drill Through screen appears E Drill Through oy x S 7 59 Drill Through Number of Records 10 BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO SYSTEM ID BIO NAME BIO ID BIO KEY INDICATC 188 188 Allison E Andrews 4 I 192 192 Kathleen R Bently 8 I 254 254 Scarlett K Ray 70 I 256 256 Stephanie G Smith 72 I 260 260 Anne C Sinclair 76 I 269 269 Kelly A Vau
85. information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs gt Completing the RE Express Refresh Options tab 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the Refresh Options tab E New Data Mart x Cube Options General Publications Export Definition MV Use incremental refresh MV Process deleted records When checked records deleted from the source system are deleted from The Information Edge during an incremental refresh If unchecked deleted records are removed only during a full refresh v Rebuild indexes When checked indexes are rebuilt during an incremental refresh Uncheck this option only if your incremental mot typically include a relatively small number of records lt Back Next gt Cancel Help rein 2 3 After you install a data mart you can refresh the data in it manually any time or automatically at scheduled times For RE Express data marts if you want to refresh all records in the data mart leave the Use incremental refresh checkbox unmarked If you want to refresh only records that have changed since the last time you processed the data mark the checkbox this is the faster of the two options For more information about the differences between full and incremental refresh see Incremental vs Full Refresh on page 30 In most case
86. it Does A Standard Deviation smart field selects the standard deviation for a selected field in a one to many relationship When Would I use a Standard Deviation Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to want to measure the range of variation from a field s average values Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Standard Deviation smart field you must specify the field for which you want to select the standard deviation Straight line Depreciation Category Financial What it Does A Straight line Depreciation smart field calculates the straight line depreciation of an asset for a single period you choose When Would I use a Straight line Depreciation Smart Field Use this smart field to determine the depreciation of an asset that is depreciated by a like amount each year over a specified period of time Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Straight line Depreciation smart field you must select either a field or value to represent the cost of the asset the salvage value of the asset at the end of its useful life and the length of the useful life of the asset SMART FIELD DETAILS Sum Category Statistical What it Does A Sum smart field calculates the total amount for a field in a one to many relationship When Would I use a Sum Smart Field Use this smart field to determine the total amount of all values in a field For example you may want to include the total value of all gifts given by each constituent on t
87. mart is installed the data is extracted from the source database transformed for optimum analytical reporting and loaded into The Information Edge For optimal analysis the data mart flattens the data before it is stored For example data from several source tables may be flattened into one Donor table in The Information Edge On the Data Marts tab you can specify all settings related to your data marts including tables smart fields monitored fields exports publications and much more RE Express The RE Express feature of The Information Edge enables you to bring information into the program based on a Raiser s Edge export file When you install an RE Express data mart you must define the export file on which to base the data mart For complete information on creating Raiser s Edge exports see the Query amp Export Guide For more information about installing an RE Express data mart see the following procedure gt Creating and installing an RE Express data mart 1 On the menu bar select File New Select Data Mart RE Express The New Data Mart screen appears on the General tab For information about entering information on the General tab see Completing the RE Express General tab on page 27 2 The first time you process a data mart all records are included For subsequent processings you can specify whether you want to refresh all records or only those records that have changed since the last time you pr
88. oe e eda 156 Type Tab ssc een eru cache tae ihn eb deer pt desea be Ke we 157 e SD View Labs i ea Ge awe eed ea ele Reo x edt beca dg dc ges 157 Show Hide Tab secca ciaweds nieve data ERES EORR eR UNE Seles 158 Data Analyzer Views ser re rr RR RR RAE Oe Sw EET TE PE 161 Data Analyzer BusinessCenter 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece cee eee 161 Custom Crystal Reports 1 2 42 4 erede ceded sac y rr vs EVE 165 Copying Repor S esee ro e rrr rhe y rh sintesi y oe prr 168 Deleting and Moving Reports cece cece cee cere rec eees 169 Dashboards 6 c ciecieis ee ree rrr hr man nr e eee wed eee E A 169 Ka Procedures Adding report ssec ide nea l lee neni Re RE A RE EKE ewes 142 Adding a new Pivot Table l slslsleeleeeeee ees 148 Drilling Through a Pivot Table to records 0 0 00 0002 eee 152 Adding a new Chart excute ee oe ee bet ee hee Pe Ree e 158 Adding a new Data Analyzer View lees 162 Creating a custom Crystal Report llle 165 Importing a custom Crystal Report 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 167 Copying a rep rt a e eee cnet ene eens 168 Creating a Dashboard and adding items to it annann annaua 169 28117 2 CHAPTER 4 In Analytics you can create Pivot Tables Charts Data Analyzer Views and Crystal Reports to help you analyze your data After you create reports you can place them on Dashboards so you can view multiple reports at the same time Rep
89. of money Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Future Value smart field you must select the Per Period interest rate whether it should be based on a field or value and whether it should be a percentage or decimal In the Per period field enter 1 if the rate is per period otherwise enter a field or value that will determine the per period rate In the Payment Periods field specify the number of payments in an annuity In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series of future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Interest Payment Category Financial SMART FIELD DETAILS What it Does An Interest Payment smart field calculates the interest payment for a given period of an annuity based on periodic fixed payments and a fixed interest rate When Would I use an Interest Payment Smart Field Use this smart field when you need to determine the amount of the interest payment for an investment Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Interest Payment smart field in the Payment Periods field you must specify the number of payments in an
90. period interest rate is calculated by dividing the annual interest rate by this number If the interest rate is already per period you do not need to use this field However if the interest rate is annual you must use this field to determine the period rate For example in the properties for the condition for a quarterly period 4 is the entry in the Use this value field Irregular Payment Schedules Smart Field This condition type smart field identifies irregular pledges in The Raiser s Edge Identifying irregular pledges with this smart field ensures that the proper Net Present Value calculation is used to determine their value The properties of the condition specify that records assigned a frequency of Trregular or Single Installment in The Raiser s Edge are given the value Irregular If necessary you can modify the properties that identify a pledge as irregular For example if you use an attribute to identify these pledges you can modify the smart field to include the Irregular value with them Pledge Valuation Smart Field The Pledge Valuation Smart Field ties all the information together to give you a value for your pledges The Interest rate is derived from the Federal Interest Rate Smart Field value the per period value is derived from the Periods Per Year Smart Field value and the Irregular cash flow checkbox is marked and determined by an Irregular Payment Schedules Smart Field value of Ir
91. respective type in the destination table Improved Error Messaging In previous versions if your XML included an error a message alerted you to the error but did not reveal its location In version 1 7 a more descriptive error message appears including the context of the error and you are taken to the offending XML on the Text View tab of the editor A213 214 2 CHAPTER 6 The XML in your files must be well formed meaning it must comply with constraints such as the correct use of markup syntax In the example below a field has a name 0 which is not a valid field name The error message includes the context of the bad XML and the error is highlighted in red on the Text View tab N The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definiti loj x File Edit Tools Help 3 ale A Gud a se 13 E Text View 91 Web view FIELD name D dataType Int size 4 id CAMPAIGN ID field i gt Int size 4 id CAMPAIGN SEQUENCE field noIndex true gt ART DATE dataType DateTime size 8 8 id CAMPAIGN START_DATE field noIndex lt FIELD name END DATE dataType DateTime size 8 8 id CAMPAIGN END_DATE field noIndex true Me E Hum erm mmi m rm mmm c o n Invalid XML Ea G The name attribute has an invalid value according to its data type An error occurred at 11 14 lt FIELD name GOAL dataType Decimal size 17 id CAMPAIGN GOAL field nolndexz true
92. see FIELDSET on page 244 and SOURCESET on page 245 You can add cubes to the data mart by selecting BIPACKAGE in the tree view and selecting the Add Cube link on the right The cube appears in the tree view To specify properties for the cube select it The property options appear on the right A The Information Edge XML Editor OF x File Edi Tools Help c 3v A Gg zi se 1 Tree Property View 5 Text vi B d lt BIPACKAGE gt Commands Collection C TIE_CONSTIT Dimensions Collection s DrillThroughFields Collection TIE GIFTS did DrillThroughJoinKeys Collection w SNC FactTable FriendlyName JoinKeys Collection Measures Collection Mame Cube 1 SourceTableFilters Collection Delete Dimension Wizard Drillthrough Fields Wizard Name The name of the Analysis Services Cube to create You can add collections of properties for the cube in the same way you add them to tables For more information about cube properties see CUBE on page 251 When you are finished creating your XML file select File Save as from the menu bar and specify the name of your file and the location where you want to save it The XML files created in the The Information Edge XML Editor have a hard coded path to the data source for example SourcezEMMyFoldeMMyDB MDB If you attempt to process a data mart from a computer that does not have MyDB MDB at the specified location an e
93. set up previously Creating the Export On the Export Definition tab of the export properties for the data mart click Edit Export The Export screen opens to the General tab On the General tab click Include and select the constituent query you set up earlier Then select the Output tab RE Express Data Mart iO x File Edi View Help 5 Save and Close v dt 1 General 2 Output Available Fields to Export m Output Show Alb M H Biographical Spouse a Aliases qa Credit Cards Constituent Codes a Solicit Codes a Solicitor Goals Primary Alumni information Gifts Type Balance Installment frequency First Installment Due H A E oil il a a a a a cS Primary Business information Fund Address Campaign Addressee S alutation Appeal FE Relationships zi I3 ff Installmants B Format Find Gelect gt Sj lt Remove lt Back Next Cancel Select Gifts in the Output box and click Criteria The Gifts Criteria screen appears You can select the Filters tab if you want to specify a query so that only selected pledge records appear in the data mart For example you may want to filter on the gift query you created earlier or you may have created a query that includes pledge gifts of only a certain amount or higher or pledge gifts that have a specific attribute assigned suc
94. specific to that item E Ag RE Express 7 Tables ut Cubes Views H rai Snapshots 3 Monitored Fields dai New Qu S Refresh 1 E Ri H Folder tA Exports A Write Backs Use the tree view to navigate view information and run functions in Configuration Analytics and Segmentation 12 CHAPTER 2 N When creating Smart Fields or using any other Information Edge feature that involves writing SQL statements always use the real name for tables Avoid using friendly names for tables in SQL statements Grouping Items with Folders From the tree view right click menu you can create Folders to group items together You may want to create different folders to group specific reports or smart fields you use or create For example in Analytics you may want to group the reports you monitor weekly in different folders from those you monitor monthly E Folder Properties x Properties Mame Monthly Reports Description Mal IV All users may modify this Folder s properties Help Cancel You can mark checkboxes to specify whether other users are able to modify a folder s properties or access the items in it Once a folder is created it appears in the tree view and you can drag and drop other items from the tree view into it When you delete a folder all of its contents are al
95. test do not receive the mailing twice gt Completing the Segmentation Filter tab 1 When creating or editing a Segmentation select the Filter tab E Segmentation Wizard New segmentation 2 E 6l x File vie Iools Actions Help sjsave General Filer Budget Expenses Packages Properties Filter the records to include in this segmentation based on a Selection a field value or a selected expression Records that were part of a previously activated segmentation can also be excluded Selection 87 3 C Field da Value hd Select records based on expression You can exclude records from this mailing that were included in a previously activated segmentation 2 On this tab you select the first level of filtering these are the records you want to include in the segmentation If you want to Include all records mark that option 3 If you want to include only those records that are part of a selection mark Selection All previously created Selections are included in the dropdown You can also create a new Selection or edit an existing one by clicking the buttons to the right of the dropdown Only records that meet the selection criteria are included in the segmentation For more information about Selections see Selections on page 111 MARKETING SEGMENTATION 185 7 4 If you want to include only those records with a specific field value mark Field Only fields with valu
96. that percentage to test its success For more information see Test Segments and Test Segmentations on page 188 6 In the Sample size field enter a number and specify whether the number represents Percent or Records For example if you enter 50 and mark Percent the test segment will include a random sampling of records equal to fifty percent of the total records in the segment If you enter 50 and mark Records fifty randomly sampled records will be included in the test segment The Sample size is typically 100 percent However it may be less if the segment belongs to a test segmentation For more information about test segmentations see Test Segments and Test Segmentations on page 188 Additionally you may want to manually adjust the sample size to ensure segments are equally sized to hold down costs or to account for limits on mailing materials 7 Specify a default Package for the test segments You can enter an expected Response rate for your test segment and specify the expected Gift amount from respondents in the test segment 9 Click OK to return to the Segmentation Wizard General tab gt Generating segments by field 1 From the Segmentation Wizard General tab action bar click the arrow by Generate Segments and click By Field The Generate Segments screen appears E Generate segments NNNM TT Generate Segments By Field Field I YS i o3 Unknown Package calendar A t p Cost 10 Respo
97. the number of mailing pieces for the segment The Offers column is broken down by test segment so adding the offers for a segment and its test segment equals the number of records for the segment 5 After you generate segments the Segmentation Wizard General tab is populated with the segment information Name Decie Property Value Description Mailing based on donors RFM score as divided into Segments 10 ten groups Records 185 Expenses 857 00 Budget 0 00 Filter Include all records from RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITUENT Expected T Segment Records Package Offers Variable Cost Expected Responders Expected Gift Amount Expected Response Rate 19 Glossy Ca 8 1 000 00 50 00 50 00 T New 93 19 Gk 8 1 000 00 500020 84 19 Gh lt J Open 8 1 000 00 50 00 gt 85 19 Gh XX Delete 8 1 000 00 5000209 Eri 18 Gh 8 1 000 00 5000209 97 18 Gh OD List Members bo 8 1 000 00 50 00 gt mg 18 Gil assignPackage 0 EF New Package 1 000 00 50 0 mg 18 Gl 1 000 00 50 00 gt 10 18 Gh Move segment down Glossy Calendar 1 000 00 50 00 D 4 Move segment up Smaller Glossy Calendar Brochure inl vt iNew v lt jOpen X Delete Properties Cancel The default package specified when you generated segments is associated with each segment To assign another package right click on a segment and select Assign Package Select the package that you want to assi
98. the left When you select a field it appears in the Expression box so you can use it in a SQL statement 8 To use the Expression Wizard to build statements on the Expression screen click Expression Wizard The Expression Wizard Select Field screen appears Expression Wizard x Select Field Choose the field For which you wish to create an expression in this step E Constituent Age Constituent Code Gender ID Key Indicator 0E System Record ID BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID D Concat Test Lo SMART FIELD DETAILS 9 Select a field for which you want to create an expression All fields in the selected target table and any related tables including any other smart fields you have already created are available 10 Click Next The Expression Wizard Select Condition screen appears Expression Wizard x Select Condition Choose the desired condition and supply any necessary values in this step Condition Values for E 333 v is one of is not one of is less than is less than or equal to is greater than is greater than or equal to is between is not between xl lt Back Fris Cancel 11 Select a Condition and specify the Values for that condition The available values vary depending on the selected condition For more information about the available conditions see Expression Wizard on page 83 12 Clic
99. through its Application Program Interface API This connection verifies that your Raiser s Edge client is set up properly to interact with The Information Edge 132 2 CHAPTER 3 c 7 Click Next The Microsoft SQL Server screen appears Data Source Wizard The Raiser s Edge 7 Sample Database x Microsoft SQL Server Add or modify Microsoft SQL Server connection parameters in this step Server name local Database name RE 7 SAMPLE Test DB Connection Test API Connection lt Back Next gt Cancel 8 Enter the Server name and Database name for the database 9 Click Test DB Connection to attempt to connect to the database using the settings you specified If the connection is successful proceed to step 14 of this procedure If it is not successful double check the connection parameter information you entered Click Test API Connection to connect with The Raiser s Edge through its Application Program Interface API This connection verifies that your Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge client is set up properly to interact with The Information Edge CONFIGURATION 10 Click Next The Oracle screen appears 11 12 Data Source Ea Oracle Add or modify Oracle connection parameters in this step TNS Service name e ooo Test DB Connection Test API Connection lt Back ne gt Cancel Enter the TNS Service name for the Oracl
100. through to a Raiser s Edge record select a cell containing records you want to view in The Raiser s Edge With the cursor in the selected cell either double click or select Drill Through under the Percent toolbar button Pledge Valuation Analytic Smart Fields Several smart fields are included in the Pledge Valuation Analytic 325 38320 APPENDIX B Federal Interest Rate Smart Field This condition type smart field is used to include the annual federal interest rate with each pledge You need this field because the interest rate when a pledge is made lives with that pledge for the year the pledge was made even though the rate changes from year to year Therefore this smart field tracks the interest rate for each year Default values are included for each year on the Conditions screen of the smart field properties however you should enter the correct rates for your organization as published by the IRS The properties of each condition include a date range and interest value for that time period Enter the correct interest rate for each period in the Use this value field Periods Per Year Smart Field If you have anything other than annual pledges you also need the Periods per Year Smart Field Depending on when your payments are scheduled the value of the pledge will change This condition type smart field is used to translate the installment frequency such as Annual or Monthly into a number The per
101. to further suit your needs DATE Multiple Items BALANCEf Pledge Valuation Discount CAMPAIGN CONSTIT CODE Endowment Campaign Alumni 220 829 78 186 540 80 34 268 99 Cadet 180 00 159 47 20 53 7 993 23 940 17 42 809 66 87 190 34 6 125 00 85 617 49 507 51 1 784 88 255 12 350 00 337 50 12 50 288 458 19 245 243 03 43 215 16 Alumni 1 264 619 0 Current Parent Foundation C orporation Individuals Non Alumnus Parent Graduate Widow Endowment Campaign Total Campaign for Excellence 1 034 354 01 230 265 02 Current Parent 9 675 00 8 745 26 929 74 Former Faculty 1 000 00 878 00 122 00 Former Parent 20 000 00 19 138 76 851 24 17 500 0 13 474 30 4 025 70 Foundation C orporation Individuals Non Alumnus 2 000 000 0 1 913 875 60 86 124 40 Parent Graduate 0 00 0 00 3 312 794 03 2 990 465 91 322 328 12 Campaign for Excellence Total Grand Total 3 60 1 252 22 3 235 708 94 365 543 28 The Pivot Table includes Pledge Valuation and Discount Amount columns The Discount Amount column calculates the discount amount by subtracting the net present value from the pledge balance Both the total of the Pledge Valuation column and the total of the Discount Amount will be booked in the accounting system for balance sheet purposes To drill
102. to the one you define For example if you select Gift Amount is greater than or equal to 100 only records with a gift amount of 100 or more are selected This operator includes the value you selected in this case 100 Is between When you choose is between as the condition the records selected must fall within a range you define This condition is inclusive For example if you select Gift Amount is between 100 and 300 records with gift amounts between 100 and 300 are included Amounts equal to 100 and 300 are also included CONFIGURATION Is not between If you select this condition records included must not fall within a range you specify This operator is exclusive For example if you select Gift Payment Amount is not between 100 and 300 only records with gift payments of less than 100 and more than 300 are included Gift payments between 100 and 300 are not included Is like The is like condition enables you to use the and wildcard characters to replace a character or a set of characters in a field This operator and the wildcard characters are particularly useful when you are not sure of the spelling of a name or if you suspect something might be misspelled For example if you select Last Name is like B rd the program selects all records with a similar spelling for example Berd Bird or Byrd If you select a value of son the condition returns Johnson Anderson etc
103. will be overwritten by the attribute you specify here S Fiter Category hd Description Date Use date specified onze m C Use date field z Comment No Comment C Field BID NAME C Value OO E lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish 2 Select a Category for the attribute All those you have defined in The Raiser s Edge are available from the dropdown here To create a new attribute category that does not yet exist in The Raiser s Edge a Click the icon to the right of the Category field The New RE Category screen appears b In the Description field enter the category for the new attribute c Specify the Data Type for the new attribute category d If you want the attribute to come from an existing table in The Raiser s Edge select Table in the Data Type field and the Table Name field becomes enabled When you select a table from the dropdown the entries from that table become available in the Description field when you return to the Attribute Options tab e Click OK to return to the Attribute Options tab 3 In the Description field select the field whose value will appear as the description of the attribute in The Raiser s Edge 4 Specify a Date to appear on the attribute You can either enter the date here or specify a date from another field be used 5 Specify whether or not a Comment is included with the attribute You can specify a va
104. you know information is wrong for several donors you can search for all instances of that information and replace it with the correct information If you want to correct the source data you could create a Writeback query based on this smart field and use the query as the basis for a global change in The Raiser s Edge Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Search and Replace smart field you must first specify the field you want to search Then you specify whether the value you are searching for is another field or a value you will enter and then do the same for the value you want replace it with You can mark the Match case checkbox to ensure that the search includes only words that contain exactly the same capitalization as the data in the Search for field Sequence Category Miscellaneous What it Does A Sequence smart field sorts records in a table and updates the appropriate field value with a corresponding sequence number When Would I use a Sequence Smart Field You can use this smart field when you want to rank gifts by date or amount Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Sequence smart field you select the sort conditions for the field value You can select fields from the database and indicate whether you want to sort the records in ascending or descending order Soundex Category Miscellaneous What it Does A Soundex smart field converts sequences of characters to a four character code that groups similar sounding word
105. 0 ten bins are created in increments of ten years 4 Several checkboxes are available to help you further define the parameters for your bins SMART FIELD DETAILS Round bins up to nearest You can mark this checkbox and specify a number of which multiples will begin all bins For example if you are setting bins for a range measured in months you may want to round up to multiples of 12 so the bins can be easily broken down into years First bin maximum You can mark this checkbox and specify the maximum number for the top end range in your first bin For example if you enter 24 for a range measured in months the top end of your first bin cannot exceed two years Last bin maximum You can mark this checkbox and specify a number that the beginning of your last bin will not exceed For example if you enter 60 for an age band your last bin will always begin with an age that is under 60 The Details frame shows how your bins will be generated based on your settings As you make changes to the parameters monitor this frame to ensure your bins are designated as you intend them to be If any of your settings conflict with each other a message tells you that bins cannot be generated using your current parameters 5 In the Prefix and Suffix fields enter any information you want to appear in front of or behind your bin names For example you may want to include the word Months after your bins that are measured in
106. 0 00 0 00 0 00 ROI Percent Segment Package Offers Responders Variable Cost Total Response Rate uit Expected Responders H Calendar Calendar Calendar Brochure Brochure Brochure Letter Letter Letter o Letter o 0 woo mo Qm PLN GUBD 4 gt LO Wp E pent aul Het Jule Seat Hoag For more information about creating segmentations see Marketing Segmentation on page 171 Dependencies You can view a list of dependencies for any Information Edge object at any time The program checks dependencies among all the different types of objects and displays a comprehensive list Additionally when deleting an item with dependencies a warning message appears You can view all dependencies from the warning message to determine if the item is really safe to delete or not N Dependency checking is not available for Views that extend across multiple data marts AB CHAPTER 2 For example if you delete a smart field on which a segmentation is dependant a warning message appears The Information Edge XI 9 Dependencies were Found while deleting Decile Deleting this may cause problems in other areas of The Information P Edge Do you want to see the list of dependencies before you continue deleting Decile If you click Yes a view of this and any other dependencies appears If you click No the item is deleted without viewing dependencies and if you click Cancel the dele
107. 4 If you specified earlier to create a new table based on the outside data 15 source the Create a cube based on this table checkbox is available In most cases you should mark this checkbox so you can easily report on and analyze the data The only time you may want to not mark this checkbox is if you do not intend to use this information with any of The Information Edge interactive features for example you may intend to use the data only in Crystal Reports not in Charts or Pivot Tables Click Finish to complete adding the table to the data mart You return to the Additional Data Sources tab where the new source now appears You can add another source or finish creating or editing the data mart at this time For more information about the available data types see your SQL Server documentation zu AG as CHAPTER 3 BIZINTEL IDs in RE Express Data Marts Several ID fields are generated automatically in every table created in an RE Express data mart All these fields have a name that begins with BIZINTEL BIZINTEL_ID This is always the Primary Key of the table It is a system generated ID with no relation to any records defined in The Raiser s Edge It can be considered as a unique identifier of the row in the table BIZINTEL_PARENTID This is always the Foreign Key field that points to the BIZINTEL_ID in the parent table This field appears only on a table with a one to many relationship to another t
108. 5 306 APPENDIX A For example you may process the data mart on 06 20 If you select an Interval of Months a Period of This Month and mark the Calendar option the period would be 6 01 to 6 30 If you mark the Relative to process date option the period would be 05 21 to 06 20 the process date is considered the last day of this month You can also use ranges based on any number of days weeks months quarters or years This enables you to track changes over time periods such 30 days ago 60 days ago or 90 days ago Between vs As of For every interval except Day you can specify whether a record should be included in the smart field if it changed Between two dates or changed As of a specific date Between uses both a start and end date while As of uses only an end date For example if the process date is 06 20 e When you select This Month and Between the field is populated only if the Date Changed is between 06 01 and 06 30 When you select This Month and As of the field contains the most recent change as of 06 30 Based on the following data in the monitored field Previous Value Value Date Changed Joe Smith Silver 05 30 2005 Jane Smith Bronze 05 30 2005 Joe Smith Silver Gold 06 29 2005 Processing on 06 30 yields the following in a Monitored Field Query smart field ID Name Between This Month As of This Month 1 Joe Smith Gold Gold 2 Jane Smith Bronze Because Joe has a Dat
109. 9 Cubes A central feature of high speed analytical reporting is the Online Analytical Processing OLAP cube A relational database can be thought of as two dimensional with rows and columns in a table However a multidimensional database is based on the idea of structuring data as a cube Each data attribute in the cube is a separate dimension Dimensions such as time periods can be broken down into subattributes year month day 64 2 CHAPTER 3 Cua The Information Edge can quickly locate and display the intersection of dimensions For example you can quickly determine the number of gifts given to a specific appeal during the month of April by constituents over age 55 who live in a certain city Measures are the numeric values used to analyze the intersection of dimensions In the previous example the number of gifts is the measure For more information about OLAP cubes see Understanding Cubes on page 16 Configuration DataMarts D es ules Security Custom Properties New gt G WV Gl Refresh di RE Express Name HC Tables Dimensions B ut Cubes la TYPE Eg GIFTS ES DATE Mff CONSTITUENT U Year ut Segmentation Data lA Quarter Views Month 4 fai Snapshots 14 FUND t f Monitored Fields lA CAMPAIGN amp ge Parameters lA APPEAL H Smart Fields lA Constit BIO CONSTIT CODE f Reports amp Constit BIO GENDER FER Exports i Measures HIA Wr
110. 99 199 Davenport Sean 209 209 209 Goodson Harry 227 227 227 Keller Phillip 244 244 244 Olson Vivian 309 309 309 Holt Laura 322 322 322 Sinclair Joseph 586 586 586 Peters Mancy 187 187 187 Adamson Mark 200 200 200 Dustin Nicole 201 201 201 Ellis Anthony 245 245 245 Pembroke Lane 4 gt 56 records G Find Wait Time v The Results tab displays the data organized in columns resulting from your Criteria field selections To locate a specific record in the results click the binoculars and enter the appropriate information on the Find screen Wait Time limits the amount of time a search is conducted Searches stop after the specified wait time period even if the search is not complete You can select a record in the grid and click the Raiser s Edge handshake icon beside the binoculars to open that record in The Raiser s Edge 4 Click Finish to save your changes and return to the main query page Selection Processing Order You can specify the order in which your selections process In some instances you may want one selection to filter your records then apply another selection to that subset of your records If you do not specify an order selections are processed in the order in which they are created with the one created first processed first and the most recently created processed last A c 117 7 118 2 CHAPTER 3 a gt Setting the order in wh
111. B Data Source Wizard screen which now includes an OLEDB connection string in the OLE Data Source field and the tables from that source in the Include box UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 235 gt Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Integrated Security S5PI Persist 5 M ACCOUNTSECURITY v ACTIONREMINDERS v ADDRESS v ADDRESSLINKPHONES v ADDRESSLINKS M ADDRESSPHONES M ADJUSTMENTS M AGINGBUCKETS M APLO99BOXES AP71099MANUALAMTS v AP7ATTRIBUTETYPES v AP CONSOLIDATIONLINKS 236 CHAPTER 6 Cep 6 A checkbox appears for each table in the data source You can mark or unmark the checkboxes by clicking All or None Click Reload to refresh the list of tables After you select the tables you want to include in the XML Editor click OK You return to the editor where the information from the data source now appears E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition OF x File Tools Help AG uv A i g Tree Property View Z Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt FieldSet Collection H E ACCOUNTSECURITY ID AP7ORGADDRESSPHONES tak ACTIONREMINDERS Name APTORGADDRESSPHONES iE ADDRESS PrimaryKey APTORGADDRESSPHONES PH H EJ ADDRESSLINKPHONES RE7TableType None H E ADDRESSLINKS SourceSet Collection H E ADDRESSPHONES TruncateTable True H E ADJU
112. BIPACKAGE gt 2 When you click the button the Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard screen appears Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard x Enter a valid OLEDB connection string and click OK to automatically generate the xml structure For the selected tables OLE Data Source zz Include Select All Mone Reload OK Cancel 3 Click the Browse button beside the OLE Data Source field to access the Data Links Properties tabs E Data Link Properties MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogwW ebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 3 51 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Olap Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 10 0 OLE DB Provider 4 To learn more about the information you must enter to complete these tabs click the Help button on the lower right of the screen 5 When you are finished specifying the data link properties click OK You return to the Microsoft OLED
113. Check Syntax Settings Name Fund Rank Format m Cancel 9 Enter a Name for the calculated member 10 You do not have to enter anything in the Format field However you can 11 use this field to specify that the value of the member display as currency percent or a variety of other formats Some template formats contain their own formatting options If you select a formatting option using the Expression Wizard you do not need to enter anything in the Format field here Click OK to save your calculated member and return to The Information Edge console The member now appears in the cube Calculated Member Templates Templates include multidimensional expressions to create several types of calculated members The expression always appears in the MDX Expression box for reference or if you want to edit or add to it manually CONFIGURATION 69 _ d To learn more about multidimensional expressions see your SOL Server Books Online documentation Format options available on the Calculated Member screen and Expression Wizard follow the same rules as Excel format options For more information see your Excel documentation a 70 at CHAPTER 3 a Difference m Expression Type m Parameters MDX Expression Subtract Year to Date Gift count from Count previous year Percentage of measure Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent
114. Configuration tree view right click on Publications and select New Publication The Define Your Publication screen appears Publication x Define Your Publication Select the elements you would like to publish All Files will be published to the folder selected below Additionally a navigation page will be generated Menu html Name appeal reports E Description Appeal Charts and Pivot Tables Folder C TIE Publications JV All users may s this Publication v All users may modify this Publication IV Publish static reports D charts L Pivots Annual Giving Frequency Annual Giving Range AppealAnalysis Appeal Goal Performance Appeal Performance ppeals Sent Anmannisn fle eliaio 2 Enter a Name for the publication This name will appear in the console 3 Click the ellipsis by the Name field The Options screen appears Publication x Options Select an image to replace the default The Information Edge banner image The text entered into the Comment field will display below the image Banner Ie Documents and Settingssdavidow D esktop splash gif C Comment Status reports YTD 4 If you do not want to use the default Information Edge graphic image on your publication in the Banner field click the folder icon to browse to the graphic you want to use This graphic will be copied into the destination folder
115. Connector Data Marts on page 255 When you mark the Process deleted records checkbox records deleted from the source system since the last time the mart was processed are deleted from The Information Edge during an incremental refresh If you unmark the checkbox deleted records are removed only during full refreshes Marking the checkbox ensures that your Information Edge data always reflects the current data in The Raiser s Edge For example if you have a constituent who gave three gifts and you compute an average if one of the gifts is deleted in The Raiser s Edge and you do not mark this checkbox the deleted gift would still be factored into the average in The Information Edge so the figure would no longer be correct However identifying deleted records is time consuming If you typically do not have many deleted records in your Raiser s Edge data you will probably want to unmark the checkbox to reduce the processing time of your data marts during incremental refreshes When you mark the Rebuild indexes checkbox indexes are dropped and then rebuilt during an incremental refresh You should leave this checkbox marked unless your incremental refreshes typically include a relatively small number of records When you mark the checkbox indexes are dropped before processing With the indexes dropped data inserts are faster but all the indexes must be rebuilt Without dropping them inserts are slower but you save the time needed
116. Cw p APPENDIX A 13 14 15 16 Click Finish You return to the Expression screen where your condition now appears Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Expression RE EXPRESS GIFTS DATE gt d 2004 12 31 E Hu Right Click to select field from list amp Expression Wizard Preview r Value for fields that meet this criteria Use this value Current Donor Use this field Constituent Code z 0K Caes At the bottom of the screen in the Value for fields that meet this criteria frame select the Use this value option and enter Current Donor This is the value that will display in the table for fields that meet your criteria Click Preview to check your expression A message appears Condition Properties x The column prefix RE EXPRESS GIFTS does not match with a table name or alias name used in the query This message appears because the condition you created is querying on the Gift table with which the target table Constituents has a one to many relationship Because of this relationship you will need to specify a subquery which creates a join between the tables and specify exact criteria for your condition Click OK to return to the Expression screen SMART FIELD DETAILS 17 Delete the statement in the Expression box The
117. Disaster Relief Campaign ndowrment Campaign lembership Campaign 2 170 00 1999 Annual Phonathon 1 1 175 00 1999 President s Breakfast 1 1 50 00 2001 Annual Phonathon 2 2 275 00 2002 Phonathon 1 1 125 00 Annual Exhibit 1 1 500 00 Annual Newsletter 3 3 11 200 00 Celebrity Auction 1 1 2 000 00 Direct Mailing 1 1 1 000 00 Internet Web Site solicitations 2 2 2 750 00 666 379 00 4 495 07 264 390 00 3 264 07 197 27 175 00 50 00 137 50 125 00 500 00 3 733 33 2 000 00 1 000 00 1 375 00 To remove a column row or filter field from a Pivot Report or similar item from a Chart place the cursor on it and drag it to the top or bottom of the screen until an X appears beside the cursor When you release the mouse button the item is removed from the report You can always add it back again by selecting it in the Field List screen and dragging it into the appropriate area of the report Data fields are identifiable on the Field List screen by the ones and zeroes icon beside them Data fields provide the actual numeric data in your reports When working in Pivot Tables experiment with dragging columns into rows and vice versa to change the view and pivot point of your data In the Command and Options for Charts use the Type tab to experiment with displaying different types of charts pie bar area etc In Pivot Tables you can double click on a count in a data fie
118. E Membership B CONSTITUENT BIO_ID Added By B CONSTITUENT BIO KEY INDICATO D Category B CONSTITUENT BIO CONSTIT CODE Consecutive Years E CONSTITUENT BIO_GENDER B Current Dues Amount CONSTITUENT BIO_AGE B Current Transaction ID Address B Date Added Gifts Date Joined B GIFTS SYSTEM ID B Date Last Changed HB RIFTS TvPF Fa B Description l a lt Remove T Format gren One to Many Cancel 8 To save your export settings and return to the Export Definition tab click Save and Close 9 Ifyou are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Cube Options tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs gt Completing the RE Express Cube Options tab 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the Cube Options tab ey j A f f 36 CHAPTER 3 Do not use the Long Date Format for any export date fields Long dates are stored as VarChar format in The Information Edge therefore no date calculations can be performed on long dates Additionally if you edit export properties and change a date format to long existing smart fields and segmentations which rely on the Date field are impacted 2 On the Export Definition tab click Next The Cube Options tab appears EJ New Data Mart x Refresh Options Export
119. EE M Smart Fields Queries adn Message Date Te T HE Exports HA Wite Backs Refresh started census 84 HO Publications Synchronizing data mart schema 02 09 2056 84 E Segmentation Connecting to RE objects 02 09 2065 84 Dropping indices before loading tables 02 09 2055 84 Refreshing tables 02 09 2005 84 Creating RE7 Export definition 02 09 2055 84 Connecting to RE objects 02 09 2065 84 Connecting to RE database 02 0205 84 Truncaling table RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT O2 09 205 84 Truncaling table RE EXPRESS GIFTS 02 09 206 84 Getting estimated record count 02 09 206 84 Number of records estimated 233 02 09 206 8 4 Importing Raiser s Edge data 233 estimated records 02 09 206 8 4 Importing data from extemal tables 02 09 206 8 Importing data from Blackbaud NetCommunity 02 09 205 8 Committing changes 02 09 2005 8 57 4 b You can move the The history shows information such as messages displayed during the slider between the processing of data and the date and time of the refresh upper and lower pane up if E i a wanito ARN uh 2 If you want to view information for only the most recent refresh click the history with less Display Recent Items on the lower right of the page If you want to view scrolling a complete history click Display All Items These items toggle back and forth so both are not visible at the same time CONFIGURATION 3 Forreference purpose
120. ENT Blackbaud_RFM_ gt 333 B Right Click to select field from list Expression Wizard amp Preview Value for fields that meet this criteria Use this value True C Use this field feZINTEL_ID z OK Cancel SMART FIELD DETAILS 279 12 Your expression now appears in the Expression box When you click Preview a message appears indicating how many records are selected by the expression If on the Expression Wizard Select Field screen you selected a field from a table other than the target table a SOL Server message appears informing you that the column prefix name does not match the table name used in the query In this case you need to create a subquery to join the tables For more information about subqueries see Joining Tables With Subqueries on page 279 13 Enter the value that you want to appear in the table for fields that meet the criteria of this smart field You can select the option to Use this value and enter the value You can also select the option to Use this field and select a field from the table to use as the value when the condition you establish is true For example your condition may specify to include only gifts of the type Pledge or Cash and you may want to copy the value from the AMOUNT column to the smart field for these gifts 14 Click OK You return to the Criteria screen where your expression now appears in the box Joining Tables With Subquerie
121. FINEDID System record ID E LC Transaction Distribution d istibution Attributes A Distribution B Amount B Credit account numbe B Debit account number Select Remove Criteria 8 To save your export settings and return to the Export Definition tab click Save and Close 9 If you are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Cube Options tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION 53 2 gt Completing the FE Express Cube Options tab 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the Cube Options tab Raiser s Edge Source Additional Tables Publications General Export Definition v Automatically create dimensions Date Hierarchy Year Quarter Month hd Y ear starts January 1 B Create cubes for the following tables AP INVOICE AP INVOICE DISTRIBUTION AP INVOICE DISTRIBUTION TRANSACTION DISTRIBUTIO AP INVOICE PAYMENTS GL ACCOUNT GL ACCOUNT BUDGETS GL ACCOUNT BUDGETS BUDGETS DETAILS GL PROJECT GL TRANSACTIONS GL TRANSACTIONS TRANSACTIONS DISTRIBUTIONS x IESIESTE IL Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 Mark the Automatically cre
122. Field Details Contents n th e vere ERR ERREUR RIO ESTEE Meee Seated DET EY ES 267 Average el 2e se4e e pec Cale eron irk pede E EE EE T E DURS SOM 268 Bi Ie Reve RENE E PPAR CEP TE e E Hee OS Sa EE NETS 268 Blackbaud Transaction Data eeeeee nnn 271 Concatenation 6 cve eecv eR c eee eed mobs eor hi obo RRT LE PTS 274 angl PTT L L T 275 Joining Tables With Subqueries 0 c cece eee eee 279 Contributo eye e rm Re du x mnes s Hae xm vba eee Bae eae 285 CODY v wm RR as ehhh ERU P PT EE Hone Meee Rees ER E Re 285 la purPP mRTTMMTMTT 290 Custom REM 3 6660 ns Sh Re Sab Ba eR RES s DE Aa oe RS eT wes RES 290 Date Interval i45 enm ees rr En Rer NER SI LEER eae eae weet 293 IDAYS SiM en PP ee eens 293 D clle 22 9 rere s Seid Saw SUE SOs SUO OPERE ERE RENS 293 Depreciation 2 e RR rre rr RERO UE RPEAT EE 294 Effective Annual Interest Rate e eee 294 Expression RI exn Rr RI YT Ken PRICE EV RUPEE EE 294 Expression Smart Field Examples 0 0000 e cece eee eee 296 First Gott seerd irai EE Sik sie RAE Me De he See od Gee BSG SE PES 298 F ture Valle 6 iene cit m hk IR khe nemmeno eee SOS eae SIR ean n 298 Interest Payment e t e etr Rr RR rrr CRT RE UOS 298 Interest Rate Sacer Rv Rer Same w Ss Shee Se Sede EE NES 299 Key Val e 4x cc cashes Bae Se s eee Rae riw RU WI RW PAS Si
123. GED FUNDSEQUENCE FROM dbo CONSTIT Funds Incremental Parameters Last End Point 05 29 2005 hd Current End Point 06 29 2005 Iv Use FastLoad during refresh Cancel ZA When you click OK in the wizard the lt FIELDSET gt elements are updated to reflect any changes you make in the SQL statement For an incrementally configured SQL statement you can use sample dates to preview the output gl pL D gt 4212 27 CHAPTER 6 Cua Dimension Wizard A new wizard enables you to select deselect dimensions to include in the USC CUBE definition To access the wizard select a cube in the XML Editor tree view and click the Dimension Wizard link on the right The list of fields in the wizard is based on the fact table and any other tables with foreign keys to the fact table E Cube Dimension Wizard x The fields below include all Fields currently defined in the XML For the fact table and related tables Select the fields to include For the cube GIFTS RERecordID GIFTS GiftID GIFTS ConstituentID v GIFTS Type GIFTS Amount v GIFTS GiftDate GIFTS FundID GIFTS CampaignID GIFTS AppeallD GIFTS PackageID GIFTS PaymentMethod x None c Adding a field from a given table automatically establishes the appropriate lt JOINKEY gt elements for the cube Once the lt JOINKEY gt elements hav
124. GIFTS Count APPEAL a E CAMPAIGN Constituent_BIO_GENDE DATE gt r M Heeren A Microsoft Office PivotTable 10 0 Drop Filter Fields Here Constituent BIO GENDER Female Grand Total Year AMOUNT GIFTS Count AMOUNT GIFTS Count 2001 114 150 00 79 114 150 00 79 2002 315 190 00 122 315 190 00 122 2003 116 365 00 65 116 365 00 65 2004 65 520 00 28 65 620 00 28 El 2005 40 287 00 17 40 287 00 17 Grand Total 653 612 00 311 653 612 00 311 PivotT able Field List Lx Drag items to the PivotTable list RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS iij of Previous Year Ame i of Previous Year Cou 15 AMOUNT Hl Amount previous year iei Avg Amount fei Count previous year 25 GIFTS Count 94l Year to Date Amount ei Year to Date Gift count E APPEAL E CAMPAIGN Constituent_BIO_GENDE DATE JE Year 4dd to pata Area z Data fields are identifiable on the Field List screen by the ones and zeroes icon beside them You can change the caption on any item by selecting it right clicking selecting Commands and Options and selecting the Captions tab 152 2 CHAPTER 4 ra T Before you publish a 13 We now want to filter this information by Appeal To do this select
125. ING SEGMENTATION On the Plug ins page select Segmentation Data Import Plug in The Segmentation Data Plug in page appears s Edge fie Edt Yew Go Favodes Jods Hep Back toisi Openin separate vendor DENT Select the name of the segmentation import file and choose on Appeal Connector As part of the import process you can add Constituent Appeals and Vi create a query for the entire segmentation or single query for each and lest segment Sample Achon pion fee Td mace a Imeert Recurring Tv Create Packages for Appeal Gits Fund Graph I Create Constituent Appests Whaia Date E Phayin H Produet Iretalier a HH Dada ingest usin Note No other users may be in the system while this utility i running Show Connections Welcome to The Raisers Edge 7 In the File Name field click the folder icon and select The Information Edge export file you want to import into The Raiser s Edge Remember the files you exported are named using the prefix you established in the procedure for Exporting a segmentation on page 195 Select the Appeal in The Raiser s Edge with which you want to associate the segmentation information To best enable analyzing the effectiveness of your segmentations we recommend you create a separate appeal for this purpose Mark the Create Packages for Appeal checkbox if you want to create Raiser s Edge appeal packages from the packages in your I
126. Key For example you may want to concatenate First name Last name and Zip Code to achieve a unique value for the Primary Key Microsoft Excel Wizard The Microsoft Excel Wizard helps you to create XML files that are optimized for data analysis from your Excel spreadsheets These XML files can then be imported into The Information Edge as data marts using the Universal Source Connector UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 229 2 N Primary Key fields should contain data that does not change when the data is refreshed because several Information Edge functions such as Snapshot tables are dependant upon the Primary Key being the same forever 230 CHAPTER 6 N If you use named ranges in an Excel spreadsheet the ranges appear as separate worksheets gt Creating a data mart from an Excel spreadsheet 1 From the Information Edge XML Editor Tools menu select Excel Wizard The Excel XLS Wizard screen appears Microsoft Excel XLS Wizard Ea Enter the path to a XLS file and click OK to automatically generate the xml structure For the selected tables Excel file E Include IV First row is field names Cancel 2 In the Excel File field browse to the location of the Excel file you want to bring into The Information Edge After you select a file you return to the Wizard and the Excel file now appears in the Include field Microsoft Excel XLS wizard x Enter the path to a XLS file
127. L specification The elements in this schema are used when you create an XML file in The Information Edge XML Editor ay The term packages appears in several areas of the schema because in early versions of The Information Edge data marts were called packages A p 242 2 CHAPTER 6 BIPACKAGE You can add a Version This element is parent to all the elements that define the tables and fields from and Description to the your data source The hierarchy appears as follows BIPACKAGE element to help track your definition file BIPACKAGE SEGMEHTATIOHIHFO BIPACKAGE Attributes Comments Cubes For more information see CUBE on page 251 Description You can optionally provide a description of this definition SegmentationInfo For more information see SEGMENTATIONINFO on page 254 SharedProviders You can specify one or more elements that contain a connectionstring and then reference those by name in the lt DATAPROVIDER gt element This makes it easier to move a USC to different servers sources because you can just make a change to a single connection string in one place In addition to the ConnectionString you can also specify the CurrentTimeStampSQL and TimeStampFormat for incremental refreshes since these are usually the same for a given source regardless of the CommandText being used to load the table Tables For more information see TABLE on page
128. Mart Schedule x Set Data Mart Schedule A Select the data marts that you want to be refreshed and choose an appropriate refresh frequency v Enabled Name Weekly Description p at end of each business week Data Marts Sample Data Mart Custom Source RE Express Refresh method for data marts Use setting on data mart Frequency Weekly at 9 00 PM every week zesrMwrrrwrrr amp sr Cancel 3 Mark the Enabled checkbox to create a new schedule Enter a Name and Description to determine how the schedule displays in The Information Edge Mark checkboxes by the data marts you want to include in this schedule If you are scheduling multiple marts they are processed in the order in which they appear in the Data Mart box If you want to change this order use the up and down arrows on the right Specify the Refresh method for data marts You can use the setting established when you added the mart or select a full or incremental refresh This setting affects only data marts created with RE Express and custom data marts for which you specified incremental settings All other data marts always fully refresh CONFIGURATION 129 2 In most cases with an RE Express data mart you can use an incremental refresh One example of when you would want to run a full refresh is if you have used the Raiser s Edge table entry cleanup utility to remove i
129. New a X 43 ed Xo i T3 Add to Dashboard E dj RE Express mimis ZU NS xs E Ge lel Salo EC Tables Drop Filter Fields Here T Cubes Constit BIO GENDER GIFTS Female Male Unknown Grand Total amp CONSTITUENT APPEAL AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT M Segmentation Data Blank 137 835 00 138 755 00 61 615 00 338 205 00 V CONSTITUENT MF 2000BREAKFAST 5 325 00 5 325 00 amp CONSTITUENT MF E 2000DIRECT 850 00 2 825 00 2500 00 86 175 00 BA Views 2000PHONE 1 000 00 1 000 00 2 000 00 Q AgeBanding 2001 Phone 725 00 50 650 00 51 375 00 E Snapshots 2002 DIRECT 80 00 80 00 HG Monitored Fields 2002PHONE 700 00 2 825 00 3 525 00 DRY Smart Fields 2003 Direct Mailing 25 00 500 00 5000 00 5 525 00 GE Queries SSANNUAL 25 00 25 00 EA Constituent 99BREAKFAST 50 00 50 00 HE Reports 99PHONE 175 00 175 00 JEE ANNUALMAIL 15 425 00 21 955 00 5 225 00 42 605 00 B boots AUCTION 21 000 00 6 800 00 1 500 00 29 300 00 xP CAMP LETTER 1 000 00 1 350 00 2 350 00 Write Backs DIRECT MAIL 16 640 00 86 950 00 10 100 00 113 690 00 6 amp 9 Publication EXHIBIT 9 245 00 1 550 00 10 795 00 Segmentation INTERNET 97 645 00 147 505 00 9 500 00 254 650 00 E Gi FE Express MEMBERMAIL 78 175 00 47 820 00 500 00 126 495 00 NEWSLETTER 50 155 00 271 015 00 4 150 00 325 320 00 OPENHOUSE 26200 00 4 430 00 30 530 00 ro 5 eat man es T An cc 734787 main On c7 For mo
130. New XML definition 7 FastLoad Specify true or false defaults to false When pulling data from OLEDB or MS SQL Server sources setting this to true causes The Information Edge to use the SQL Server bulk load feature the OLEDB IRowSetFastLoad interface available via the DTS DataPump API However not all CommandText SQL statements can be used with FastLoad True If the SQL statement contains any expressions that are not direct column names from a table or view then the expression must have an alias For example the statement Select First Name Last Name ID from dbo RECORDS would not be eligible for FastLoad True because the first column in the select statement is an expression that has not been named If you change this SQL to Select First Name Last Name as Name ID from dbo RECORDS then FastLoad True can be used UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 207 Cord Because USC supports any arbitrary OLEDB or MSSQL datasource sql statement you need to test your source to make sure it works with FastLoad Most standard OLEDB connections will work properly as will most SQL statements that conform to the above requirements However some particular SQL statements may be incompatible because of incompatible data types For example with FastLoad False the USC is more forgiving for data that is typed as Text in the source but is being mapped to a DateTime column in The Information Edge table FastLoadB
131. PTER 3 2 Right click on the cube and select New Calculated Member The Add New Calculated Member screen appears Add New Calculated Member Ea Calculated Members Calculated members are expressions that are calculated dynamically during queries from Pivot Tables and Charts Enter the MDX expression that defines the calculation in the space provided or use an expression wizard template MDX Expression i Expression Wizard w Check Syntax 3 You can manually enter a multidimensional expression in the MDX Expression box 4 If you would like to use a template or base an expression on a template click Expression Wizard The MDX Expression Wizard appears ia MDX Expression Wizard x MDX Expression Use this dialog to create a Multidimensional Expression MDX Enter a valid MDX query in the space provided or use one of the templates listed on the left Use the Check Syntax button at the bottom of the Form to validate your query r Expression Type m Parameters Enter an MDX Expression below or choose one of the Difference Percentage ol messire templates on the left to help you get started Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Rank Previous date value Year to date value MDX Expression heck Suntar 5 Select an Expression Type If you select MDX Expression you can manually
132. RLINE1 PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE2 PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 PREF ADDRESS CITY PREF ADDRESS STATE PREF ADDRESS ZIP Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 The tables for the selected data mart are listed in the Table name dropdown Select the table for which you want to create an export 3 The fields included in the table you selected for export are listed in the The Table Name field Available Fields box Select the fields you want to include in the export is not available on and use the right arrow to move them into the Selected Fields box Postal Discount exports s because the table is specified 4 If you are creating a new export definition click Next to access the on the Address Fields fab Export Options tab For more information about this tab see the next Additionally the Available procedure Fields on the Columns tab include address processing fields indicated by brackets surrounding the name These fields vary depending on the country setting and whether or not the program has been enabled for address certification CASS Fields are exported in the order in which they list here If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs 92 2 CHAPTER 3 Excel exports can contain a maximum of 65 536 rows per file gt Completing the Export Options tab 1 While creating or editing an export definition select the Export Opti
133. STMENTS E E AGINGBUCKETS AP1099BOXES NT Remove Auto assign table ID Auto assign all field IDs H E AP CONSOLIDATIONLINKS E AP7CREDITMEMO1099DISTRIBUTI E AP7CREDITMEMOAPPLICATIONS E AP7CREDITMEMOATTRIBUTES Name E AP7CREDITMEMONOTES q The name of the SQL Server table to create m apzcpEnrTMEMOS of New XML definition 8 When you are finished creating your XML file select File Save as from the menu bar and specify the name of your file and the location where you want to save it You can now access this file from the USC Definition tab when you add a custom data mart For more information see Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart on page 215 Microsoft SQL Server Wizard You can use the Microsoft SQL Server Data Source Wizard to easily pull data into the XML Editor from any SQL Server source available on your computer The wizard is available from the editor toolbar or Tools menu UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 237 P gt Creating a data mart with the SQL Server Wizard 1 From the Information Edge XML Editor Tools menu select SQL Server Wizard or from the toolbar click the SQL Server Wizard button El The Information Edge XML E ditor 718 lt BIPACKAGE gt t d SHAREDSQLConn1 SHAREL HE ADDRESS 2 When you click the button the Microsoft SQL Server Wizard screen appears f Microsoft SQL Server Wizard Enter a SQL Server connection string and click OK to auto
134. Server specifically This wizard can be accessed from any place in the XML Editor where there is a connection string property and the current connection type is MSSQLServer g SQL Server Connection String Wizard Ea E Enter the appropriate information needed to Form a SQL Server F connection string SQL Server Instance Connect using Windows authentication SQL Server authentication Login name Password Database Application Name TIE USC Connection Connection string SQL Table Wizard In previous versions the only way to update a SQL statement and the associated field properties was by hand You had to make sure that the lt FIELDSET gt elements aligned with the appropriate offset for each column in the SQL statement This could be a time consuming task UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR In version 1 7 for SQL Server sources a new wizard is available which will round trip the SQL statement lt FIELDSET gt definitions and keep them in sync When you select a table in the XML Editor tree view a link to the SQL Wizard is available on the right under the table attributes When you access the wizard you can alter the SQL and preview the results F SQL Wizard olx SELECT CONSTIT_ID DATE FROM DATE TO FUND ID RECIP RELATION CODE RELATION CODE ID IMPORT ID SEQUENCE NOTES ADDED BY DATE ADDED LAST CHANGED BY DATE LAST CHAN
135. Sob v 5 x G3 TreejProperty View S Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection TABLE_1 Description created by BBNTdavidow 0 GO Cube 1 CE e Version 1 Tables The set of table definitions For the tables that will be created in your data mart 7 Click the ellipses beside Collection in the Tables row The Table Collection Editor screen appears Table Collection Editor Members TABLE_3 Properties a El Misc FieldSet Collection ES P Name TABLE 3 PrimaryKey RE TableType None SourceSet Collection 8 Click Add to add tables to the collection You can specify properties for each table you include in the collection For more information about table properties see TABLE on page 243 9 10 11 12 13 UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 25 _ A When you finish adding tables and defining properties for them click OK You return to the editor where your table collection now appears a The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition iO x File Tools Help j lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection E E TABLE 1 Description created by BBNT davidow 0 Ej TABLE_2 SegmentationInfo None m E TABLE_3 Tables n Collection You can also add collections of FIELDSET and SOURCESET objects for individual tables For more information about the properties of these items
136. Starting on 05 25 2004 al Distribute Heschedule Installments due on 05 25 2004 You can also identify a pledge as irregular using an attribute or other methods Then you can modify the Irregular Payment Schedules smart field to recognize these pledges as irregular For more information about this smart field see the Appendix at the end of this concept brief 2432 Da 322 2 APPENDIX B If payments extend beyond the current year but begin within it for example every other year starting today then the pledge is regular and the Net Present Value calculation for regular pledges can be used If the payments do not begin until sometime after the current year or if the intervals between payments are expected to be inconsistent the pledge should be flagged as irregular so it will be processed using the Net Present Value calculation for irregular pledges Handling Write Offs When a pledge or pledge installments are deemed uncollectible The Raiser s Edge offers a mechanism to write off the remaining pledge balance Most organizations have a contra account in the financial system for uncollectible pledges On the face of the financial statements the long term pledges receivable account is shown net of the allowance account for uncollectible pledges The amount in this offset account is generally based on an organization s past experience in collecting on promises to pay Writing off pledge balances
137. Street Ultimo NSW 2007 Australia Mailing Address PO Box K736 Haymarket NSW 1240 Australia Email salesQblackbaud com au support blackbaud com au administration blackbaud com au Freecall 1800 688 910 Australia 0800 444 712 New Zealand Phone 61 2 9211 7366 Fax 61 2 9211 7607 REV 112805 about Blackbaud Blackbaud is the leading global provider of software and related services designed specifically for nonprofit organizations Approximately 13 000 organizations use Blackbaud products and consulting services for fundraising financial management business intelligence and school administration Blackbaud s solutions include The Raiser s Edge The Financial Edge The Education Edge The Patron Edge Blackbaud NetCommunity The Information Edge WealthPoint and ProspectPoint as well as a wide range of consulting and educational services Founded in 1981 Blackbaud is headquartered in Charleston South Carolina and has operations in Toronto Ontario Glasgow Scotland and Sydney Australia This material contained herein is for informational purposes only Blackbaud makes no warranties expressed or implied in this summary The information contained in this document represents the current view of Blackbaud Inc on the items discussed as of the date of this publication Blackbaud the Blackbaud logo The Raiser s Edge The Financial Edge The Education Edge The Patron Edge Blackbaud
138. TION gt Completing the FE Express Export Definition tab When installing an FE Express data mart you must define a Financial Edge export file on which the data mart data is based For more information about creating exports see The Financial Edge Export Guide 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the Export Definition tab 2 New Data Mart x Raiser s Edge 5 our General les Publications Cube Options Data Source The Financial Edge Sample Database Test connection J Data sources EL Accounts Payable Bank Bank Adjustment Credit Memo Invoice Payment Product Purchase Order Recurring Invoice Receipt Vendor a Ei jLoad Save a3Copy from 4 Edit Export lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish 2 Select the Financial Edge database from which you want to create the data mart in the Data Source field You can test the connection to a specified source or view all available Financial Edge data sources For more information about viewing and adding data sources see Data Sources on page 129 3 The available export types appear as checkboxes on the screen Each checkbox represents a separate export The default exports included in the data mart are checked Click the plus sign beside an export type to expand it and view the fields and tables i
139. TION EDGE _ 19 Sending Data to The Raiser s Edge With WriteBack You can send information from The Information Edge back to The Raiser s Edge by grouping records in a static query or specifying an attribute to include on all or selected records E wiiteBack Wizard OE x File Edt View Help Fiter Category v Description Date Use date specified nnzzxs z C Use date field 0 d Comment No Comment Field BIO NAME C Value lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish You can filter the included records by specific smart field value or by a value If you have the derived by a SQL expression Marketing Segmentation optional module you can also create queries based on For more information see WriteBacks on page 118 Exporting Data From The Information s udis ae Ed g e segmentation data into The Raiser s Edge with the segmentation plug in on On the Export Definitions page you can export information from tables within page 106 your data marts You can export the data in as many fields within a table as you want For example you may want to create an export for a segmentation to send to a mailing house You can also create exports directly from tables Views and Monitored fields l 207 CHAPTER 2 Exports can be in character separated value Excel or XML format Export Definition x General Columns Export Options Filters
140. TS 260 Adding Data Warehouses eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ehh hh nnn 260 SMART FIELD DETAILS 4x5 REPRPaeER EPA x4 ERAd R 265 SOLUTION S ati ick roseo Go dade eae dba eet deca Denn 319 Pledge Valuation Analytic 0 cece cee cece eee c eee cece eee hh hts 320 GLOSSARY 42h geet oes ee tee ieee ees a dees 327 New Features in This Release Several new features are included in The Information Edge 1 80 Selections Selections enable you to assemble groups of constituents using tools similar to queries in other Blackbaud products Using selections in Marketing Segmentation can reduce the need to create smart fields on the fly and simplify the creation of segmentations For more information see Creating Selections on page 111 Marketing Segmentation Several changes have been made to the Marketing Segmentation module You can now base segments on the new selections feature so you can more easily define your segmentations Additionally a new tabbed Wizard is available when you create segmentations For more information see Creating Segmentations on page 174 Dependencies You can now view a list of dependencies for any Information Edge object at any time The program checks dependencies among all the different types of objects and displays a comprehensive list Additionally when deleting an item with dependencies a warning message appears You can view all dependencies from the warning message to determ
141. Text SQL statements with JOINS included you may or may not need to perform those same joins in the IDOnlySQL the SQL should specify the set of IDs that will match the same criteria as the main CommandText that is used to load the table UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 209 2 PA Shared Connections In previous versions each provider under the DATASOURCE element had to provide its own ConnectionString While this enabled great flexibility it could be inconvenient if you had many tables all connecting to the same source In version 1 7 you can now specify one or more lt SHAREDPROVIDER gt elements that contain a connectionstring and then reference those by name in the DATAPROVIDER element This makes it easy to move a USC to different servers sources because you can just make a change to a single connection string in one place In addition to the ConnectionString you can also specify the CurrentTimeStampSQL and TimeStampFormat for incremental refreshes since these are usually the same for a given source regardless of the CommandText being used to load the table The screenshot below shows referencing the SharedProviderID from a DATAPROVIDER element 2 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition OI x File Edi Tools Help 3 A ag a se 13 Tree Property View 7 Text View wot ID r ConnectionString Database RE7_SAMPLE Server Ld SHAREDSQLConn1 SHA ConnectionType MSSQLProviderCmd ID SHAREDSQLConn1 I
142. ThelnformationEdge User s Guide 112206 2006 Blackbaud Inc This publication or any part thereof may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording storage in an information retrieval system or otherwise without the prior written permission of Blackbaud Inc The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate Blackbaud Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies errors or omissions in this manual In no event will Blackbaud Inc be liable for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual even if advised of the possibility of damages In the interest of continuing product development Blackbaud Inc reserves the right to make improvements in this manual and the products it describes at any time without notice or obligation The Information Edge The Raiser s Edge The Financial Edge and Blackbaud are registered trademarks of Blackbaud Inc All other products and company names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holder TIE1 80UsersGuide 112206 The Information Edge User s Guide OVERVIEW d 1 Understanding The Information Edge eee 2 Getting Started With The Information Edge eee 5 GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE 7 Information Edge Quick Start
143. Value on page 299 Adding Data Warehouses Adding a data warehouse is similar to adding a data mart However for each data mart you add to a warehouse you must specify the Master table and Key column This means you must identify a table upon which all other tables are dependant in the data mart and you must specify which column holds values you want to compare with other data marts so you can identify the same record in multiple marts gt Adding a Data Warehouse On the menu bar select File New Select Data Mart Warehouse the New Data Mart screen appears on the General tab For information about entering information on the General tab see the next procedure 2 You must specify which data marts you want to add to the warehouse and select the table upon which detail tables in each mart will be dependant in the warehouse For more information see Completing the Warehouse Data Marts tab on page 262 3 After you add exports and HTML Publications to a warehouse you can specify that they process automatically whenever the warehouse processes For more information see Completing the Warehouse Publications tab on page 264 DATA WAREHOUSES 261 gt Completing the Warehouse General tab 1 While creating or editing a Warehouse select the General tab E New Data Mart x Data Marts Publications Name Warehouse Prefix wn Description Warehouse Dptions Maintain field stat
144. Wizard olx General Type Tables Criteria Filter Advanced Create or modify the SQL expression that will yield the output of this smart field Constituent a Gifts E Fields Amount i CONSTITUENT MF BIO AGE gt Za Smart Fields Appeal Insert a Subquery Ld iJ Parameters BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL PARENTID BIZINTEL RE ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID a Gifts Campaign Date Fund SEGMENTATION_DATA_ID System Record ID lt Back Next gt Type 3 When you select a field it appears in the SQL Expression box so you can use it in a SQL statement E Smart Field Wizard Bel Es General Type Tables Criteria Fiter Advanced Create or modify the SQL expression that will yield the output of this smart field indi DATE If you want to use conditions in your statement the Expression Wizard is available For more information about using the Expression Wizard see Expression Wizard on page 83 4 Complete the SQL statement by entering text in the SQL Expression box To complete some expressions you may need to create a subquery to join fields from different tables For more information about subqueries see Joining data tables with subqueries on page 280 Expression Smart Field Examples The Expression Smart Field builds a SQL statement using the target table you select and an expression you enter The basic syntax for this SQL statement is SELECT your express
145. a File prefix to appear in front of each file name in the export For most exports the number of files that will be created based on your selections appears on screen Some selections may create numerous files For example if you base the export on the BIO_NAME field depending on the number of records in your database you could create tens of thousands of export files If you select an Output type of Multiple Folders several fields appear Output type Multiple folders Dutputpath C fles TIEENpot ss Ss 43 fedja m3 This export will create 26 files Folder prefix o File name RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS esv 0000 Sample path C filesNTIEExpor 2000BREAKFASTSRE EXPRESS GIFTS csv C files TIEExport 2000DIRECT RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS csv Use the Browse button to enter the Output path where you want to save the export Select the Field containing the values by which the export folders will be named You can also optionally specify a Folder prefix to appear in front of each folder created in the export Specify a File Name for the export file that will be created in each folder When you create exports on a client machine you can specify the Output path on the client machine However when you specify in a data mart s properties that exports process automatically each time the mart is processed because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the export to the specified path on the serve
146. a List smart field you must select a field from which you want to create a comma separated list of values LYBUNT Category Fundraising What it Does A LYBUNT smart field indicates donors that gave Last Year But Unfortunately Not This Year SMART FIELD DETAILS When Would I use a LYBUNT Smart Field Use this field to flag donors who gave last year but not this year Criteria On the Criteria tab for a LYBUNT smart field you must specify the date field to be used and the start date and end date for your This Year date range Maximum Category Statistical What it Does A Maximum smart field selects the greatest value for a field in a one to many relationship When Would use a Maximum Smart Field Use this field to flag the maximum gifts from your donors Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Maximum smart field you must select the field for which you want to select the greatest value Median Category Statistical What it Does A Median smart field selects the median value for a field in a one to many relationship When Would I use a Median Smart Field Use this field to flag the median gifts from your donors Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Median smart field you must select the field for which you want to select the median value Minimum Category Statistical What it Does A Minimum smart field selects the lowest value for a field in a one to many relationship When Would I use a Minimu
147. a tab for a Payment on Principle smart field you must select the per period Interest rate whether it should be based on a field or value and whether it should be a percentage or decimal In the Per period field enter 1 if the rate is per period otherwise enter a field or value that will determine the per period rate In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Payment Periods field enter the total number of payments in the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series of future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due SMART FIELD DETAILS Percentile Category Statistical What it Does A Percentile smart field breaks data from a selected field into one hundred groups When Would I use a Percentile Smart Field You may want to use this smart field to show which percentile each of your constituents falls in based on their giving amount Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Percentile smart field select a field containing data you want to break into one hund
148. able For example the CONSTITUENT table never has this field because it is the root and is not a child to any other table All other tables have this field because all have a one to many relation with either the CONSTITUENT table or another table BIZINTEL_RERECORSDID This is always the Raiser s Edge System Record ID of the constituent record to which this row is related In the CONSTITUENT table it is the System Record ID of the constituent In the GIFTS table it is the System Record ID of the constituent who made the gift In the GIFT_INSTALLMENTS table it is the System Record ID of the constituent who made the gift for which this is an installment In The Raiser s Edge the System Record ID is the Primary Key of the RECORDS table dbo RECORDS ID The ID is system generated it is not the user defined ID that appears on the Bio 1 tab of the constituent record To view the System Record ID from a constituent record in The Raiser s Edge select File Properties from the menu bar The System Record ID Import ID and date added changed display This field is also usually available in Query and Export as a field named System Record ID BIZINTEL_REID This is the System Record ID of the respective record type from The Raiser s Edge This field does not appear on the CONSTITUENT table because it would be redundant with the BIZINTEL_RERECORSDID However it appears on all other tables In the GIFT table it is the gift s System Rec
149. able and click lt FIELDSET gt You can then select a field to view its properties E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help 58e 5 x Tree Property View Text View e lt BIPACKAGE gt DataType CallLog ForeignKeyTo B E Contacts ontacts Lontac Ht lt FIELDSET gt Name ContactId ContactId NoIndex True ContactLast ContactFirst ContactOrgId Title ContactPhone ContactEmail CallNotes StatusId Sourceld BBIC_AUTO_PK d lt SOURCESET gt Organizations Results tblOrganizations 4 Name The name of the field in the data mart table 232 CHAPTER 6 C You can also add a collection of cubes by clicking the ellipses in the Cubes row of the data grid on the right The Information Edge makes assumptions about the data type of each field based on the first few rows of the Excel file If for example a field has integers for the first few rows but includes strings in other rows an error will occur when the data mart is refreshed Other combinations of data types may also cause errors To avoid this for fields that include values of different types you must select a Data Type that includes all the values For more information about the available data types see your SQL Server documentation 7 Now you can build the cubes that will make up your data mart In th
150. abled for it in SOL Server Enterprise Manager ii SQL Server Enterprise Manager Console Root Microsoft SQL Servers SQL Server Group local Windows NT Security Logins bia Console Window Help Action View Ios e 9 mX E A 56 NIP eo Tree Logins 5ltems Console Root EB bs Microsoft SQL Servers BUILTIN Administrators Windows Gr Permit master English Bg a SQL Server Group ARP REUser Standard Permit master English El D local windows NT BE REUser_ReadOnly Standard Permit master English H Databases Bs Standard Permit master English E Data Transformation Sen f wEBREPORTS Standard Permit master English H Management H Replication EH Security cum Server Roles i Linked Servers 9 Remote Servers H Support Services H E Meta Data Services The REUser login enables The Information Edge to connect to the server on which The Raiser s Edge resides The connection has rights only to Raiser s Edge databases If a connection to the server cannot be made using the REUser login The Information Edge attempts to connect to the server using Windows Authentication If a connection still cannot be made an error message appears The REUser log in has DBO database owner rights to the database because The Raiser s Edge uses it to log into the database The Raiser s Edge needs full database owner rights to perform all its functions such as creating tables and views For example tables
151. ables and Charts and perform other analyses on the monitored information For the above example you can create a pivot table that shows how many donors moved from the Silver to Gold level and you can see when the changes occurred by including the date changed in your pivot You can export the contents of a monitored field in Excel XML or character delimited formats 87 88 7 CHAPTER 3 A T Records with a NULL value are not included in monitored fields Therefore you may notice that a monitored field does not contain as many records as the table on which it is based When a NULL record changes values it is added to the monitored field with the new value and the previous value as NULL After you designate a monitored field you can then create a Monitored Field Query type smart field based on that field The smart field specifies a time period in which to track the monitored field s value For example using the previous donor level example after you specify it as a monitored field you can use it as the basis for a Monitored Field Query smart field This field can show changes during any time frame you select for example you may want to track donor status weekly or monthly gt Adding a Monitored Field 1 On the Configuration tree view right click on Monitored Fields and select New The Monitored Field tab appears ED Monitored Field wizard Mortioved Field rate MEM ALTAK CHROM lo UE
152. ables you to create a SQL statement that derives a value which populates the smart field SMART FIELD DETAILS 295 7 When Would I use an Expression Smart Field Use this smart field when you need a derived value as a field entry For example you may want to determine how much of a percentage each individual donor s gifts account for of the total gifts to your organization and include this information in a donor table The smart field evaluates a SQL expression to derive the value of the field To view some examples of Expression smart fields see Expression Smart Field Examples on page 296 Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Expression smart field you must create the SQL statement that will yield the output for the smart field You can use the Expression Wizard to help add conditions your SQL expressions gt Adding Expression smart field criteria 1 When creating an Expression smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard olx General Type Tables Criteria Fiter Advanced Create or modify the SOL expression that will yield the output of this smart field Right Click to select field from list amp Expression Wizard Ll Clear Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 206 APPENDIX A 2 You can enter text directly in the SQL Expression box Right click in the box to view a list of fields in the target table you selected as well as any related tables E Smart Field
153. ag items to the Chart GIFTS Count SEGMENTATION_DATA_ SUM Amount Year to Date Amount Year to Date Gift count mountGreater100 PEAL APPEAL Blackbaud_Non_Contributor CAMPAIGN onstituent_BIO_GENDER ole 3 f 0 i fr lo llo 0 8 0 6 04 0 2 Series Area Categories Drop Category Fielas Here FA We recommend you leave the Commands and Options screen open as you work in a chart because the available options on the screen change as you select different items in a chart To access the screen right click anywhere in a chart and select Commands and Options Data fields are identifiable on the Field List screen by the ones and zeroes icon beside them 160 7 CHAPTER 4 Before you publish a Chart you can hide the toolbar and drop zones by right clicking and selecting Commands and Options Select the Show Hide tab and unmark the Field buttons drop zones and Toolbar checkboxes For more information about publishing see Publications on page 123 12 The Chart is now populated with the selected information You can select the specific type of chart you want to view by right clicking anywhere in the chart and selecting Commands and Options Select the Type tab and choose the type of chart you want to display Ex Be at at 23 B a E Drop F
154. age for the current segmentation click New in the action bar The Package Wizard appears ITTTTNEENENEEEE M dois iP Properties Name Calendar Description Glossy Calendar Cost per piece 2 00 Help OK Cancel 3 Enter a Name and Description for the package For example you may have a package named Glossy Calendar that is sent to your best donors and prospects 4 Enter the Cost per piece of the mailing 5 On the Properties tab you can assign any properties you previously created to the package For more information about Properties see Custom Properties on page 191 183 4 184 2 CHAPTER 5 asy 6 Click OK to save the package and return to the Segmentation Wizard When you generate segments on the General tab you can select a package as the default Then after segments are generated you can assign the packages you created here to your segments Filtering Segmentations You can filter records in segmentations by specifying to include only records that are part of a selection or that have certain field values You can also specify to exclude any records in a previously activated segmentation Filtering by another segmentation is useful if you sent mailings to test segmentation members to gauge the mailings success and now want to send mailings to everyone else in the segmentation By filtering through the test segmentation you ensure that members in the
155. age for the group as a whole Lift is the ratio of these values target response divided by average response A Lift Chart enables you to quickly analyze these values You can filter the Lift Chart by Range of lift When you select a range any segments that fall outside that range are excluded from the chart You can also specify to sort the lift in ascending or descending order and specify to Show a specific number of top or bottom segments When you select to show the top or bottom number segments you are not specifying to see the largest and smallest values You are actually specifying to see the first or last values from the list after it has been sorted So the data is first sorted then the top or bottom first or last values are selected from the sorted data based on your selections Cumulative Response Use the Cumulative Response chart to gauge the overall response to your segmentation You can filter the Cumulative Response chart by percentage Range of responders for each segment When you select a range any segments that fall outside that range are excluded from the chart You can also specify to sort the segments in ascending or descending order and specify to Show a specific number of top or bottom segments When you select to show the top or bottom number of segments you are not specifying to see the largest and smallest values You are actually specifying to see the first or last values from the list after it has been so
156. ails In this case you need to either create the same path on the server or update the path in the export or HTML Publication to one that exists on the server to enable the item to process If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you are creating a new data mart click Finish to install the data mart A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed The data mart then appears in the tree view FE Express data mart tables contain several ID fields that are generated automatically For more information about these fields see the next section CONFIGURATION BIZINTEL IDs in FE Express Data Marts Several ID fields are generated automatically in every table created in an FE Express data mart All these fields have a name that begins with BIZINTEL BIZINTEL ID This is always the Primary Key of the table It is a system generated ID with no relation to any records defined in The Financial Edge It can be considered as a unique identifier of the row in the table BIZINTEL PARENTID This is always the Foreign Key field that points to the BIZINTEL ID in the parent table This field appears only on a table with a one to many relationship to another table For example the AP INVOICE table never has this field because it is the root and is not a child to any other table BIZINTEL_PARENTID_ TABLENAME When this ID is present it is
157. always a Foreign Key field that points to the BIZINTEL ID in a parent table that is part of another export This field also appears only on a table with a one to many relationship to another table This ID defines the relationship between tables that may have been exported in separate exports but that are related to each other in The Financial Edge For example the TRANSACTIONS table may be included in a separate export from the GL ACCOUNT table but the TRANSACTIONS table includes a BIZINTEL PARENTID GL ACCOUNT column to define the relationship between the tables in The Financial Edge BIZINTEL_ TABLENAME SYSTEM ID This is the Financial Edge System Record ID of the parent record to which this row is related For example in the GL ACCOUNTS BUDGET table it is the System Record ID of the GL ACCOUNT BIZINTEL FE ID This is the System Record ID of the corresponding table from The Financial Edge This field does not appear on the parent table because it would be redundant with the BIZINTEL TABLENAME SYSTEM ID However it appears on all other tables You will probably never need to use the two IDs related to The Financial Edge system record ID BIZINTEL TABLENAME SYSTEM ID and BIZINTEL FE ID They exist mainly to enable drilling through records However you may use the BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL PARENTID and BIZINTEL PARENTID TABLENAME fields because they are the Primary Key and Foreign Key used in any JOIN or subquery expression to j
158. amount generated by each segment When you select a range any segments that fall outside that range are excluded from the chart You can sort the information in a variety of ways including ROI Percent ROI Amount Expected Response and Expected Gift Amount You can sort this information in ascending or descending order You can also specify to Show a specific number of top or bottom segments When you select to show the top or bottom number of segments you are not specifying to see the largest and smallest values You are actually specifying to see the first or last values from the list after it has been sorted So the data is first sorted then the top or bottom first or last values are selected from the sorted data Test Segment Performance Use the Test Segment Performance chart to review the productivity of test segments For more information about creating test segmentations see Adding a test segmentation on page 190 The chart shows performance based on response rate and return on investment You can filter the Test Segment Performance chart by Segment and sort the results in a variety of ways including Offers Responders and Total Amount You can sort this information in ascending or descending order gt Analyzing an individual segmentation 1 On the Segmentation page open an active segmentation MARKETING SEGMENTATION 201 2 The analysis options are available as separate tabs For example select
159. and click OK to automatically generate the xml structure For the selected tables Excel file C Documents and Settings davidow Desktop Contacts xls L CallLog Contacts Organizations Results Include K K K IV First row is field names OK Cancel 3 Leave the First row is field names checkbox marked to indicate that the first row of the spreadsheet contains the names of fields rather than data 4 All worksheets in the spreadsheet default as marked to be included in the as tables in the data mart If you do not want any sheets to be included in the data mart unmark the checkboxes by them UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR ay 5 Click OK You return to the Information Edge XML Editor and the selected worksheets now appear as tables in the tree view 25 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help Gu v A x dj TreejProperty View S Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection CallLog Description created by BBNT davidow 0 Contacts SegmentationInfo None Organizations Tables Collection Results Version 1 Cubes The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart New XML definition 6 Depending on the properties of your spreadsheet you may need to change the data type for some fields In the tree view click the plus sign to expand a t
160. and edit the chart If you do not mark either checkbox only you will be able to view it ANALYTICS 159 2 Cue 7 Click Finish The Chart designer appears 10 11 ee X ee EE f 7 9 9 i a CO Drop Filter Fields Here 0 6 Right click anywhere in the designer pane and select Field List The Field List window appears From the Field List window select the Appeal field and drag it to the Drop Category Fields Here area When you move a field to the category area the unique items of data are displayed as categories or related groups of data Each category consists of one point from each data series Category labels usually appear across the category x axis of the chart although this can vary depending on the type of chart you are using Select the Type field and drag it to the Drop Series Fields Here area When you drag a field to the series area the items of data within the field are displayed as data series in the chart These series are represented by colored data markers and their names appear in the chart legend Select the GIFTS Count data field and drag it to the Drop Data Fields Here area Data fields provide the values displayed in the chart When you add a field to the data area the values for the field are displayed as data markers for the items you selected in the category and series fields NAAS es hel eet EA Drop Filter Fields Here Dr
161. and the process is repeated the next time the mart is refreshed Microsoft Access Example This is a simple command text issued against a Microsoft Access data base SELECT ID NAME AGE FROM PEOPLE WHERE DATE LAST CHANGED gt CDATE LASTENDPOINT OR DATE ADDED gt CDATE LASTENDPOINT AND DATE LAST CHANGED CDATE CURRENTENDPOINT The incremental attributes are e CurrentTimeStampSQL SELECT Now e TimeStampFormat MM dd yyyy HH mm ss e DOnlySQL SELECT ID FROM PEOPLE When processed the 9 LASTENDPOINT macro is replaced by the timestamp from when data mart was last processed The CURRENTENDPOINT macro is replaced by the value selected using the CurrentTimeStampSQL statement Both dates are formatted using the TimeStampFormat string For example a data mart was last processed on 1 1 2005 at 1 00 am The next night the data mart is processed at 2 00 am With a TimeStampFormat of MM dd yyyy HH mm ss the macros will be replaced with the following values LASTENDPOINT 01 01 2005 01 00 00 9 CURRENTENDPOINT 01 02 2005 02 00 00 Yielding a WHERE clause of PU 4258 72 CHAPTER 6 C Vased WHERE DATE LAST CHANGI DATE LAST CHANGI DATE ADDED CDATE ED ED gt CDATE 01 01 2005 01
162. are created for static queries and a wide range of temporary tables and views when running reports REUser can also make more complicated changes to the database schema during an upgrade when database revisions run Therefore REUser must be able to add drop and alter tables stored procedures and functions It is important to note that the REUser login has DBO rights only for the Raiser s Edge database not for any other databases that may be running on the server It is also important to note that connecting to the Raiser s Edge server using the REUser login requires that the instance of SQL Server be set to SQL Server and Windows Authentication and not Windows Authentication only If Windows Authentication only is specified the connection to the server will fail even when the REUser login is present on the server 3135 2 os 136 7 CHAPTER 3 The REUser ReadOnly and WEBREPORTS logins are not used by The Information Edge REUser ReadOnly is used by The Raiser s Edge for users who do not have security rights to edit records and WEBREPORTS is used by RE Anywhere the Web based version of The Raiser s Edge Security Use the Security tab to add and remove users from The Information Edge database and check properties for users already logged into the database You can specify users as database administrators or users Database administrators have full access to all data marts and can add and remove other user
163. arge gift in installments over multiple years or pay a large amount sometime in the future A pledge must be valued and reported on the balance sheet at its net present value if a clear record of an intention or promise to pay exists Generally these pledges are valued using the published IRS charitable gift rate on the date of the gift The rate does not change over the life of the pledge Additionally organizations should book an allowance for uncollectible pledges based on the past collection history For organizations receiving a large number of long term pledges valuing these pledges according to FAS 116 can be a challenge You can pay an auditor to value these pledges for your balance sheet or value them using Excel Paying an auditor can be expensive and using Excel breaks the audit trail between the pledge record in The Raiser s Edge and its reported value on the balance sheet The Information Edge provides an analytic that enables users of The Raiser s Edge to value their long term pledges Additionally The Information Edge provides a complete audit trail from the net present value of the pledge to the underlying gift record in The Raiser s Edge From the value in The Information Edge an auditor can drill through to the record in The Raiser s Edge for verification purposes DATE Multiple Items CAMPAIGN Endowment Campaign Discount 34 288 99 20 53 940 17 7 190 34 CONSTIT CODE Alumni Cadet
164. art click Next to access the Publications tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure 5 If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs 38 2 CHAPTER 3 p d You cannot automatically process Postal Discount exports as part of a data mart refresh For more information see Postal Discount Exports on page 97 gt Completing the RE Express Publications tab 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the Publications tab EJ New Data Mart x E General Refresh Options Cube Options Additional T ables A Exports No Available Henrs D WriteBacks Mo Available items HTML Publications Vo A valable fens If you are creating a data mart no items are available for processing yet If you are editing an existing mart any exports WriteBacks and HTML Publications you have created are available as checkboxes Specify which of these items you would like to process automatically when the data mart is processed When you create exports or HTML Publications on a client machine you can specify an output path on the client machine However because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the HTML Publication or export to the specified output path on the server If the path does not exist on the server the HTML Pub
165. art click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs gt Completing the Universal Source Connector Refresh Options tab 1 While creating or editing a Universal Source Connector data mart select the Refresh Options tab New Data Mart x 5 USC Definition Publications General Use incremental refresh M Process deleted records When checked records deleted from the source system are deleted from The Information Edge during an incremental refresh If unchecked deleted records are removed only during a full refresh Iv Hebuildindezes When checked indexes are rebuilt during an incremental refresh Uncheck this option only if your incremental refreshes typically include a relatively small number of records Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 After you install a data mart you can refresh the data in it manually any time or automatically at scheduled times If you want to refresh all records in the data mart leave the Use incremental refresh checkbox unmarked If you want to refresh only records that have changed since the last time you processed the data mark the checkbox this is the faster of UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 4217 the two options In addition to marking this checkbox you will need to set certain properties in your data mart definition that enable incremental refreshes in your custom data marts For more information see Incremental Refresh in Universal Source
166. art Fields gt Parameters InterestR ate g Constituent Checkbox Table specific unmarked Checkbox marked Select All CONFIGURATION aly 78 CHAPTER 3 When creating SQL statements always use true table names not friendly names 4 Select the Expression tab a Parameter Wizard OE x Genera Expression Expression case when RE EXPRESS GIFTS TYPE Cash then 1 else 0 end Right Click to select item from list sf Validate 4 Filter Wizard Ll Clear lt Back Next gt L Finish Cancel 4 5 To create your parameter enter a value or SQL statement in the Expression box If the parameter is table specific you can use the Filter wizard similar to the Expression wizard to assist you in creating an expression For more information see Parameter Filter Wizard on page 78 6 Click Finish The parameter name now appears in the tree view Parameter Filter Wizard When creating parameters that are specific to a certain table not global the Filter Wizard is available on the parameter properties Expression tab The Filter Wizard is very similar to the Expression Wizard and Filter Wizard that can be used to create and filter several types of smart fields but there are key differences The main difference is that the Filter Wizard creates an expression that consists of a case statement that returns a default value of 1 for True n
167. ata Details Type 3D view Show Hide General commands X Select chart Workspace xl Add Ej Multiple Charts p Chart Explosion fio Yo Angle of first slice fo degrees Pie Thickness fio On the General tab you can add and remove items from a chart add a title to a chart display multiple charts and specify other display options for a chart For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help ANALYTICS 155 2 N A We recommend you leave the Commands and Options screen open as you work in a chart because the available options on it change as you select different items in the chart 15 gt CHAPTER 4 Border Fill Tab Commands and Options Solid color e A On the Border Fill tab you can specify border and background display options for a chart For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help Data Details Tab E and Options IProvider2MSOLAP 2 Data Source DAVIDOW Ini e RE EXPRESS GIFTS C Sass enel Plot detail records On the Data Details tab you can view and edit the data connection specify a view table or cube from which data should be used and specify how the information is plotted on a chart For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help ANALYTICS Type Tab Comma
168. atchSize This attribute specifies the number of rows to insert in a single batch The default is 10 000 a value of 0 means to insert all rows in one batch We recommend you thoroughly test that any change from the default to make sure it provides a benefit Support for Staging Hidden Tables The TABLE element now supports two new attributes to help make using staging tables more convenient The USC has always supported multiple steps under the lt SOURCESET gt element that could be used to implement staging tables New for 1 7 are explicit attributes to designate a particular table as a staging table StagingTable and TruncateAfterRefresh El The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Edit Tools Help ald Bg g se 13 TreejProperty View Text view web view cB lt BIPACKAGE gt FieldSet Collection a El SHAREDSQLConn1 SHA FriendlyName Action Reminder amp 7 ACTION REMINDER ID ACTION REMINDER table Name ACTION REMINDER 14 ACTION SOLICITOR PrimaryKey ACTION_REMINDER ID field 0 ActionAttributes RE7TableType None 0 ACTIONCATEGORIES oee z 30 ActionNotepad StagingTable O00 lt FIELDSET gt TruncateAfterRefresh B lt SOURCESET gt DataProvider A Auto Generate ORRE eo z Soren SS Friendly Field Names SQL Wizard 5 ACTIONS
169. atching record in the source table For example a constituent can have many gift records but a gift record corresponds to only one constituent record 4 If you are creating a new smart field click Next to access the Criteria tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard gt Completing the smart field Criteria tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard lolx C Filter Advanced General Type Tables Available date fields Date Start Date 06 03 2005 End Date 06 03 2005 E Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel la 2 The available options on the criteria tab differ depending on the type of smart field you are creating or editing For more information about the criteria for each type of smart field see Smart Field Details on page 265 3 If you are creating a new smart field click Next to access the Filter tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard 106 CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the smart field Filter tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the Filter tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x 3 Advance
170. ate dimensions checkbox to give you flexibility in your reports later In an FE Express data mart dimensions are any code table included in the export file Creating the dimensions now saves you the time of adding them manually later 3 Select a Date Hierarchy to determine how date dimensions nest in the cube and appear in reports Specify when the Year starts for your organization For example if your fiscal year begins March 1 you can enter that information here 4 In the Create cubes for the following tables box each table that will be generated in the data mart based on your export settings is included as a checkbox Mark the checkbox by each table for which you want to create a cube All Information Edge analysis features will be available for each of these cubes 5 If you are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Raiser s Edge Source tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs Do not use the Long Date Format for any export date fields Long dates are stored as VarChar format in The Information Edge therefore no date calculations can be performed on long dates Additionally if you edit export properties and change a date format to long existing smart fields and segmentations which rely on the Date field are impacted 54 7 CHAPTER 3 p d Caec
171. ation you can copy the segmentation and re activate it using the new value Only data marts that are constructed to be aware of The Raiser s Edge have the Raiser s Edge export options available These include all data marts created with RE Express 3 Select a Program field and the Value from the field that you want to use to identify donations made as a result of this segmentation This entry ensures that you can identify gifts that belong to a specific segmentation For example if you have The Raiser s Edge you may want to create an appeal for this purpose so that the appeal is associated only with gifts resulting from the segmentation mailing 4 Mark the Create segment for indirect responses checkbox if you expect that some gifts may be received and associated with the Program field value you selected even though the gifts were not prompted by the segmentation Enter a Name and Description for this segment 5 Mark the Activate when data mart is refreshed checkbox if you want to activate the segmentation the next time the data mart is refreshed instead of now Depending on the properties of your segmentation and the data it includes it may take some time to activate By marking this checkbox you can activate the segmentation immediately before the data mart is refreshed the next time instead of waiting for it to process now 6 Click OK If you did not mark the Activate when data mart is refreshed checkbox a mes
172. ation you can specify a macro to account for this The available macros are CURRENT_TABLENAME The full table name of the table being inserted into db owner prefix tablename CURRENT_TABLEPREFIX The table prefix chosen by the user UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 9 CURRENT PACKAGENAME The name of the data mart as chosen by the user during data mart installation CURRENT_PACKAGEID The dbo package table ID column value for the current data mart CURRENT_DATABASENAME BBMINE 9BBMINE APP ROLENAME BBMINE APP 9 ANALYSIS SERVER NAME The name of the Analysis Server machine ANALYSIS SERVER DBNAME BBMINE MD The name of the BBIC database on the Analysis server machine GPATH INSTALL ROOT The folder where The Information Edge is installed G9PATH INSTALL BIN The folder where The Information Edge binaries dll and exe files are installed Indexing Fields By default the Universal Source Connector indexes most fields you define unless you explicitly tell it not to The Universal Source Connector does not index booleans memos and fields over 800 characters however it does index every other field When adding fields you will probably want to index only fields that may be used for a Smart field or in a dimension If you index every field the XML file may take quite awhile to load and create indices Since the default in the xml file specifi
173. ation now appears To enable analyzing the success of a segmentation you must activate it For more information see Activating a segmentation on page 193 Generating Segments Segments group donors on the basis of a wide variety of different characteristics enabling you to target your prospects with customized mailings based on these characteristics Segments can be based on either selections or field values After generating you can edit existing segments or create additional ones MARKETING SEGMENTATION 179 ae Og gt Generating segments by selection 1 From the Segmentation Wizard General tab action bar click the arrow by Generate Segments and click By Selections The Generate Segments screen appears E Generate segments STE Generate Segments By Selection ty ay 2 segments Selections v 5f ConstituentAgeUnder v SY selection 1 Package ig p Cost Response rate 5 00 zi Yo Gift amount 0 00 Create test segments for each segment Package a cot Gift amount 0 00 Sample size s4 Percent z Help OK Cancel Z 2 If you mark the Selections checkbox a segment is generated for each selection you have previously created If you want to create segments for only certain selections unmark the Selections checkbox and mark the individual selections You can also click the filter icon and create a new selection
174. ations typically do not need to be indexed IV Rebuild index The index will be dropped before refreshing and rebuilt after the refresh completes Help Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 108 2 CHAPTER 3 In general by default the program attempts to optimize for Balanced time However if you perform the same task over and over again using the same field s you may want to materialize those values onto the Target Table which is what Query Time optimization does to help improve query performance However this adds time to data mart refreshes 2 The Optimization Type field default entry is based on the type of smart field you are creating In almost all cases you should leave the default unless you are attempting to achieve a specific goal with the field s processing Refresh Time and Balance Time optimization is not available for all smart field types On these smart fields Query Time is locked as the optimization type Query Time Optimizing for Query Time maximizes performance when the smart field is used during query operations such as report generation The value of a Query Time optimized smart field is calculated when the smart field is refreshed and the value is stored on the Target Table This enables the value to be accessed quickly during queries but it takes longer to refresh than other optimization types Any smart field can have an optimization type of Query Time Re
175. available for use with any Pivot Table or Chart in a cube or that are available only within an individual Pivot Table You may want to prototype and test your calculated member by creating it for a single Pivot Table Once you are sure the calculation functions as you intend it to you can recreate the member for the entire cube so that it can be used in any Pivot Table or Chart created from the cube Once you create a calculated member you can use it to build other calculated members For example you may create a calculated member to rank your funds based on total giving amount You can then use that calculated member to create another calculated member that compares the rankings for this year and last year gt Adding a calculated member This procedure demonstrates how to create a calculated member that is available for an entire cube To create one that is available only for a single Pivot Table from the table click the Calculated Totals and Fields toolbar button and select Calculated Member Wizard Then skip to step three of this procedure On the Configuration tree view click the plus sign beside Cubes under the data mart containing the cube for which you want to add a calculated member CONFIGURATION 67 N Calculated members created for use with a single Pivot Table are stored on the workstation Calculated Members created for use with any Pivot Table or Chart are stored on the server m 68 A CHA
176. change the structure of the database tables For example those with user rights cannot add dimensions to a cube The selected data mart and role now appear in the Data Mart Roles frame Data Mart Roles Assigned Role Gift and Bio Information User J Bemove j Properties 10 Click Finish You return to the Database Users screen The new user now appears in the grid 11 To exit the Database Users screen and return to the console click Close F 140 CHAPTER 3 Analytics Contents T Creating Reports etw Uus rex ET EE E ER ERA SE OE FRE 142 Quick Tips for Using Pivot Tables and Charts LL 143 Pivot Tables i 0 0 ecg csp ee oe ere ono we e ew Baro eo OS Se 145 Pivot Table Field List Screen 0 cc ccc eens 146 i Pivot Table Commands and Options 00 cece eee eee eee ee 146 Captions Tab sreca cap cee eee nee nen eens 147 Report Tab 4 sou ch week eae bathe eae gig AREE wn eel aoe 147 Behavior Tab iex nla epe iau ere ee e xor seas 148 Accessing Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge Records from Pivot Tables 152 CAPS P 154 Chart Field List Screen e esce roria sini ei ee el eoe gene ear eer 154 Chart Commands and Options 0 0 e eee eee eee 155 General Fab oes o eter e bee E eb de dele nd 155 uad Border Fill Tab peye nde cca odes RR eR x E eR PUE 156 Data Details T b 1 00001 use sedem tee Ra
177. ck Next gt Cancel 3 The available authentication options are based on how your authentication is established in SQL Server To use SQL Server Authentication mark that option and enter the Name and Password you established for the user in your installation of SQL Server Skip to step 7 of this procedure To specify that the user should access SQL Server using the same information used to log into Windows mark the Windows Authentication option and proceed to the next step of this procedure 4 Browse to locate the user you want to add The Windows Users and Groups screen appears The Information Edge Windows Users and Groups Ea List Names From b PDNT J Names Mikes Intemet MistyCh ELST EAS FRS G MitchMc DAA I AFN OA amp NTRAD NTRAD Backup Accou NTRAD Backup Account Paul Product Development RPT Access RPT Access RPT Access mi Sarahst QAA EAS FRS QA ShaneTh ELST EAS FRS QA Add Members Search Add Name oes one 5 Select the network on which the user is located in the List Names From field Select a user and click Add The user appears in the Add Name field 313 94 C ay 138 4 CHAPTER 3 If the user is a member of a group you can select the group click Members and select the member from the list that appears 6 Click OK to return to the Authentication screen The selected user now appears in the Name field 7 Click Ne
178. ckbox to indicate that the first row of the file contains the names of fields rather than data If the source table you are adding contains a foreign key with which you want to define a relationship to the parent table in the mart mark the Create relationship to another table in the data mart checkbox The source table appears in the Join from field Select a Field from the source table and in the Join to field specify the table in the data mart with which you want to join and specify the specific Field in that table The newly added table includes a system generated BIZ INTEL ID column as the primary key If you specify a relationship the BIZINTEL JOINKEY column is also created with the same type as the primary key on the parent table When you complete this screen proceed to step 10 of this procedure CONFIGURATION 43 2 8 If you selected to append data to an existing table the Tables screen appears as follows Table Properties x Tables Below are the tables that are available For the selected Data Source You will need to specify the relationship between the source and target tables using the options below Data source ClientContact mdb Source table AAKE hd Kev field Contactld b Target table CONSTITUENT Key field BIO ID 7 lt Back Next gt Cancel 9 The Data source you selected previously appears You need to define the relationship between a source table and th
179. ct the type of database you will be connecting to in this step 4 Mark an option to indicate whether the source you are adding is an Adaptive Server Anywhere Microsoft SQL Server or Oracle database CONFIGURATION 131 If you selected Adaptive Server Anywhere proceed to the next step If you selected Microsoft SQL Server skip to step 8 If you selected Oracle skip to step 11 5 Click Next The Adaptive Server Anywhere screen appears Data Source x Adaptive Server Anywhere Add or modify Adaptive Server Anywhere connection parameters in this step Engine name Blackbaud70 Database name Blackbaud70 Communication links Database file Test DB Connection Test PI Connection lt Back Les Cancel 6 Enter the Engine name and Database name for the database The Information Edge uses this information to identify the database on the network If you want to specify a protocol for how the database communicates with The Information Edge enter it in the Communication links field If you want to link to a specific database by file name enter it in the Database file field Click Test DB Connection to attempt to connect to the database using the settings you specified If the connection is successful proceed to step 14 of this procedure If it is not successful double check the connection parameter information you entered Click Test API Connection to connect with The Raiser s Edge
180. d General Type Tables Criteria Filter Constituent where RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO CONSTIT CODE Board Member v Reset values For records that do not meet this criteria SA Filter Wizard L 1 Clear lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 2 You can use SQL statements to filter the values in your smart field You can enter a statement directly into the box or click Filter Wizard to access a wizard that can help you create a statement If the type of smart Only those records indicated in the SQL statement are processed for the field you are creating smart field Other records are filtered and their value is usually NULL or required you to enter both a 0 depending on the type of smart field you are creating For example target and source table on records filtered out of a smart field that computes average gift amount the Tables tab a separate have a value of 0 while records filtered out of a first gift date field are Filter box is available for NULL each on the Filter tab When a smart field includes filters they are applied before the smart field criteria during data mart processing Then the criteria of the smart field is applied to the remaining records Those records appear with the values specified or calculated by the criteria for the smart field 3 The Reset values for records that do not meet this criteria checkbox is available for certain types of smart fields If you mark this checkbox recor
181. d noIndex true Invalid XML xi The name attribute has an invalid value according to its data type An error occurred at 11 14 XENXXNNUUOOUOE lt FIELD name GOAL dataType Decimal sizez 1 7 id CAMPAIGN GOAL field nolndexz true numericPrecisionz 30 numericScalez B lt FIELD name 0 dataT ypez Int sizez 4 id CAMPAIGN ID field lt FIELDSET gt lt SOURCESET gt lt DATAPROVIDER SharedProviderID SHAREDSQLConn1 FastLoad true gt lt COMMANDTEXT gt SELECT New XML definition This XML Editor performs a less strict validation than that performed by The Information Edge when the file is actually brought into the program A file that is valid when checked in the editor may in a few circumstances not be valid when actually imported into The Information Edge For example the XML Editor cannot know if a data source for The Information Edge exists If an XML file references a data source that is no longer valid perhaps a data mart was deleted the file will show as valid in the XML Editor but will not be valid when imported into The Information Edge XML Schema Reference This reference contains information about the elements contained in the BIPACKAGEDEFINITION XSD schema For information about XML authoring and schema in general a wide variety of tutorials are available on the Web A good place to start is http www w3schools com xml xml_whatis asp The w3 group created the XM
182. d 314 static reports publishing 125 statistics across children calculated member template 72 straight line depreciation smart field 314 subqueries 279 sum smart field 315 sum of years depreciation smart field 315 SYBUNT smart field 315 T TABLE 243 tables data tab 63 database 16 field statistics 62 fields 62 joining 279 snapshot tables 86 template calculated member 69 test segment performance 200 test segmentations 188 The Information Edge data flow 4 getting started 8 navigating 10 overview 1 understanding 2 this month smart field 315 this year smart field 316 top or bottom list calculated member template 72 tree view 11 U understanding OLAP cubes 16 segmentation 21 smart fields 17 The Information Edge 2 Universal Source Connector 203 Access database wizard 226 Excel wizard 229 incremental refresh explained 255 incremental command text macros 256 time stamp date format 256 schema 241 XML editor accessing 221 using 222 universal source connector data marts adding 214 unlocking optional modules 13 USA ZIP distance smart field 316 users 136 V views 80 W Warehouse optional module adding data warehouses 260 explained 259 key values 260 warnings when processing data marts 59 X XML editor accessing 221 using 222 schema 241 Y year to date value calculated member template 73 3382 INDEX corporate headquarters Blackbaud Inc 2000 Daniel Islan
183. d Drive Charleston SC 29492 USA Web www blackbaud com Phone 1 843 216 6200 Fax 1 843 216 6100 support Review the Customer Support Guide for information about our online resources and support procedures Download the Customer Support Guide from our Web site s Support Overview www blackbaud com support support aspx documentation We welcome your comments and suggestions about our user guides and help files In the subject line of your email please include the product name and version number documentationcomments blackbaud com Academy Manager The Financial Edge Accounting for Nonprofits The Education Edge Education Administration The Raiser s Edge The Raiser s Edge Enterprise The Information Edge TheResearcher s Edge The Patron Edge The Patron Edge Online Blackbaud NetCommunity sales Contact us for more information about our products and services Email solutions blackbaud com Phone 1 800 443 9441 Fax 1 843 216 6111 2006 Blackbaud Inc international contacts Blackbaud Europe Ltd 38 Queen Street Glasgow G1 3DX Scotland Web www blackbaud co uk Email solutionsGblackbaud co uk support blackbaud co uk admin blackbaud co uk Support UK Local Rate 0845 658 8500 Support From Outside UK 44 0 141 575 0801 Phone 44 0 141 575 0000 Fax 44 0 141 575 0999 Blackbaud Pacific Pty Ltd ABN 73 095 925 170 Suite 4 561 577 Harris
184. d levels to summarized levels and serves as the drill down path for top down analysis Load See Extract Transform and Load ETL Processes on page 329 Measure A Numeric value that is of interest for analysis For example an OLAP cube may include gift amounts by month by appeal and by constituent The measure in this case is gift amount and each intersection of the three dimensions has a different gift amount value Member An item in a dimension that represents one or more occurrences of data Metadata Information about the properties of data such as business logic that describes the structure and content of dimensions and measures Multidimensional Analysis A way of analyzing data from the top down by examining measures simultaneously broken out by multiple dimensions Multidimensional Database A multidimensional database stores and processes data as three dimensional cubes instead of the flat rows and columns of traditional relational databases ODBC ODBC stands for Open database connectivity The Information Edge can extract data from some programs using an ODBC connection N 329 2 330 2 GLOSSARY OLAP OLAP online analytical processing is a type of data processing that enables you to easily and selectively extract and view data from different points of view To enable this kind of analysis OLAP data is stored in a multidimensional database Whereas a relational database can
185. d statistics enables you to determine whether a field is valid for further analysis based on its population For example if an Income field has only two distinct values or only includes a value for ten percent of your donors the field would probably not be useful for a function such as a marketing segmentation A distinct count is not available for fields that are not indexed If you do not specify to maintain field statistics while creating or editing a data mart the field type size and indexed information still appear on the Fields tab CONFIGURATION Data Tab The Data tab displays the individual records for each field in a selected data table To access this tab in Configuration select Tables You can then select an individual table and select the Data tab Dashboard export TIE Constituent ID RE Record ID BIO System ID Name RE Bio ID Key Indicator Constituent Co 192 192 192 Kathle 8 I Alumnus 193 193 193 Benjim 9 I Volunteer 194 194 194 Ellen H 10 I Friend 195 195 195 Zacher 11 I Friend 196 196 196 Autum 12 I Friend 197 197 197 Ryan 13 I Development S 198 198 198 Catlin 14 I Major Donor 199 199 199 Sean A 15 I Board Member 200 200 200 Nicole 16 I Friend 201 201 201 Antho 17 I Supporter Click Export in the action bar to export data from a table in character delimited XML or Excel format For more information about exporting see Creating an export definition on page 8
186. d who also live within a specified distance from the location of an event You can then target these donors with a specific appeal for the event As another example you can create a smart field using the Blackbaud RFM type that applies a score to your donors based on the recency frequency and monetary value of gifts You can then create a Decile type smart field based on the REM smart field that divides records into ten groups in ascending order from lowest score to highest If you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module you may then want to use this field in a segmentation to target each group with a specific type of mailing For more information about segmentation see Marketing Segmentation on page 171 Additionally you can create smart fields that evaluate specified conditions to determine a field entry You can establish these conditions using an Expression Wizard Smart fields can form the basis for WriteBacks to The Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge For more information about WriteBack see WriteBacks on page 118 Creating Smart Fields You can base new smart fields on a wide variety of types included in The Information Edge The criteria that determines which records are included in a smart field varies according to the type of smart field being created CONFIGURATION T gt Adding a smart field 1 On the tree view under the data mart for which you want to create a smart field right click Smar
187. define the records included in the selection And You can use the And button between criteria fields to indicate that records must meet both criteria to be selected For example if you use the field criteria Last Name equals to Smith And Constituency Code equals to Board Member the program locates all constituents whose last name is Smith AND who are board members The records selected have to meet both criteria to be included in the selection The default combining operator used in a selection is And CONFIGURATION Or Youcan use the Or button between fields to indicate records can meet either criteria to be selected For example if you use the field criteria Last Name equals to Smith Or Constituency Code equals to Board Member the program locates all constituents whose last name is Smith OR constituents with a constituency code of board member Parentheses You can use the parentheses buttons to make two pieces of a criteria a whole If you select the following criteria State equals South Carolina And Constituency Code equals Board Member Or Gift Amount greater than or equal to 1 000 the records selected must first have South Carolina as a value in the State field and must have either a constituent code of Board Member or a gift amount of 1000 or more In this case records must meet the first criteria and at least one of the criteria within the parentheses For more information about how selecti
188. der on the server If the path and folder do not exist on the server the publication fails If you are scheduling automatic processing of publications in the mart ensure the same path and folder exist on the server to enable the publication to process Dar CHAPTER 3 2 The publication automatically includes a menu html file This file serves as a central location with links to all the items you included in the publication Open the menu html file in your browser Z C Files HTMLPubsTIE menu html Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edt Vew Favertes Jod Heb cc QE A Qseach Fae Peete 3 b 3 B J rks gt information edge amp Pivot Tables Appeal Analysis Current Donor Charts Giving Analysis Giving by Distance Marketing Segmentations Constituency Luft chart Cumulative Response Rosport by Segment Atmount Pad by Segment E Done mf E My Computer 3 Click an item to view it in your browser E C Program Files HTMLPubs p1 html Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt O A Z QSeach 3jFavoies GMedia lt 4 B 5 fal 3 Links D ooo qu Blackbaud s The Information Edge Donor Level m Sees SS sao Drop Filter Fields Here GIFTS Count 100 80 504 APPEAL 40 20 A n A alld I Blank Gold Platinum Silver Donor level 7
189. dge Gift date is less than or equal to current fiscal year end date Gift pledge balance is greater than 0 OR Gift Type equals Pledge Pledge Balance equals 0 Gift date is less than or equal to current fiscal year end date Latest payment made within this fiscal year Last installment due greater than the last day of this fiscal year Timing Considerations Due to the way The Raiser s Edge handles dates when a pledge payment is received you should consider two things before running the Pledge Valuation analytic If a pledge payment was outstanding at fiscal year end but the donor paid off the installment or the entire balance after fiscal year end but before the queries and exports in the data mart were performed the results can be distorted because The Raiser s Edge does not differentiate between the date the payment is received and whether that payment was outstanding at the end of the fiscal year To handle this you can create a static query for constituents with outstanding pledges as well as a gift query for outstanding pledges at fiscal year end You need both these queries to ensure only the pledges for these constituents appear in your results because the constituent may have other long term gifts that are not applicable for this calculation A static query gives you a snapshot of what was outstanding as of the end of the fiscal year If necessary you can create the static query in advance and then using Queue in The Raise
190. dit the name type and index properties For this Field Source Name CallD ate Name CallD ate Data type DateTime I Field is indexed OK Cancel 12 You can change the Name or Data type and specify whether the field in indexed or not Indexing provides fast access to data in the rows of a table based on key values You may want to specify that certain fields are not indexed so the data mart will refresh faster CONFIGURATION 45 2 You may need to edit the Data Type for some fields For example when linking data from an Excel or CSV file The Information Edge makes assumptions about the data type of each field based on the first few rows If for example a field contains integers in the first few rows but includes strings in other rows an error will occur when the data mart is refreshed Other combinations of data types could also cause errors To avoid this for fields that include values of different types you must select a Data Type that includes all the values Click OK to return to the Fields screen 13 Click Next The Table Summary screen appears Table Properties x Table Summary Select Finish to add this table to the data mart Name tbICallLog Description Append fields to CONSTITUENT from Data source C Documents and Settings davidow Desktop ClientContact mdb Source table tblCallLog Create a cube based on this table lt Back Finish Cancel 1
191. diting the properties of an existing data mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you are creating a new data mart click Finish to install the data mart A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR _ 22 The Information Edge XML Editor The Universal Source Connector includes The Information Edge XML Editor to assist you in creating custom data marts The XML editor includes several key features Access Database Wizard this wizard enables you to create XML files from Access databases Excel Wizard this wizard enables you to create XML files from Excel spreadsheets OLEDB Data Source Wizard this wizard enables you to create XML files from any OLEDB source available to your computer Validator You can easily ensure that your XML conforms to The Information Edge schema Accessing the XML Editor You can access the The Information Edge XML Editor by clicking the Edit XML button on the Enter XML Data Mart Definition screen when installing a Universal Source Connector data mart Additionally because the XML Editor is a separate utility with its own executable file you can work in it independently of The Information Edge The executable is located in the bin folder of your Information Edge installation On your Windows taskbar right click on Start select Explore and browse to the Program Fil
192. ds of interacting with data Slicing means isolating a specific member of a dimension for analysis dicing means breaking a data set into smaller pieces by examining how measures intersect with multiple dimensions Smart Field Smart fields enable you to use SQL statements to create new fields that are then populated by your data and can be incorporated into your Pivot tables charts and data analyzer views For example if you have a table showing donations for constituents last year you can create a smart field that multiplies that entry by one point five to determine how much you hope to receive from each constituent this year This new field can then be used in Information Edge reports SQL Structured Query Language is an industry standard language for accessing data in a relational database management system Transform See Extract Transform and Load ETL Processes on page 329 WriteBack RE WriteBack enables you to send information from The Information Edge back to The Raiser s Edge by selecting a smart field value by which to group constituents static query is then created in The Raiser s Edge based on the smart field value you specified C AL 32 wy GLOSSARY Index A Access wizard explained 226 primary keys 229 accessing The Information Edge 8 Universal Source Connector XML editor 221 action bar 13 activating segmentations 193 adding calculated member 67 charts 158 custom
193. ds that do not meet the criteria when the smart field is first processed are reexamined each time the field is subsequently processed to determine if they now do meet the criteria and the value is reset accordingly If the checkbox is unmarked records that did not previously meet the criteria are ignored during subsequent processing Existing values remain the same on these records even if they now do meet the criteria CONFIGURATION 107 eo For example you may have a smart field based on total giving amount that you want to process only for constituents age 30 or over When you create a filter to do that and unmark the Reset values for records that do not meet this criteria checkbox if a constituent turns 30 between the time you first process the smart field and the next time you process it that constituent would still have the original value because the record is already flagged as not meeting the criteria and it is not processed If you mark the Reset values for records that do not meet this criteria checkbox all records are processed and values are reset for any constituents who were not previously 30 but who are now In almost all cases you will probably want to leave the checkbox marked It is generally only useful if you want to reduce processing time by maintaining archival information for certain records in specific smart fields 4 If you are creating a new smart field click Next to access the Advanced tab For mo
194. e Prefix custom_ Description Custom Source Options Maintain field statistics Include support for segmentation Help amp Bad Next gt Fns Cancel 2 Enter a name to display for this data mart in the tree view in the Name field Enter a prefix to display with each table entry for this warehouse in the Prefix field Enter text to describe the warehouse in The Information Edge console in the Description field p 216 CHAPTER 6 3 Mark the Maintain field statistics checkbox if you want to view information such as data type how many instances do and do not contain data and the number of different values for each field in the mart Tracking field statistics enables you to determine whether a field is valid for further analysis based on its population 4 If you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module you can mark the Include support for Segmentation checkbox so that the data mart is optimized for use with this module When you mark the checkbox a cube containing specific dimensions and measures for use with segmentations is created for the data mart These features enable you to easily create lift charts and views such as response percent by segment and cumulative response 5 If you are creating a new custom data mart click Next to access the USC Definition tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing data m
195. e BBIC AUTO PK field and set the TsIdentity property to True for another field to indicate that it should be used as the Primary Key for a table The field should be the last field in the list of fields for the table and it should not be included in the SELECT statement For example if you have three fields in a table the Primary Key should be the last field and only the first two should be included in the SELECT statement You may want to use concatenation to create a Primary Key For example you may want to concatenate First name Last name and Zip Code to achieve a unique value for the Primary Key UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 233 2 N Primary Key fields should contain data that does not change when the data is refreshed because several Information Edge functions such as Snapshot tables are dependant upon the Primary Key being the same forever C 234 2 CHAPTER 6 Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard You can use the Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard to easily pull data into the XML Editor from any OLEDB source available on your computer The wizard is available from the editor toolbar or Tools menu gt Creating a data mart with the OLEDB Data Source Wizard 1 From the Information Edge XML Editor Tools menu select OLEDB Wizard or from the toolbar click the OLEDB Wizard button a The Information Edge XML Editor File Tools Help au aA Tree Property View S Text view 2 lt
196. e Changed between 6 01 and 6 30 his Between This Month value is Gold Because this is also his latest change prior to 6 30 his As Of This Month value is also Gold Jane has no Date Changed that falls into the Between This Month criteria so the value is empty However she does have a change prior to 6 30 her initial value of Bronze on 5 30 so her As Of This Month value is set to Bronze Another point to consider in date processing is that the latest change in a period is always used So based on the following data Previous Value Value Date Changed Joe Smith Silver Gold 07 25 2005 Joe Smith Gold Platinum 07 30 2005 Processing on 7 31 would yield ID Name Between This Month As of This Month 1 Joe Smith Platinum Platinum Remember you can always enter a Sample process date to see how your selections will affect processing SMART FIELD DETAILS Net Present Value Category Financial What it Does A Net Present Value smart field calculates the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate When Would I use a Net Present Value Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the present value of an investment Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Net Present Value smart field you must specify the information that will determine the net present value of investments In the Interest rate field indicate the discount rate to apply to this investment In the
197. e Chart and selecting Field List Chart Field List Drag items to the Chart RE EXPRESS GIFTS Totals APPEAL CAMPAIGN E CAMPAIGN Constituent BIO GENDER 3 Constituent BIO GEMDER DATE 3 Year 3 Quarter E Month FUND 3 FUND TYPE 3 TYPE Category Area Chart Field List The information in this list originates from the OLAP cube created from the data mart you select when creating a Chart You can drag and drop fields from the list to quickly and efficiently populate a chart with data The information is displayed in a graphic format of your choosing Each field that originates from the OLAP cube lists with a plus sign next to the field Expand the field to select the actual field you want for your chart For example from the Totals field select AMOUNT for your report Add to You can use the Add to button as an alterative to dragging and dropping information from the Chart Field List Highlight a field select an area of the chart in the drop down and click Add to Chart Commands and Options You can access the Commands and Options tabs from the toolbar or by right clicking anywhere in a Chart and selecting Commands and Options from the shortcut menu that appears The Commands and Options screen consists of six tabs although the number of tabs may vary depending on the data and type of chart you are creating General Tab General BorderjFill D
198. e EXPRESS CONSTITUEN RE EXPRESS GIFTS LIRE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT Y Selections m B IE Grind s Select Remove Change andor On the Criteria tab you can select the criteria fields and enter criteria operators to determine which records to include in the selection 114 CHAPTER 3 ED 2 When you drag and drop a field from the Available fields box to the Apply these filters box the Define Criteria screen appears Eldeine critieria NE 0 BIO AGE 5 Less Than Or Equal To 3 Specify a condition and corresponding value to determine the records you want to include in your selection You can select from many different conditions to narrow your selections but not all of them are appropriate for every field For information about all the available conditions see Expression and Selection Wizard Conditions on page 84 You can also search for field values if you do not want to scroll through the dropdown for a field with numerous values For more information see Searching for selection criteria field values on page 116 Click OK to return to the Criteria tab where your condition now appears in the Apply these filters box 5 The And Or and Parentheses combining operators enable you to narrow your selection even further by combining multiple sets of filtering criteria to make one Combining operators provide a link between selected criteria and
199. e Gift count AmountGreater 100 APPEAL APPEAL Blackbaud_Non_Contributor CAMPAIGN Constituent BIO GENDER DATE FUND S PREF_ADDRESS_CITY AD 14 You can now click the down arrow beside PREF ADDRESS CITY and select individual cities for which you want to view the appeal gift information 15 Click Save in the toolbar You can perform a variety of functions with the Chart For example from the action bar you can click Save to Clipboard to create an image of the Chart you can paste into an e mail presentation or other file 16 To exit the Chart select another item in the tree view ANALYTICS Data Analyzer Views jfjNew X Delete Save Rename File Edit View Tools Help amp egBliBits e E NER APPEAL DATE Year 400K 600K 11999 396 NEWSLETTER LLL internet 9 Pc Letter 9 DIRECT MAIL B 2001 Phone i n NUALMAIL APPEAL When you have SQL Server Analysis Services you can use Data Analyzer as an alternative way to visualize data Data Analyzer is an advanced analysis application that enables you to graphically investigate the data in your database Data Analyzer displays multiple dimensions of your data cube in a dynamic customizable view Data Analyzer Views offer a variety of features to help analyze and share your data For example from a Data Analyzer View you can click the Export to PowerPoint button in the toolbar to save the vi
200. e Information Edge console in the Description field 4 Click Next Depending on the types of sources used to create your data mart different screens may appear at this point Follow the prompts on the screen that appears for the particular data mart you are installing 5 Click Next When you are done specifying properties for the data mart the Save Changes screen appears Install Data Mart x Save Changes Click Finish to complete the wizard Click Finish to save this data mat lt Back Finish _cancet 6 Click Finish to install the data mart Depending on the amount of data contained in the data mart the installation may take several minutes A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view Refreshing Data in Data Marts You can manually refresh the data in a data mart at any time On the Schedules tab of Configuration you can also establish a schedule for how often you want to automatically process refresh the data in the data mart In a data mart s properties you can select to process exports WriteBacks and Publications automatically each time the mart is refreshed You can also specify to compile field use statistics Additionally if you have the optional module Marketing Segmentation you can specify that segmentations be activated and updated when the data mart refreshes If for any reason any of these items fails during a data mart re
201. e Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition Eile Tools Help Gl AASB TreejProperty View S Text view 2 web view IEEE EE lt BIPACKAGE gt tbiCallLog tblContacts tblOrganizations tblReports tblResources tblResults tblSourceOf Contact tblTopics New XML definition FieldSet Collection ID table tblOrganizations Name tblOrganizations PrimaryKey tblOrganizations OrglId field RE TableType None SourceSet Collection Remove Auto assign table ID Auto assign all field IDs Name The name of the SQL Server table to create Now you can build the cubes that will make up your data mart A 228 CHAPTER 6 You can also add a collection of cubes by clicking the ellipses in the Cubes row of the data grid on the right 5 In the tree view select lt BIPACKAGE gt 2 The Information Edge XML Editor Usability xml File Tools Help Ha AaB EY Tree Property view E Text view 2 web view Cubes Collection m tblCallLog Description created by BBNT davidow 0 EE SegmentationInfo None tblOrganizations Tables Collection tblReports Version 1 tblResources tblResults tblSourceOfContact tblTopics The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart C Documents and Settings davidow Desktop Usabilit
202. e Show Hide tab you can specify the items that appear on the chart by default items that users of the chart can view and whether you want to see passive alerts in error situations such as when a database connection fails When you display passive alerts you can click the exclamation icon to view more information about the error For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help gt Adding a new Chart ea Your organization wants to analyze the status of certain aspects of your appeals You want to view the total number and amount of each gift type given to each appeal Furthermore you want to filter this information by city to see if you should concentrate any special events or other appeals in certain geographic areas You have already created an RE Express data mart containing a cube based on gift information from your Raiser s Edge database You will now create a chart that enables you to effectively analyze this information 1 From the Analytics tree view select a data mart created with the default export fields in RE Express 2 Click Reports in the tree view Click New Chart on the action bar The Report Wizard appears on the General tab 4 In the Data Source field select the cube on which you want to base the chart For this example select the GIFTS cube Enter a name for the Chart and optionally a description 6 Specify whether you want other users to be able to view
203. e VarChar 255 Yes No No BIO ID ID VarChar 20 Yes No No BIO KEY INDICATOR Key Indicator VarChar 1 Yes No No BIO CONSTIT CODE Constituent Code VarChar 100 Yes No No BIO GENDER Gender VarChar 255 Yes No No BIO AGE Age Int 10 0 Yes No No PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE1 Preferred Addr varChar 150 No No No PREF_ADDRESS_ADDRLINE2 Preferred Addr VarChar 150 No No No PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 Preferred Addr VarChar 150 No No No PREF ADDRESS CITY Preferred Addr YarChar 50 Yes No No PREF_ADDRESS_STATE Preferred Addr VarChar 3 Yes No No PREF_ADDRESS_ZIP Preferred Addr VarChar 10 Yes No No Concat Concat Test VarChar 255 Yes No Yes SmartField 2 SmartField 2 Money 19 4 Yes No Yes CurrentDonor Current Donor VarChar 255 Yes No Yes RFM RFM Int 10 0 Yes No Yes DecileRFM DecileRFM Int 10 0 Yes No Yes Field Statistics When you mark the Maintain field statistics checkbox on the Data Mart Properties screen while creating or editing a data mart the Fields tab shows additional detail information for each table To view all the For each field in the selected table you can view information such as the data type available statistics how many instances do and do not contain data the number of different values in right click on any column the field and the percentage of instances that are populated with data For heading non text fields you can view the minimum and maximum entry Statistics cannot be added to the Dashboard Tracking fiel
204. e ae aoe aa aed MA UST RR LR WRG Filtering Segmentations 0 0c eee eee eee eee Budget BXpenses ess opp ete DR eDRRER eden cae taae Pea eU Ue e S Jynnssl d PPP Test Segments and Test Segmentations eeeeee Custom Properties 4 2 00 v o rer Re o Tr REV S TOR IE Activating Segmentations 0 ccc cece cece cece ee e nnn Exporting Segmentations 00 c ccc cece cece eee eene Importing Segmentations Into The Raiser s Edge Notes About Importing Appeal Comments 00 4 Analyzing Segmentations 0 cece e cece cece cece cece eens Lift Charts 5c rw nas des det eee en SU aH EE idee Cumulative Response 0 0 0 0 0 cece ence eens Response By Segment siema E eee een ees Amount Raised By Segment 000 eee eens Test Segment Performance 2 0 cece eee ee eee Procedures Adding a segmentation 20 0 cece eee ence eens Completing the Segmentation General tab 0 00004 Generating segments by selection 0 00 cee eee eee Generating segments by field 0 0 0 00 eee eee Adding or editing individual segments 0 0 00 eee eee eee Completing the Segmentation Filter tab 0 0 0 0 000004 Completing the Segmentation Budget Expenses tab Completing the Segmentation Packages tab 0 0 00005 Completing the Segmentation Properties
205. e been established you can use the new Drillthrough wizard to set up the drillthrough fields UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR Drillthrough Field Wizard The set of fields in this wizard is pulled from the list of fields for the fact table and any tables related to the fact table as specified by the lt JOINKEY gt elements on the cube Selecting a field automatically establishes the appropriate lt DRILLTHROUGHJOINKEY gt elements a Cube Drillthrough Fields Wizard x The fields below include all fields currently defined in the XML for the fact table and related tables Select the fields to include in a drillthrough operation From the pivot table V GIFTS RERecordID GIFTS GiftID GIFTS ConstituentID GIFTS Type GIFTS Amount GIFTS GiftDate GIFTS FundID GIFTS CampaignID GIFTS AppealID GIFTS PackageID GIFTS PaymentMethod K K S S Mone c To access the wizard select a cube in the XML Editor tree view and click the Drillthrough Fields Wizard link on the right Friendly Name Support All FIELDSET MEASURE and DIMENSION elements now support a FriendlyName attribute in support of the 1 7 View Friendly Names feature Support for Additional SQL Data Types The USC now supports the uniqueidentifier tinyint real and timestamp SQL data types Timestamp maps to varbinary 8 in the destination table The other types map to their
206. e can be used If you specify this as true then you must also specify a IDsChangedSQL attribute in the Incremental attributes FastLoadBatchSize This attribute specifies the number of rows to insert in a single batch The default is 10 000 a value of 0 means to insert all rows in one batch We recommend you thoroughly test that any change from the default to make sure it provides a benefit UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR Attributes ConnectionString Comments The provider specific connection string used to connect to the source provider data source You can use the Connection String Wizard to help create connection strings for certain SQL Server data sources For more information see Creating a data mart with the SQL Server Wizard on page 237 Many connection string examples are available at Www connectionstrings com If you use a ConnectionType that specifies an OLEDB source you can click the ellipses to access the Data Link Properties screen to help you define the connection string For more information click Help on the Data Link Properties screen ConnectionType The type of NET data provider to use for the connection to the source data the sourceCommand Enum value specifies data source OLEDB ODBC Oracle etc If you select a ConnectionType of BIDataSourceCmd and also specify an incremental refresh the data source must not be set to UseOpenRowSet To turn
207. e content of the field you can right click and select a parameter You can similarly include parameters in statements on the Filters tab E Smart Field Wizard onstituen O Fields 4 Global Parameters gt Ds Smart Fields gt Insert a Subquery Undo Select All On other types of smart fields when you specify criteria parameters are available along with fields in dropdowns Parameters are indicated by the symbol at the beginning and surrounded by brackets Smart Field Wizard gt Creating a parameter 1 In the Configuration tree view click the plus sign beside the data mart from which you want to create a Parameter Right click on Parameters and select New The Parameter Wizard screen opens to the General tab E Parameter Wizard mi xi General Expression Name finterest Rate Description This parameter derives its value From the Following table z 2 Enter a Name and optionally a Description for the parameter The name cannot contain spaces or any other punctuation 3 If you want the parameter to only be available when a certain table has been selected in a smart field s properties mark the This parameter derives its value from the following table checkbox and specify the table If you do not mark the checkbox the parameter will be global and available from any smart field I Constituen m Global Parameters gt Fields Sm
208. e database To find the TNS name look in your Oracle installation tnsnames ora file Click Test DB Connection to attempt to connect to the database using the settings you specified If the connection is successful proceed to step 14 of this procedure If it is not successful double check the connection parameter information you entered Click Test API Connection to connect with The Raiser s Edge through its Application Program Interface API This connection verifies that your Raiser s Edge client is set up properly to interact with The Information Edge 133 7 4 134 72 CHAPTER 3 13 Click Next The Name screen appears Data Source Wizard The Raiser s Edge 7 Sample Database x Name You must choose a name for your Data Source in this step Data Source Name The Raiser s Edge 7 Sample Database The name you choose cannot be used by any other Data Source M Use OPENROWSET for fast access to this data source Back Erish Cancel 14 Enter a Data Source Name This name cannot be used by any other source and displays on the Defined Data Sources screen in The Information Edge 15 Mark the Use OPENROWSET for fast access to the data source checkbox to enable faster processing of the source data OPENROWSET includes all the connection information necessary to access remote data from a specific source To increase the speed of data access we recommend you mark this checkbox I
209. e eee 8 s 299 WAGON MCC mMTM 302 Latest Gut scii REL ch eine oS 2 were Per OL RRS 302 E PET 302 LYBUNT je 94 SSR REDE IE RE ERR NU ERES TR ER e ERST 302 MA xImuln 23s mk eee ets ee ER SER EERU seam EEG SER ENS er 303 Medlanzcol ee te ener i eRCUPRFeRrC PUEROS ERRELE LI ENEE EE Y 303 MIMU os 52 5 999 n RUPES SU EVEN MO VE SEV AEN EN RS 303 hnnc DEDIT 303 Monitored Field Query cc ccc ccc ce cece cece cece eee ecsceees 304 Monitored Field Query Date Processing 0 0 c ee eee eee 305 Calendar vs Relative to Process Date 0 0 nnana 305 Between VS AS OP csse ec d lena a reve pesce bob ere Rb anew s 306 Net Present Value eee mere me ERES REPRE S S E Saw oli 307 lt x x e Q Q Q lt 266 APPENDIX A Non Contributor ccsiece sien cies ose 058 hn rhe hrec e n tr 307 Number of Periods o eee A 8510 Rhe ru ex HG s Fes VE ES EN 307 Payment on Principal 0 ccc ccc cece ee ce cece eeeee 308 Percentile ove Cider ns hb oa ae RE PUR ERN Y weed ened EE 309 Periodic Payment cece coe heh rr pete cece h hse sees 309 Pledge Valuation 2c cc ccc cece c reece cere cece eee nnn 309 Present Value 2 2 69 des ema RR ee UR Rbs erra RR EENEN ENAKA 311 Quarti Dee hRPC eR PCR ENDE DEAN NI DR ER E E RE NR 312 enn ulcer EPETTTTTTST 312 REM 5a wh epa ua FRE FERE RARE YA RS oe RR Ee 312 Search and Replace
210. e files and whether the files will be contained in one or more folders If you select Single File several fields appear Dutput type Single file hed Dutput path C Mfiles C3 File name R E EXPRESS SEGMENTATION DATA csv Sample path C MilesxRE EXPRESS SEGMENTATION DATA csv CONFIGURATION Use the Browse button to enter the Output path where you want to save the export Specify a File Name for the export 4 If you select an Output type of Multiple Files several fields appear Dutput type Multiple files Dutput path C Mfiles TIEE sport Fiel APPEAL O m3 This export will create 26 files File prefix o Sample path C filesNTIEE xpor 2000BREAKFAST csv C Miles TIEExport 2000DIRECT csv 5 Use the Browse button to enter the Output path where you want to save the export Select the Field that will be used to generate the export files The values in this field determine the export files that are created Each file will contain the information you select on the Columns tab of the Export Definition screen For example on the Columns tab you can select the Gifts table and specify to include the Type Amount and Date fields Then on the Export Options tab you can select Appeal as the Field This results in a separate export file being created for each appeal that lists the types amounts and dates for gifts given to that particular appeal You can also optionally specify
211. e in the report Use the data to create the report as you would any Crystal Report For more information about creating Crystal Reports see your Crystal Reports documentation Save the report If you try to access The Information Edge before closing Crystal Reports the Switch to Process screen appears Switch to Process Business Intelligence Center has shelled out to Crystal Report Writer Close Crystal Report Writer to return to this application and import the report Switch to Crystal Return to Application 5 Click Switch to Crystal and close Crystal Reports If you click Return to Application your report is not imported into The Information Edge at this time You can manually import the report later c ANALYTICS 167 6 After closing Crystal Reports you return to the console and the Import Custom Crystal Report screen appears Import Custom Crystal Report x Select Crystal Report Select a Crystal Report File to import into the database and pick a name to use For the report Select file CAFilesvbb 243288361 1 Jt Name Recent Giving History Description This report shows recent giving history of several groups of donors OK Cancel 7 The new report automatically appears in the Select file field 8 Enter a Name and Description for the report This information will help you identify the report in The Information Edge 9 Click OK You return to the console wh
212. e is one that is new deleted or has a changed timestamp on any of the following tables related to it RECORDS table which would include both BIO or ORG info and related items such as notepads and phones Related GIFT records Related Events Participation records Related Action records Related Membership records So for example if you change an attribute on a GIFT record that causes the GIFTs timestamp to be updated Therefore The Information Edge considers the Constituent to be changed and brings the latest version over to the data mart as part of an incremental update When The Information Edge detects any of these changes it brings over all the selected information for the Constituent not just the piece that changed The end result is that the current view of the Constituent in The Information Edge is synchronized with the current view of the Constituent in The Raiser s Edge N L 32 2 CHAPTER 3 Cu You can optimize the speed of your data by using smart fields to perform operations such as first gift and last gift after you create the data mart rather than including them in the export from The Raiser s Edge gt Completing the RE Express Export Definition tab When installing an RE Express data mart you must define a Raiser s Edge export file on which the data mart data is based For more information about creating exports see the Export chapter of the The Raiser s Ed
213. e lets you analyze data in a custom format similar to Microsoft s Excel Using the Microsoft Office Pivot Table Component included with The Information Edge you can view and organize information and look for details within your data Refresh Rate How often data is updated Relational Database A relational database consists of data organized as a set of tables The data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without changing the organization of the tables Most databases that support the day to day operations of an organization are relational databases GLOSSARY Segmentation A data mining technique that analyzes data to discover mutually exclusive collections of records that share similar attribute sets For example you can generate segments based on the recency frequency and monetary value of gifts and then create different mailings based on this information Segmentation enables you to group donors on the basis of characteristics such as demographic geographic recent giving history and wealth Different segments often have different or unique needs Segmentation helps the effectiveness of your fundraising because certain segments may represent more attractive or attainable donors than others and because different segments often require customized mail appeals Sibling A member that is at the same level as one or more other members sharing the same parent Slicing and Dicing Two complementary metho
214. e of the fact table on which the cube is based You can select any numeric Field from this table on which to base your new measure All available fields with a numeric entry are available in the Field dropdown This selection determines what you are measuring in the newly created measure 4 In the Settings frame indicate how you want the measure to display in the Name field Select a method for gathering the new measure quantity in the Aggregate field Select from Count DistintCount Max Min and Sum For example you may select GIFTS AMOUNT as the numeric field and Sum as the aggregation method to supply a measure that displays the total of all gift amounts 5 Click OK You return to the console The new measure appears in the right pane Adding Calculated Members Calculated members are special types of measures that are not stored in the database rather they are instead calculated on the fly Calculated members are determined by other members values You can add calculated members using a wizard included in The Information Edge The wizard assists you in writing the multidimensional expressions that create calculated members Multidimensional expressions are a syntax used for defining multidimensional objects and querying and manipulating multidimensional data To learn more about multidimensional expressions see your SQL Server Books Online documentation You can use the wizard to create calculated members that are
215. e output should be and the result may not be what you intended For example if you use the following SQL expression in a Parameter SQL Server would attempt to output the result as an Integer CASE WHEN 1 gt 0 THEN test ELSE 0 END In this case test is a string and 0 is an Integer If the string is returned it may cause data type errors in a smart field that uses the parameter CONFIGURATION 79 7 E 80 2 CHAPTER 3 Dependency checking is not available for Views that extend across multiple data marts For more information see Dependencies on page 21 Views Views enable you to focus on specific data that is of interest to you and on specific tasks for which you are responsible Views are database objects that can be referenced the same way as a table You create views by specifying these objects in a SQL statement The Query Wizard is available to help you create the SQL statements that define Views For more information see Expression Wizard on page 83 You can define frequently used statements and subqueries as views This means your users do not have to specify all the conditions and qualifications each time an additional operation is performed on that data For example a complex query with subqueries that retrieves data from a group of tables can be added as a single View The View simplifies access to the data because the underlying query does not have
216. e plus sign beside Cubes under the data mart containing the cube for which you want to add a dimension 2 Right click on the cube and select New Dimension The New Cube Dimension screen appears New Cube Dimension Eg Dimensions Dimensions allow you to categorize data in a hierarchical manner optimized For analysis Once a dimension has been created it may be employed as an aggregate on the pivot chart and data analyzer views m Data Source Select a table and field from the dropdowns below that will serve as the source data for your dimension Table RE ExPRESS GIFTS Field APPEAL v Settings Name APPEAL Parent None z Select a Parent Dimension if you would like to include this dimension as a sub category of a higherlevel dimension for example City is a common sub category under State or Province DK Cancel 3 Inthe Data Source frame select the Table from which the source data for the dimension will come Select a Field from the table Ph CHAPTER 3 4 Inthe Settings frame enter a Name for the dimension This name appears in the console and in reports If you want the new dimension to be a sub category of an existing dimension select the existing dimension in the Parent field For example Year Quarter and Month can be subdimensions of the parent dimension Date Click OK to save your new dimension You return to the console The
217. e target table to which you are appending it If your source data is a CSV or Excel file the First row contains field names checkbox is available You can mark the checkbox to indicate that the first row of the file contains the names of fields rather than data Select the Source table from which you want to add data to the mart and the Key field from the source table you want to use link with the target table in the mart The key field is a field in both tables that share the same value It is the common value that links the two tables Select the Target table in the data mart to which you want to append the data from the new table and specify the Key field If an Excel spreadsheet data source contains named ranges they appear as tables in the Source table field ED CHAPTER 3 10 Click Next The Fields screen appears Table Properties x Fields You can modify the data type and indexing properties For the Fields listed below Contactld Int Yes CallDate DateTime No Resourceld Int Yes Resultsld Int Yes Comments NV arChar 255 Yes NotesLink NText Yes BIZINTEL_ID Int Yes x5 Reload Fields Add gt lt Remove f Properties lt Back Next gt Cancel 11 You can add or remove fields so they are not included in the data mart Additionally when you select a field and click Properties the Edit Field Properties screen appears Field Properties x Edit Field Properties E
218. e tree view select lt BIPACKAGE gt 2 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help ASE I x d peenem Text View 2 web view Jj lt BIPACKAGE gt Cubes Collection asd l CallLaq Description created by BBNT davidow 0 Contacts SegmentationInfo None E Organizations Tables Collection E Results Version 1 Cubes The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart New XML definition 8 Select Add Cube on the right The new cube appears in the tree view 9 Select the new cube in the tree view and the properties for it become available on the right Commands Collection Dimensions Collection DrillThroughFields Collection DrillThroughJoinKeys Collection FactTable JoinKeys Collection Measures Collection Name Cube 1 SourceTableFilters Collection Remove Name The name of the Analysis Services Cube to create 10 Specify the properties for the cube For more information about these properties see CUBE on page 251 11 When you are finished creating your XML file select File Save as from the menu bar and specify the name of your file and the location where you want to save it 12 You can now access this file from the USC Definition tab when you add a custom data mart For more information see Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart on page 215
219. ea ho ERR RUE ERI AT ERA DEG ee Grouping Items with Folders lille lees Friendly Names 2 2 0 0 cece ehh Changing Grid Displays 0 es Dashboards ccsa 32 eas rea oe debe RUE IE a Ehe Se ee ABIES i odere UR eee ded habe da ewe teste UR Rota eR edd heme Understanding Cubes 0 0 0 0 0c cece eh Understanding Smart Fields 0 2 0 0 0 cece eee Sending Data to The Raiser s Edge With WriteBack Exporting Data From The Information Edge 00 00 0005 Publications so cecce seda sehr b EE RI AIR eta eda Een RE eae Understanding Segmentation 00 ees Dependencles 2 2 9 0 9 n rh Tar oTr EENE IEFON RE PSPICPS N Q m Q 4 ic O 8 4 CHAPTER 2 You must have administrative rights to access Configuration If you do not have administrative rights Configuration does not appear on the navigation bar For a basic overview of the features in The Information Edge see the following section Information Edge Quick Start After you become acquainted with the features detailed information is provided for each of them in separate sections later in this guide Information Edge Quick Start The Information Edge is designed to give you the ability to easily analyze all data affecting your fundraising efforts To help you quickly understand the basics of The Information Edge and how to navigate in it use the following quick start section
220. ed automatically For more information about these fields see BIZINTEL IDs in FE Express Data Marts on page 57 N PE CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the FE Express General tab 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the General tab E New Data Mart L Raiser s Edge Source Additional Tables Publications General Export Definition Cube Options Name FE Express Prefix FE_EXPRE SS 1 Description FE Express Dptions Maintain field statistics Back Next gt Cancel Help Fns 2 Enter a name to display for this data mart in the tree view in the Data Mart Name field Enter a prefix to display with each table entry for this data mart in the Table Prefix field Enter text to describe the data mart in The Information Edge console in the Description field 3 Mark the Maintain field statistics checkbox if you want to view information such as data type how many instances do and do not contain data and the number of different values for each field in the data mart Tracking field statistics enables you to determine whether a field is valid for further analysis based on its population 4 If you are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Export Definition tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURA
221. ed by your analytical reports You can also export data in character delimited or XML formats OVERVIEW Additionally data can flow in both directions because you can create Raiser s Edge queries based on data gathered by The Information Edge For example in The Information Edge you can create a segmentation to show your best constituent prospects for a mailing based on recency frequency and monetary amounts of giving You can then use the WriteBack feature of The Information Edge to create a query in The Raiser s Edge that groups these constituents Additionally you can use WriteBacks to add specific attribute values to all or selected Raiser s Edge records Getting Started With The Information Edge For information about installing The Information Edge see the Installation Guide To learn more about the features of the The Information Edge and how to use them see Information Edge Quick Start on page 8 If at any time you encounter an unfamiliar term while reading this guide see the Glossary on page 327 3 CHAPTER 1 Getting Started with The Information Edge Contents Information Edge Quick Start 0 cece cece cece cece e ee eeee Accessing The Information Edge 0 2 0 0 00 Adding a Data Mart coes cene ia saeni aa e EAEE EA hn Analytics ecra cat how Ue eR RIT HIR EE SER EE EN e RR A Re aa Navigating in The Information Edge llllselelelleeeleees Tree VieW oe oils cd
222. ed on the results of the data set produced by the CommandText SQL statement For each row in the result set the USC would delete the corresponding row in the destination table and then re insert all the data Now you can specify a SQL statement that returns the set of IDs that have been changed from the standpoint of the incremental timestamp and USC will delete all these rows in a single statement This helps improve the performance of incremental processing and is required when using the FastLoad True attribute to bulk load during an incremental refresh The form of the SQL statement will typically match the FROM and WHERE clause of the CommandText that is configured for incremental processing but will specify only the ID column in the select statement For example if the CommandText is SELECT ID FIRST NAME LAST NAME FROM DBO RECORDS WHERE RECORDS IS CONSTITUENT 1 AND RECORDS DECEASED 0 AND RECORDS DATE LAST CHANGED BETWEEN LASTENDPOINT AND GGCURRENTENDPOINT then the IDOnlySQL should be SELECT ID FROM DBO RECORDS WHERE RECORDS IS CONSTITUENT 1 AND RECORDS DECEASED 0 AND RECORDS DATE LAST CHANGED BETWEEN LASTENDPOINT AND CURRENTENDPOINT Note that the only difference is in the SELECT clause In more complicated Command
223. ee eee baa ew eR Cr eae 240 XML Schema Reference euer cde over Ee OE Ree eer e 241 BIPACKAGE 242 TABLE discs pte aheb pce eon ede a ed een toe cen p o be 243 CUBE recom srei eias i tiet a is ea Heat ws pee decal duda deo qu 251 SEGMENTATIONINFO 0 0 00 cece cence ences 254 Macros ERR 254 Indexing Fields 0 ccc ccc cee ence Ih hn 255 Incremental Refresh in Universal Source Connector Data Marts 255 Time Date Stamp Format Characters llle eee eee 256 Incremental Command Text Macros and Examples 256 Procedures Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart 0 215 Completing the Universal Source Connector General tab 215 Completing the Universal Source Connector Refresh Options tab 216 Completing the Universal Source Connector USC Definition tab 218 Completing the Universal Source Connector Publications tab 220 Creating an XML file in the XML editor 0 0 0 00 000004 222 Creating a data mart from an Access database 20 00 cee ee 226 Ke Q m Q 4 ic O 4204 220 CHAPTER 6 Creating a data mart from an Excel spreadsheet llle Creating a data mart with the OLEDB Data Source Wizard Creating a data mart with the SQL Server Wizard 0 0 UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR The Universal
224. egment to be included in it In the Code Value field enter the value that will appear in the table for records included in this segment Click OK You return to the Criteria tab The segment you created appears in the Input parameters box To create additional segments click Add again For example you can add other segments using the following parameters SMART FIELD DETAILS 0 6 Months 2 Gifts 10 14 99 0 6 Months 1 Gift 15 24 99 0 6 Months 2 Gifts 15 24 99 0 6 Months 1 Gift 25 49 99 0 6 Months 2 Gifts 25 49 99 0 6 Months 1 Gift 50 99 99 0 6 Months 2 Gifts 50 99 99 You can also add similar frequency and monetary parameters for 7 12 months 13 24 months and 25 36 months Date Interval Category Miscellaneous What it Does A Date Interval smart field determines how many days weeks months or years have elapsed between two dates When Would I use a Date Interval Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the number of days weeks months or years between two dates For example you may have created n th Item smart fields to find the second to last and last gifts and you could use a Date Interval smart field to determine the interval between the two Or if you have First Gift and Latest Gift smart fields you may want to use a Date Interval field to learn the number of weeks between them Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Date Interval smart field you must establish
225. egular and irregular pledges You must indicate whether a pledge is irregular in The Raiser s Edge gift record using the Frequency field an attribute or some other means You can then use the Pledge Valuation smart field in conjunction with several other smart fields to determine the value of your pledges A309 310 7 APPENDIX A A d Regular pledges are those with the first installment scheduled for sometime this year with other installments equally spaced over time Irregular pledges have varying intervals of time between payments or are promised to pay in greater than one year with no payments in between Regular and irregular pledges are computed in The Information Edge using two different calculations An Information Edge analytic is available that consists of several smart fields and other components that enable you to determine the value of your pledges For more information see Pledge Valuation Analytic on page 320 You can order the analytic by contacting TIEsupport blackbaud com When Would I use a Pledge Valuation Smart Field Use this smart field to determine the value of long term pledges Long term pledges are pledges paid over a period of time greater than one year The donor may promise to pay a large gift in installments over multiple years or pay a large amount sometime in the future A pledge must be valued and reported on the balance sheet at its net present value if a clear record of an intentio
226. ems Always display Empty rows Empty columns Iv Calculated items IV ScreenTips On the Report tab you can establish various settings for the report such as how you want to display totals and whether you want to display empty rows and columns For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the Pivot Table and select Help PP n Cou d T 148 2 CHAPTER 4 Behavior Tab Captions Report Behaviour Hide Show elements v Expand indicator v Title bar v Drop areas v Toolbar General options Expand items by default automatic Expand details by default automatic l Auto fit the control Maximum height zo pixels Maximum width Beo pixels T Display right to left On the Behavior tab you can specify which elements are visible on the report and set general behavior such as how items expand For example if you are going to publish the report to an HTML page you may want to unmark the Drop areas and Toolbar checkboxes so those items do not appear on the page For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the Pivot Table and select Help gt Adding a new Pivot Table a Your organization is considering adding several new appeals this year with the intent of increasing donations from female constituents Before adding the appeals you want to analyze gift total amount given by gender for the last five years You also want to view the success o
227. en one or two or more gifts of a certain amount in the last three months You may then want to use this information to target specific segments with different mailings Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Custom RFM smart field you must specify the date and amount ranges you will use to group your donors For more information see the following procedure SMART FIELD DETAILS 29 2 Cc gt Adding Custom RFM smart field criteria For this procedure we will create a Custom RFM smart field that segments donors based on a recency of several ranges a frequency of one or two or more gifts and several ranges of monetary values 1 When creating a Custom RFM smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x Advanced Available date fields ae 10 0 1 0 gl Available amount fields omm o Input parameters Description ee e Add Remove I Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 2 From the Available date fields dropdown select the date field which will be used to determine recency scores in this smart field 3 From the Available amount fields dropdown select the gift amount field which will determine the monetary amounts portion of the Custom RFM score 202 7 APPENDIX A 4 This Input parameters frame lists segments you create to group your donors To create the first segment click Add The Criteria screen appears Properties Lx Criteria
228. enter a multidimensional expression in the MDX Expression box 6 If you select an expression type other than MDX additional fields appear in the Parameters frame to help you build an expression to create the calculated member As you make selections in the Parameters frame the expression is created in the MDX Expression box Several types of calculated member templates are available in the wizard The available templates depend on the types of fields in the cube for which you are creating the member For information about each template see Calculated Member Templates on page 69 After you establish parameters to build your expression you can click Check Syntax to ensure the validity of the statement Click OK You return to the Add New Calculated Member screen The expression created in the wizard appears in the MDX Expression box Add New Calculated Member x Calculated Members Calculated members are expressions that are calculated dynamically during queries from Pivot Tables and Charts Enter the MDX expression that defines the calculation in the space provided or use an expression wizard template M MDX Expression iif lsEmpty Measures GIFTS Count OR FUND Curent ember Level Ordinal O NULL Rank FUND CurrentMember Order Filter FUND Current ember Parent Children NOT IsEmpty Measures GIFTS Count Measures GIFTS Count DESC Expression Wizard
229. enter that information here Select the numeric values you want to measure in the Include these calculated members in gift cubes box If you decide not to include some of these at this time you can add them later in The Information Edge console If you are creating a new data mart click Next The Additional Tables tab appears For more information about adding data from other tables to an RE Express data mart see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION 37 Cua gt Completing the RE Express Additional Tables tab 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the Additional Tables tab General Refresh Options Export Definition Cube Options Additional Tables Publications 3FjAdd XRemove E Properties Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 To add a new data source click Add The Create Table or Append Data screen appears For information about how to complete the Create Table or Append Data screens see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 3 When you complete the Create Table or Append Data screens and return to the Additional Tables tab Name and Type of the additional data source appears 4 If you are creating a new data m
230. ents or processing SegmentationInfo None instructions you add to your Tables Collection file in Text View or in Version 1 another editor are disregarded by The Information Edge XML Editor For example if you add a comment in Text View then select another view when you return to Text View the comment does not appear Add Table 4 Cubes The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart New XML definition 7 3 The new table appears in the tree view on the left When you select the table the data grid on the right changes to show the features for your new table FieldSet Collection ID Name TABLE_1 PrimaryKey RE7TableType None SourceSet Collection Remove Auto assign table ID Auto assign all field IDs Name The name of the SQL Server table to create 4 To learn more about the items in this grid see TABLE on page 243 5 You can click links to Auto assign table ID and Auto assign all field IDs Before using these options you should define your table and field names because the IDs will be based on those names and will be available in several dropdowns in other areas of the editor E CHAPTER 6 6 You can also add collections of tables at the same time Select BIPACKAGE in the tree view In the right pane select the Tables row 2 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help
231. ere the new report appears on the Custom Crystal Reports page You can open the report in Crystal Reports from this page or view the report designer in The Information Edge shell gt Importing a custom Crystal Report 1 From the Analytics tree view select the data mart containing the data you want to include in a custom Crystal Report 2 Select Reports in the tree view and click New Import Crystal Report on the action bar The Import Custom Crystal Report screen appears Import Custom Crystal Report x Select Crystal Report Select a Crystal Report file to import into the database and pick a name to use for the report Select file CAFilesvbb 243288361 1 ipt m Name Recent Giving History Description This report shows recent giving history of several groups of donors OK Cancel 3 Browse to the location of the Crystal Report you want to import and select it The report file appears in the Select file field 168 CHAPTER 4 4 Enter a Name and Description for the report This information will help you identify the report in The Information Edge 5 Click OK You return to the console where the new report appears on the Custom Crystal Reports page You can open the report in Crystal Reports from this page or view the report designer in The Information Edge shell Copying Reports Sometimes you may want to use an existing report as the basis for a new one In this case you ca
232. es Blackbaud The Information Edge in folder or the location where you installed The Information Edge and double click XMLEdit exe The Information Edge XML Editor screen appears E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tools Help a lid v Aag Text view 2 Web View Cubes Collection B Description created by BBNT davidow 0 SegmentationInfo None Tables Collection Version 1 Add Table Add Cube Cubes The set of table definitions For the cubes that will be created in your data mart New XML definition Z 222 2 CHAPTER 6 ra The XML in your files must be well formed meaning it must comply with constraints such as the correct use of markup syntax Using The Information Edge XML Editor When creating XML files to define data marts a key point to consider is that the XML must conform to the BIPACKAGEDEFINITION XSD schema included with The Information Edge and available in the The Information Edge BIN folder When you create an XML file using The Information Edge XML Editor the schema supplied with The Information Edge is automatically attached to the file and used to verify that each item of content in your XML file adheres to the description of the element in which the content is to be placed The XML is validated against this schema gt Creating an XML file in the XML editor 1 From The Information Edge XML
233. es stored in the Constituents table are available in the dropdown Select a field and specify the Value of that field on which you want to filter Only records with this value are included in the segmentation 5 Mark the Select records based on expression option if you want to use a SQL expression to filter records Right clicking in the box shows the available Tables those containing the known constituent ID You can then select fields from a table You can also enter text directly in the box You can also use the Expression wizard to create your SQL expression To access the wizard click the button on the top right of the box a On the Select Field screen select the field for which you want to create an expression All fields in the selected table including any other smart fields you have already created are available b Click Next The Select Condition screen appears Select a Condition and specify the Values for that condition The available values vary depending on the selected condition c Click Finish You return to the Segmentation Filter screen where your expression appears in the box Only records meeting the criteria of your expression will be included in the segmentation You can click the Validate the Expression button to ensure your expression is a valid SQL statement 6 Toexclude any records that are included in another segmentation select a The filters you apply previously activated segmentation from the dropdown
234. es to index fields if you do not want to index a field you must explicitly say so by setting the noIndex property to true For example please note that the actual code would not have a line break lt FIELD name Addri dataType VarChar size 100 id Addrl id noIndex true gt We recommend you set noIndex to true on every field except those fields you know will be used as criteria for smart fields or dimensions or fields that are foreign keys that will be used during joins between tables If you already created a data mart from an XML file that indexes all fields you may want to go back and specify that some fields not be indexed This would be the case especially if the data mart takes a long time to refresh and the Processing History tab shows that the indices took as much time to create as the tables did to refresh Incremental Refresh in Universal Source Connector Data Marts Incremental refresh in a custom data mart enables you to process only records that have changed since the last time the mart was refreshed enabling much faster processing times for the mart The Incremental attributes are available only for the Source Type of DATAPROVIDER For more information see DATAPROVIDER on page 246 252 2 256 CHAPTER 6 Time Stamp Date Format Characters Character case is important For example mm represents minutes while MM represents month Time separator In some l
235. ese are the actual numbers on which you base your reports For example you may want to measure the total gifts given by constituents of a certain profession who live ina certain city For more information see Cubes on page 63 Understanding Smart Fields Smart fields are new fields you create that give you increased flexibility in working with Information Edge data Many smart field types are included in The Information Edge You can use these types to create smart fields for specific tables in your data marts For example you can determine a recency frequency and monetary score for donors by creating a smart field for your constituent table based on the Blackbaud RFM score smart field type Once you create a smart field it is populated by your data and can then be incorporated into your Pivot Tables Charts and Data Analyzer Views Smart fields also form the basis for RE WriteBack queries you create in The Raiser s Edge 18 O CHAPTER 2 Smart fields can be used as building blocks You can create smart fields then use those smart fields to create additional smart fields You can also use the Expression Wizard to help write SQL statements that specify values or filters for your smart fields Smart Field Wizard Pledge Valuation RFM SYBUNT This Month This Year For more information about using Smart Fields see Smart Fields on page 100 GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMA
236. essing for your smart fields Unless you want to change these properties to achieve a specific goal for a smart field we recommend you leave the default settings in place For more information see Completing the smart field Advanced tab on page 107 Click Finish to save the smart field A message appears asking whether you want to process the smart field now If you want to process the field at this time click Yes Depending on the number of records to process this can take some time If you do not want to process the field now you can click No and process it later AL C When creating a smart field for a data mart containing numerous records you may want to test the smart field on sample data or a subset of records before processing it with the entire database This enables you to see how the smart field aggregates data how long it takes to process and to determine the processing time implications for a large database 102 7 CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the smart field General tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the General tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x General Type Advanced Column Name MonitoredField Friendly N ame ae Monitored Field Description Monitoring how changes in age bracketing affect giving Help 2 Enter a Column Name This will be the actual name of the field created in the database It must begin with a letter and can contain only
237. est segmentations can be created by copying a percentage of an existing segmentation You can then send a mailing to only that percentage to test its success If the test is successful you can send the mailing to the rest of the segmentation by filtering out the test ensuring that the members of the test do not receive the mailing twice MARKETING SEGMENTATION 189 2 gt Adding a test segment 1 On the Segmentation Wizard General tab right click on a segment and select New Test Segment The Test Segment screen appears E Test segment wizara LLL Test Segment Properties Name 4 test 2 Description Package ete e ig ag Cost 0 50 Response rate so Y Gift amount 750 00 Sample size sa Percent v Help OK Cancel 2 Enter a Name and Description for the test segment 3 You can specify a Package to associate with the test segment but it is not required Click the button beside the Package field to create a new package For information about creating a package see Adding a segmentation on page 174 4 You can enter an expected Response rate for the test segment You can also specify the expected Gift amount from respondents in the test segment Entering this information enables you to compare the expected versus actual response rate when you analyze the test segment later 5 In the Sample size field enter a number and specify whether the number represents Percent
238. et VM Once crested a record of that fields value is updated whenever the data mart is refreshed Select the field that you with to montor from it below Field to monitor BIZINTEL_RE_RECURSDID System Record ID Agefanges O DCJ SEGMENTATION DATA Hep ok Corcel 2 Select the field you want to monitor and optionally provide a Description to further help you identify it in Configuration 3 Mark the Create a cube for analyzing this monitored field checkbox if you want to perform analyses on the monitored information 4 Click OK to save the monitored field A message appears asking if you want to process the field now Click Yes to process the field now or No if you want to process it at a later time You return to the Monitored Fields page where detail information appears for the field Now you can create a smart field that enables you to track the value of the monitored field during a specified time period For example you may want to track changes in membership level or income monthly That way you can view donors current membership status as well as their status the previous month For more information about Monitored Field Query smart fields see Monitored Field Query on page 304 CONFIGURATION 89 _ Reports In Configuration you can create Pivot Tables Charts Data Analyzer Views and Crystal Reports to help you analyze your data Additionally you can view all reports created by your u
239. et ne gave tO Re AE Eo d Ra e EU 111 Selection Criteria Processing Order 20 0 0 0c eee eee eee 115 Selection Processing Order 1 2 2 0 ccc cee ene es 117 WriteBacks cre ecu tese oedrs ee gpRR TRUE D RR S ER RR Rr FI Rees 118 3 24 2 CHAPTER 3 PODNCAUONS css ewe Fern e wx Rit qo e UR TOC RUR RUP IPU E ULP CR BUR Ue 123 Schedules iua bs ra Fox IR OR Ro ee ee ers eee 127 Dat SOUEPOR iced prd ph kk kd RC REO AC URL RO RR RP e 129 SOL Server Logis essc Whe eee da hee OR e advises 135 vigi PC ie heayeewkeev donee sd EOE E ETEO EE 136 Procedures Creating and installing an RE Express data mart 0 000000 26 Completing the RE Express General tab 0 0 0 eee eee eee 27 Completing the RE Express Refresh Options tab 0004 28 Completing the RE Express Export Definition tab 00 32 Completing the RE Express Cube Options tab sisse eere 35 Completing the RE Express Additional Tables tab 00 4 37 Completing the RE Express Publications tab 0 0 000000 38 Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart 39 Creating and installing an FE Express data mart 0000 47 Completing the FE Express General tab 0 0 0 0 0c cece eee eee 48 Completing the FE Express Export Definition tab 00 4 49 Completing the FE Express Cube Options tab
240. ew XML definition 8 When you are finished creating your XML file select File Save as from the menu bar and specify the name of your file and the location where you want to save it 9 You can now access this file from the USC Definition tab when you add a custom data mart For more information see Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart on page 215 Validating XML Files At any point while working in The Information Edge XML Editor you can press F5 or click the Validate toolbar button check mark to ensure your XML file is valid against The Information Edge schema If the file is not valid against the schema an error message appears that includes the context of the error You are taken to the offending XML on the Text View tab of the editor UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 241 For example below a field has a name 0 which is not a valid field name The error message includes the context of the bad XML and the error is highlighted in red on the Text View tab 1 The Information Edge XML Editor New XML di d ial xl File Edit Tools Help d ale i9 Bd zi se 13 E Text View 1 Web view FIELD name 0 dataType Int size 4 id CAMPAIGN ID field gt SEQUENCE dataType Int size 4 id CAMPAIGN SEQUENCE field noIndex true gt ART DATE dataType DateTime size 8 id CAMPAIGN START_DATE field noIndex lt FIELD name END_DATE dataType DateTime size 8 id CAMPAIGN END DATE fiel
241. ew as a PowerPoint slide for use in your presentations For more information about using Data Analyzer right click anywhere in a view and select Help Data Analyzer BusinessCenter From a Data Analyzer View you can access the Microsoft Data Analyzer BusinessCenter through the Tools menu The BusinessCenter provides predefined queries in a natural language format that you can use to answer standard questions about your data For example you can use the BusinessCenter to answer the question How did year to date donations compare to the same period last year Running this query opens a screen that explains how the results will be shown in the view For more information about the Data Analyzer BusinessCenter select Tools BusinessCenter From the BusinessCenter click the question mark at the bottom of the screen 161 162 7 CHAPTER 4 gt Adding a new Data Analyzer View l On the Analytics tree view select the data mart for which you want to create a Data Analyzer View Click Reports in the tree view Click New Data Analyzer View on the action bar The Report Wizard appears on the General tab Enter a name for the Data Analyzer View and optionally a description 5 In the Data Source field select the cube on which you want to base the 7 Data Analyzer View Click Finish The View screen appears open to the Dimensions tab Dimensions Measures Template Measures Check the dimensions to
242. extract and view data from different points of view To enable this kind of analysis OLAP data is stored in a multidimensional database GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE aly You can think of a relational database the type usually used for transaction gathering as flat The relational database is organized by tables with rows representing records and columns representing individual fields within the records A multidimensional database can examine each piece of data from many different perspectives Each of these perspectives is called a dimension For example when you create a data mart from Raiser s Edge data using RE Express each code table brought into the data mart is a dimension Each attribute biographical table and gift table is a dimension In the following example Total Geography Total Profession and Year represent dimensions Because of the cubelike structure of the multidimensional database The Information Edge can locate the intersection of dimensions side by side top to bottom or in any other orientation within the cube When Blackbaud creates a data mart based on your data sources the OLAP cubes you need to analyze your data are part of that data mart You can add new dimensions to the cubes based on the tables created from your data sources You can also add new measures to analyze the data in the dimensions Measures are numeric values such as constituent or gift count or gift amount Th
243. f future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made Again you select either a field or value In the Guess field enter your best guess for what the rate will be Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Key Value Category Miscellaneous 299 300 2 APPENDIX A What it Does When used with the Warehouse feature of The Information Edge available in the Enterprise version a Key Value smart field enables you to locate donors who appear in different data marts and have them appear as one row in the warehouse so you can more effectively analyze those records When Would I use a Key Value Smart Field Use this smart fields when you want to compare data from different marts in a warehouse For example you may have a data warehouse containing a ticketing data mart and a constituent data mart You can create a Key Value smart field in each data mart that uses the same criteria This enables you to see which constituents are present in both marts For more information key values in data warehouses see Key Values on page 260 Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Key Value smart field you must select the field which will contain your key value across marts and enter the number of characters that will be used to determine a match For more information
244. f you experience problems importing the source data in the next step you can check the properties of the data source and unmark this checkbox 16 Click Finish You return to the Defined Data Sources screen where your new data source appears in the box 17 To exit the Data Sources screen and return to the console click Close Importing Blackbaud databases automatically If you have more than one Blackbaud database you can import them all into The Information Edge by clicking a single button 1 In Configuration select the Data Sources tab 2 On the Action bar click Import The Information Edge examines your system for Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge databases and automatically imports them as sources The imported databases appear on the Data Sources tab CONFIGURATION 3 To check the properties for a source select the source and click Open The Data Source Wizard screen appears For a description of each screen in the Data Source Wizard see Adding a data source on page 129 You can now create data marts based on export files from the Blackbaud data sources you imported For more information about creating these data marts see Creating and installing an RE Express data mart on page 26 and Creating and installing an FE Express data mart on page 47 SQL Server Logins The Information Edge uses a Raiser s Edge login on SQL Server to connect with The Raiser s Edge database You can view the logins en
245. f your appeals by gender You have already created a package using RE Express that contains a cube based on gift information accessed from your Raiser s Edge database You will now create a Pivot Table that enables you to effectively analyze this information 1 From the Analytics tree view select a data mart created with the default export fields in RE Express 2 Click Reports in the tree view Click New Pivot Table on the action bar The Report Wizard appears on the General tab 4 In the Data Source field select the cube on which you want to base the Pivot Table For this example select the GIFTS cube 5 Enter a name for the Pivot Table and optionally a description 6 Specify whether you want other users to be able to view and edit the Pivot Table If you do not mark either checkbox only you will be able to view it ANALYTICS 149 7 Click Finish The Pivot Table designer appears Ele View Tools Help mY Dashboards ag Gift and Bio Information i Tables Ef Cubes Eig GIFTS EG Pivot Tables ij Total sumame i3 Fund gifts by a tfl Charts HE Analyzer Views t ff CONSTITUENT gg Segmentation Data Ha SmartFields OS Custom Crystal Reports ia ROMS 8 Right click anywhere in the designer pane and select Field List The Gift and Bio Information Cubes New Delete llave Rename Ba Copy Copy to Clipboard MN 2 20 ep eas fete yi M Drop Filter Fields Here
246. field you must select the per period Interest rate whether it should be based on a field or value and whether it should be a percentage or decimal In the Per period field enter 1 if the rate is per period otherwise enter a field or value that will determine the per period rate In the Payment Periods field enter the total number of payments in the annuity In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made AL 31237 APPENDIX A Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Quartile Category Statistical What it Does A Quartile smart field breaks data from a selected field into four groups When Would I use a Quartile Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to divide data into four distinct groups For example you may use a quartile field as part of a marketing segmentation to divide the mailing into four segments Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Quartile smart field select a field containing data you want to break into four groups You must indicate whether you want the groups to be sorted in ascending or descending order and whether to include zero val
247. field value Table RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT Field value BI0_NAME DK Cancel In the Blackbaud system field select the Blackbaud program from which you want to pull values If you selected to create a relationship with an RE Express data mart when you created this data mart The Raiser s Edge is available in the dropdown Select it if you want to pull Raiser s Edge constituent and gift information onto the Transactions table for each transaction If you select The Raiser s Edge as the Blackbaud system Gift is the Record type For information about how to create a relationship between an FE Express and RE Express data mart see Completing the FE Express Raiser s Edge Source tab on page 54 Enter the value that you want to appear in the table for transactions that meet the criteria of this smart field You can select the option to Use this value and enter a specific value You can also select the option to Use this field and select a field from the table to use as the value when the condition you establish is true For example you may want to place the name of the constituent who donated a gift in the TRANSACTIONS table If the RE Express data mart with which you defined a relationship contains multiple gift tables they are all available for selection in the dropdown Click OK You return to the Criteria screen where your input parameters now appear The data type you select for the smart fie
248. fresh the data mart will continue to process but a warning occurs After the mart processes the Data Mart Refresh tab lists the Last Checkpoint before a warning occurred You can view the messages to see information about any items that did not complete gt Processing a data mart manually 1 From the Configuration tree view select the data mart you want to refresh On the action bar click Refresh Refresh lt Data Mart Name gt 2 The Data Mart Refresh tab appears Data Mart Refresh Refresh Type 1 Full C Incremental Last Refresh 0 00 42 0 00 00 Average Refresh 0 00 42 0 00 00 Current Refresh 0 00 50 0 00 00 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 06 02 2005 11 1 Processed cube Segmentation Data OLAP cubes processed Updating field statistics Field Statistics updated RE EXPRESS CONSTITUE Field Statistics updated RE EXPRESS GIFTS Field Statistics updated RE EXPRESS SEGMENTA Field Statistics update checkpoint complete Completed with 0 errors b Refresh Cancel Help Completed with 0 errors 3 If you are refreshing an RE Express data mart before beginning the refresh you can specify whether it should be Full or Incremental For more information about the difference between the two see Incremental vs Full Refresh on page 30 4 Click Refresh to begin processing the data mar
249. fresh Time The value of a smart field optimized for Refresh Time is calculated only when it is accessed in a SQL request Because of this the smart field does not need to be refreshed so it adds no time to data mart processing however it takes the longest time to query Refresh Time optimization is available only on the following types of smart fields Average Lybunt Bin Maximum Concatenation Medium Condition Minimum Count Mode Days Since Standard Deviation Expression Sum First Gift Sybunt Latest Gift Balanced Time Balanced Time optimization results in a middle ground between optimizing for Query Time or Refresh Time When a Balanced Time optimized smart field is refreshed the value is calculated and stored in its own table When the value is requested during a query operation it is retrieved from that table Balanced Time is available on the same smart field types that allow Refresh Time optimization The type of optimization you select depends on your goal for a particular smart field In general by default the program optimizes for Balanced Time Changing to Refresh Time can help if for example you need to refresh a data mart within a limited time frame and are willing to gain the refresh time at the expense of increasing query time However if your window for data mart refreshes leaves you plenty of time the Refresh Time option may not benefit you For a smart field you use a great deal you will probably wan
250. g balance method in which double the straight line depreciation amount is taken the first year and then that same percentage is applied to the undepreciated amount in subsequent years You can specify a different method to use When Would I use a Depreciation Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the rate of depreciation for an asset Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Depreciation smart field you must select the initial Cost of the asset the Salvage value of the asset at the end of its useful life the length of the useful Life of the asset the Period for which the asset s value will be depreciated and the Factor rate at which the balance declines Effective Annual Interest Rate Category Financial What it Does An Effective Annual Interest Rate smart field calculates this rate based on the nominal annual interest rate and number of compounding periods per year When Would I use an Effective Annual Interest Rate Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the actual annual interest rate that accrues after taking into consideration the effects of compounding when compounding occurs more than once per year Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Effective Annual Interest Rate smart field you must specify the Nominal interest rate as a percent or decimal and the total number of compounding Periods per year Expression Category Miscellaneous What it Does An Expression smart field en
251. g this information enables you to compare the expected versus actual response rate when you analyze the segmentation later In the Sample size field enter a number and specify whether the number represents Percent or Records The Sample size is typically 100 percent for a segment However it may be less if the segment belongs to a test segmentation For more information about test segmentations see Test Segments and Test Segmentations on page 188 Additionally you may want to manually adjust the sample size to ensure segments are equally sized to hold down costs or to account for limits on mailing materials Click OK to save your changes and return to the Segmentation Wizard MARKETING SEGMENTATION Packages Packages are the mailings available for a segmentation For example you may have a package named Glossy Calendar that is sent to your best donors and prospects You could also have a Glossy Brochure Standard Brochure and Post Card After you create packages you can specify that one of them be the default when generating segments Then after segments are generated you can assign the other packages you created to the segments gt Completing the Segmentation Packages tab 1 When creating or editing a Segmentation select the Packages tab Segmentation wizara NN 8 8 lieb File view Tools Actions Help isave Wg New dii x General Filter Budget Expenses Packages Properties 2 To add a pack
252. ge 8 When you select Dashboards in the navigation bar the Dashboard page appears listing any Dashboards you have created If you have multiple Dashboards when you specify that an item be included on the Dashboard you can select the specific Dashboard on which you want to include it Charts Home Page Ca You must create and name at least one Dashboard before you can add content Once you create a Dashboard the Add to Dashboard right click menu option is enabled on analysis items 16 CHAPTER 2 eu You must have administrative rights to access Configuration If you do not have administrative rights Configuration does not appear on the navigation bar When you view items in the Dashboard they can be maximized minimized or viewed simultaneously with other dashboard items Tables You can view the database tables included in a data mart You can also create Snapshot tables to create views of tables frozen at a certain point in time This enables you to compare data as it exists at a certain time with current data after you refresh it Additionally you can monitor specific fields in a table to easily track data as it changes over time DataMarts Data Sources Schedules security New gt d 3 B GyaddtoDashboard export EGRE Express Fields Data Field Name Friendly Name Data Type Size mdexed Monitored Field Smart Field BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL ID
253. ge Query amp Export Guide 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the Export Definition tab E New Data Mart x Cube Options Additional T ables General Refresh Options Publications Data Source The Raiser s Edge 7 Sample Database g Test connection Data sources C Biographical B System Record ID B Name D ID Key Indicator B Constituent Code l Gender Age 30 Address 30 Preferred Address mud jLoad Save Copy from 2 Edit Export lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish 2 Select the Raiser s Edge database from which you want to create the data mart in the Data Source field You can test the connection to a specified source or view all available Raiser s Edge data sources For more information about viewing and adding data sources see Data Sources on page 129 3 The default fields included in the data mart appear on the screen If you want to use an export you already defined in another RE Express data mart click Copy from Click Save to save the export as a file or Load to use an export you previously saved as a file You may want to save an export as a file if you plan to use it in other data marts so that instead of recreating the export you can load the saved file CONFIGURATION 33 4 To edit or add fields click Edit Export on the lower right of the screen The expo
254. ghn 85 I 495 495 Alison D Goodson 187 I 502 502 Alicia H Thomas 190 I 503 503 Wendy Z Thomas 191 I 509 509 Kimberly J Luton 8832 I 4 From the Drill Through screen select a record and click Go to Constituent 5 Enter your log in information for The Raiser s Edge The constituent record appears so you can view or edit it When you close the record you return to the Drill Through screen 6 Click Close to exit the Drill Through screen and return to the Pivot Table J If you have administrator rights you can click a button in the toolbar to create a WriteBack query including only the records in the grid or export the records in the grid 454 d CHAPTER 4 Charts Charts enable you to visually compare patterns and trends in your data in a wide variety of styles 2H New gt lt Delete Save Rename BR Copy X Copy to Clipboard Bi be x BSH I el 3977 tig EMO DATE 7 All DATE GIFTS Count El 2000BREAKF AST W 2000DIRECT O 2000PHONE 2001 Phone 2002 DIRECT El 2002PHONE Ill 2003 Direct Mailing E 384NNUAL E 38PHONE El 98ANNUAL O S9BREAKFAST Bl S9PHONE E ANNUALMAIL D AUCTION O CAMP LETTER For more information about using charts right click anywhere in a chart and select Help The Chart component help file appears Chart Field List Screen You can access the Field List from the toolbar or by right clicking anywhere in th
255. gmentations into The Raiser s Edge 196 incremental refresh explained 30 Universal Source Connector data mart explained 255 incremental command text macros 256 time stamp date format 256 installing data marts created by Blackbaud 58 FE Express 46 RE Express 26 integration with other Blackbaud software 3 interest payment smart field 298 interest rate smart field 299 K key value smart field 299 L latency smart field 302 latest gift smart field 302 lift charts 199 list smart field 302 logins SQL server 135 LYBUNT smart field 302 M Marketing Segmentation optional module 171 maximum smart field 303 measures 66 median smart field 303 members calculated 67 menu bar 12 Microsoft OLEDB Data Source Wizard 234 minimum smart field 303 mode smart field 303 monitored field query smart field 304 monitored fields explained 87 N navigating in The Information Edge 10 net present value smart field 307 noncontributor smart field 307 nth item smart field 267 INDEX 335 2 number of periods smart field 307 O OLAP cubes understanding 16 open see accessing 8 optional modules unlocking 13 P packages 183 parameters 75 payment on principal smart field 308 percentage of dimension total calculated member template 70 percentage of measure calculated member template percentage of parent total calculated member template 71 percentile smart field 309 periodic payment smart field 309 Pivot exports 95 Pivo
256. gn to the specified segment For information about creating packages see Packages on page 183 You can also edit existing segments or create individual ones by right clicking in the grid For more information see Adding or editing individual segments on page 182 The frame on the upper right of the General tab displays information about the segmentation The Budget entry is currently blank On the Budget Expenses tab you can enter the amount you have budgeted for this segmentation so you can view at a glance whether or not it has exceeded the budget For more information see Completing the Segmentation Budget Expenses tab on page 186 On the General tab you can view any test segments you created by clicking the plus sign beside the parent segment if a segment has no test segments the plus sign is not available 8 10 11 12 13 14 MARKETING SEGMENTATION To view the records included in a segment and any test segments beneath it click List Members in the action bar A list screen appears E Random sample of 10 where Decile 1 ey 7 EI Ael x Number of Records 24 BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO SYSTEM ID BIO NAME 218 218 Yoshi Izzo 204 204 204 Orla A McGrann 502 502 502 Alicia H Thomas 277 277 277 Collin Dubose 241 241 241 Neil 4 Osborne 507 507 507 Jill M Garrett 302 302 302 Baldwin Entertainment Corporati 290 290 290 Jefferson Manufacturing
257. h The Information Edge will construct the mart UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 215 gt Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart 1 On the menu bar select File New Select Data Mart Universal Source Connector the New Data Mart screen appears on the General tab For information about entering information on the General tab see the next procedure 2 The first time you process a data mart all records are included If you set certain properties in your data mart definition for subsequent processings you can specify whether you want to refresh all records or only those records that have changed since the last time you processed the mart For more information see Completing the Universal Source Connector Refresh Options tab on page 216 3 You must create an XML file or specify an existing one to define the custom data mart For more information see Completing the Universal Source Connector USC tab on page 218 4 After you add exports and HTML Publications to a data mart you can specify that they process automatically whenever the data mart processes For more information see Completing the Universal Source Connector Publications tab on page 220 gt Completing the Universal Source Connector General tab 1 While creating or editing a Universal Source Connector data mart select the General tab New Data Mart x General Refresh Options USC Definition Publications Name custom Sourc
258. h as NPV equals Yes and you may want to select that query as a filter If you do not need a query to filter the pledges select the Gift Types tab Move only the Pledge and MG Pledge gift types into the Include these Gift Types box Click OK to finish establishing the gift criteria Once you finish creating the data mart properties process the data mart You are then ready to begin using the Pledge Valuation analytic Using the Pledge Valuation Analytic The Information Edge Pledge Valuation Analytic features several components that enable you to estimate and analyze your pledge values SOLUTIONS Several smart fields such as Federal Interest Rate are included The analytic is able to handle the interest rate based on installment frequency You should enter the appropriate interest rates as published by the IRS in the input parameters for this condition type smart field The analytic actually uses two Net Present Value NPV calculations One NPV calculation is used to value pledges with regular installments The second creates values for pledges with a value of Irregular in the Irregular Payment Schedules smart field The Pledge Valuation data mart contains a Gifts cube with several default Dimensions and Measures Viewing the Results in a Pivot Table The Pledge Valuation Analytic includes a Pivot Table in the Gifts cube that you can use to view pledge value information You can customize the table
259. h your source table has a relationship appear Expression Constituent d W Gifts gt Insert a Subquery W Gifts V Unde Ab Cut a Op Fe Paste A Delete After you create a subquery you can add more information to the expression depending on what result you are trying to achieve The following procedure is based on a scenario in which you would use a subquery to create a join between donor and gift tables when creating a Condition smart field gt Joining data tables with subqueries a In this procedure we will create a condition smart field for the constituent table in an RE Express data mart As part of this smart field we will include a condition that analyzes the gift date so we can include information on who has donated so far this year Because the gift date is stored in the gift table with which the constituent table has a one to many relationship we need to create a join between the tables and then specify the criteria we will use to analyze the date 1 In the tree view under the data mart for which you want to create a smart field right click Smart Fields Select New Smart Field The Smart Field Wizard appears open to the General tab Name your smart field and click Next The Type tab appears Select Miscellaneous in the Category field and select Condition Click Next The Tables tab appears i de OX UE In the Available tables box you select the table from which you want to use va
260. he Constituents table Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Sum smart field you must select the one to many field for which you want to add together all values Sum of Years Digits Depreciation Category Financial What it Does A Sum of Years Digits Depreciation smart field calculates the sum of years digits depreciation of an asset for a specific period you choose When Would I use a Sum of Years Digits Depreciation Smart Field An asset often loses more of its value early in its lifetime Use this smart field to determine the depreciation of an asset of this type Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Sum of Years Digits Depreciation smart field you must select either a field or value to represent the cost of the asset the salvage value of the asset at the end of its useful life the length of the useful life of the asset and the period for which you want to find the depreciation amount SYBUNT Category Fundraising What it Does A SYBUNT smart field indicates donors who gave Some Year But Unfortunately Not This Year When Would I use a SYBUNT Smart Field Use this field to flag donors who gave in a previous year but not this year Criteria On the Criteria tab for a SYBUNT smart field you must specify the date field to be used and the start date and end date for your This Year date range This Month Category Fundraising What it Does A This Month smart field indicates donors who have given in the current ca
261. hether The Information Edge should connect to the server using Windows NT authentication or SQL Server authentication If you select SQL Server authentication specify the User name and Password 42 2 CHAPTER 3 If an Excel spreadsheet data source contains named ranges they appear as tables in the Source table field A foreign key establishes relationships between tables It has the same value as the primary key in another related table A foreign key can be in a many to one relationship with a primary key 6 Click Next The Tables screen appears If you selected to append data to an existing table skip to step 8 of this procedure If you selected to add a new table proceed to the next step Table Properties x Tables Below are the tables that are available For the selected Data Source If your source table contains a Foreign key you can specify the relationship to the parent table using the options below Data source ClientContact mdb Source table tblContacts v Create relationship to another table in the data mart Join from tbiContacts Field ContactOrald 7 Join to CONSTITUENT lt Back Next gt Cancel 7 The Data source you selected previously appears Select the Source table from which you want to add data to the mart If your source data is a CSV or Excel file the First row contains field names checkbox is avallable You can mark the che
262. hird item in the next step the smart field will return the selected data associated with the third highest gift from constituents 4 Select the number of the item you want to find and specify whether that number is from the start or end of the collection For example if you specified date in the Order by field and you select 2 from the end the field will return the selected data associated with the next to last gift received Average Category Statistical What it Does An Average smart field selects the average value of a field in a one to many relationship When Would I use an Average Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the average value for a one to many field such as gifts for example Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Average smart field you must select the field for which you want to determine the average value Bin Category Statistical What it Does A Bin smart field enables you to create groups or bins in which you categorize records For example you can use a Bin smart field to set up age banding and group records in specific age ranges When Would I use a Bin Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to group records in bands For example you can base a Giving Level Bin smart field on the total gift amount field and include a Silver bin for total giving over 1000 a Gold bin for giving over 5000 and a Platinum bin for giving over 10 000 Criteria O
263. ich selections are processed 1 Select Selections in the tree view and click Processing Order in the action bar The Selection Processing Order Wizard screen appears E selection Processing Order Wizard Ef x Processing Order S ConstituentAgeUnder Y Gifts Y Selection 1 2 To change the order highlight a selection and drag it up or down to the position you want You can also use the arrow buttons on the right to move it up or down 3 When you finish setting the processing order click OK to return to the Selections page WriteBacks You can send information from The Information Edge back to The Raiser s Edge by grouping constituents in a static query or by adding an attribute to specified records For example you may create a smart field based on the Blackbaud RFM type Using WriteBack you can group all donors who had a specified minimum RFM score and create a static query in The Raiser s Edge that you can use in a mailing You can also group records based on a SQL expression gt Adding a new WriteBack 1 On the Configuration tree view click the plus sign beside the name of the data mart for which you want to create a WriteBack 2 Right click on WriteBack and select New Select whether the WriteBack should a Query or an Attribute The WriteBack Wizard opens to the General tab 3 On the General tab specify basic information such as a name and description of the WriteBack For more information see the ne
264. ich you want to export the grid 2 Right click in the grid and select Export Grid The Export grid screen appears The Information Edge Segmentation Ea Segmentation Grid Export Select the export format for your data Use the Options button to customize settings for a given format Export Format Excel w dc Path C Files amp File Name Seamentation sls ox ries 3 Select the Export Format Browse to enter the Path to the location where you want to save the file and specify a File Name 4 Click OK to save the export file in the specified location Importing Segmentations Into The Raiser s Edge Once an export is complete you can import the data into The Raiser s Edge using a plug in designed especially to work with Information Edge data Before you import data make sure no other users are connected to The Raiser s Edge The plug in writes to several record types so you need to ensure that no users have records open before using it gt Importing segmentation data into The Raiser s Edge with the segmentation plug in 1 Before you can use the segmentation plug in you must first install it To do so copy the SegmentationPLGdlI and SegmentationPLG vbd files from the directory where you installed The Information Edge into your RE7 Plugins directory To use the plug in log into The Raiser s Edge Click Plug Ins on the Raiser s Edge bar The Plug ins page appears MARKET
265. ied information Those that do not meet the criteria will include the default value you specified earlier The data type you select for the smart field also restricts your options for setting a default value for records that do not meet your criteria Any entry in the Use this value field must be valid for the output data type for example a date for a Date type field and only fields with a matching data type appear in the Use this field dropdown h 288 APPENDIX A i 6 Click Next The Expression screen appears If you are familiar with creating SQL statements you can enter text directly in the Expression box Right click in the box to view a list of fields in the target table you selected as well as any related tables Properties Lx Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the Fields that meet this criteria Expression a Constituent 3 Fields Age a Gifts gt Dt Smart Fields gt Constituent Code Insert a Subquery id Parameters Gender a ID W Undo Constituent 4 Key Indicator A Cut Name da Copy System Record ID M Paste BIZINTEL_ID x Delete BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID Ok Preferred Address address line 1 Select All Preferred Address address line 2 Preferred Address address line 3 Preferred Address city Preferred Address state Preferred Address ZIP 7 Previously created smart fields are indicated by an icon on
266. ield 293 decile smart field 293 dependencies 21 depreciation smart field 294 difference calculated member template 70 dimensions 65 does not contain 86 drill through 152 E editing grid display 14 effective annual interest rate smart field 294 examples expression smart field 296 Excel Pivot exports 95 Excel wizard explained 229 primary keys 233 Export about export 89 create definition 89 creating Financial Edge exports in FE Express 50 creating Raiser s Edge exports in RE Express 33 Excel Pivot 95 filtering options 94 Postal Discount 97 exporting data from The Information Edge 19 Segmentation grid 196 segmentations 194 expression smart field 294 Expression Wizard about 83 conditions 84 F FE Express about FE Express 46 adding data from other sources 39 BIZINTEL IDs 57 creating a data mart with 47 additional tables tab 55 cube options tab 53 definition tab 49 general tab 48 publications tab 56 Raiser s Edge source tab 54 Financial Edge export in 50 field statistics viewing 62 FIELDSET 244 filtering segmentations 184 Financial Edge The integration with 3 first gift smart field 298 frequently used terms see glossary 327 friendly names 12 full refresh 30 future value smart field 298 G getting started 8 glossary 327 grids changing display in 14 H HTML Publications about HTML Publications 123 creating 124 viewing 125 importing Blackbaud databases automatically 134 crystal report 167 se
267. ields you want to snapshot 6 The Available Fields in the selected table appear on the left Use the arrow buttons to move fields into the Selected Fields box 7 Click Finish The snapshot table name now appears in the tree view Monitored Fields Monitored fields track changes to your data over time This enables you to discover trends in your data Any field in a data mart including previously created smart fields can be designated as a monitored field Fields you specify to be monitored are processed each time a data mart is refreshed If The Information Edge detects a change in the value of the monitored field the old value new value and date processed are recorded For example you may have created a donor level smart field that separates donors into bins of Platinum Gold and Silver based on total giving amount By making this a monitored field you can track changes to see how your donors move between the Platinum Gold and Silver levels When the data mart is first processed the current giving level is recorded for each donor The next time the data mart is processed any changes to the donor level are recorded A new entry is created for any donors who changed levels since the last time the data mart was processed The new entries show the previous giving level new giving level and date the level changed for these donors You can create a cube for each monitored field enabling you to create Pivot T
268. iews cece cee cc cee cece cece cee hh hh rmm ntn 161 Custom Crystal Reports ccc cc cece ccc eee reece ee n nnn 165 Copying Reports ose de yes av eee er munere ce Ice el o eL 168 Deleting and Moving Reports cc ccc ccc c eee c ec ee cece eee nnns 169 Dashboards soiiis aces cas essai wees DU DIL DD ITI 169 X C Q da C O O MARKETING SEGMENTATION eee 171 Navigating in Segmentation ccc cece cece eee reece cere nnn 173 Creating Segmentations ccc cece cece cece cece eee eects eee eens 174 Test Segments and Test Segmentations eee 188 Custom Properties o2 eee eere e ewe e UU Me V Arv AR Nr A ace ai 191 Activating Segmentations 0 cc cece cece eee eene nnn 193 Exporting Segmentations 0 ccc cece ccc cece cece eee eee ence eens 194 Analyzing Segmentations 0 ccc cece cece cere cece tence hh nn nn 198 UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 2000 0 eee eee 203 New Universal Source Connector Features in The Information Edge 1 7 205 Creating Data Marts with XML eee nnn 214 Adding Universal Source Connector Data Marts cece cece ee eees 214 The Information Edge XML Editor eee 221 XML Schema Reference cc cece cece e cece eee etr hh hn nn 241 DATA WAREHOUSES x ius viene sede eR epis Pee tee uai 259 Key Val S v 9 eve e rh 9e e Er EVA P LEPPRE PEPRCS C PKT ewe PE
269. ilter Fields Here GIFTS Count Year End Appeal Walk 4 Thon Unsolicited Proposal Appeal Planned Giving Letter Open House Letter Millennium Direct Mailing Membership Mailing InternetWeb Site s Direct Mailing Celebrity Auction Camp Kids Newsletter nnual Newsletter Annual Mailin APPEAL Annual Exhibi Annual Phonathon 1999 President s Breakfast 1999 Annual Phonathon 1999 Annual Mailing 1998 Annual Phonathon 1998 Annual Mailin Biang El Cash Bi Gift in Kind MG Pledge O Other E Pledge El Stock Property 13 You want to view the selected data by individual cities To do this select PREF ADDRESS CITY from the Field List and drag it to the Drop Filter Fields Here area Mielo x BS z a a E Aaa eE e le Drop Filter Fields Here Planned Giving Letter Open House Letter Millennium Direct Mailing Membership Maili Internet Web Site s Direct Mailing Celebrity Auction Camp Kids Newsletter nnual Newsletter Annual Mailin IrmEEETEESI Annual Exhibi APPEAL 7 2003 Direct Mailing 2002 Phonat hon 2002 Direct Mailing 2001 Annual Phonathon 2000 President s Breakfast 2000 Annual Phonathon 1999 President s Breakfast 1999 Annual Phonathon 1999 Annual Mailing 1998 Annual Phonathon 1998 Annual Mailin Blank Chart Field List Lx 34 GIFTS Count SEGMENTATION DATA SUM Amount Year to Date Amount i0 Year to Dat
270. ine if the item is really safe to delete or not For more information see Dependencies on page 21 r2 Using the Documentation User Guide This user guide contains examples scenarios procedures graphics and conceptual information Side margins contain notes tips warnings and space for you to write your own notes You can access a pdf version of the guide by selecting Help The Information Edge User s Guide from the menu bar In the pdf page numbers in the Table of Contents Index and all cross references are hyperlinks For example click the page number by any heading or procedure on a Table of Contents page to go directly to that page Help File To access the help file in the program select Help Help Topics from the menu bar Or from any screen in the program press F1 on your keyboard to access information about that particular screen You can search for terms of phrases on the Search tab Narrow your search in the help file by enclosing your search in quotation marks on the Search tab IV 9 WELCOME Overview Contents Understanding The Information Edge cece cece eee eeee 2 Getting Data to Those Who Need It 0 0c cece eee 3 The Information Edge and Other Blackbaud Software 3 Information Edge Data Flow 0 0 eee cee eA 4 Getting Started With The Information Edge 5 qum Q lt ol dom O CHAPTER 1
271. ing The Monitored Field Query smart field is based on a field you specified as a monitored field For example you can create a Donor Level field that separates donors into bins based on their total giving and specify that it be a monitored field You can then create Monitored Field Query smart fields defined as Donor Level This Month and Donor Level Last Month The fields are updated each time you process the data mart So if you process the data mart for the first time on 6 30 you may see ID Name Donor Level This Month Donor Level Last Month 1 Joe Smith Silver 2 Jane Smith Gold If Joe moves up to the Gold level in July while Jane stays at the same level when the data mart is processed on 7 30 you would see ID Name Donor Level This Month Donor Level Last Month 1 Joe Smith Gold Silver 2 Jane Smith Gold If both donors stay at the same level in August and the data mart is processed on 8 30 you have ID Name Donor Level This Month Donor Level Last Month 1 Joe Smith Gold 2 Jane Smith Calendar vs Relative to Process Date You can select a time period to monitor based on numerous intervals The available Period options depend on the selected Interval When you select any interval except day two additional options are available Calendar specifies that the intervals are based on calendar periods Relative to process date specifies that the periods are relative to the date a data mart is processed 30
272. ing The Information Edge Most relational database also called online transaction processing or OLTP transaction systems including The Raiser s Edge are optimized for transactional entry and data integrity The Raiser s Edge excels in these two areas However relational database systems are not intended for high speed what if and aggregate reporting Because The Information Edge is designed for this type of reporting it compliments the relational database solution Not only does The Information Edge enable you to report on massive amounts of data at thought speed it also greatly reduces the burden placed on the OLTP database system because users are not trying to create data intensive reports directly from the OLTP database Getting Data to Those Who Need It The Information Edge supports analytical and management reporting with sub second response times in a highly optimized reporting environment Management reporting enables decision makers to get the information they need quickly The following diagram represents the typical information structure of an organization Low Low Predictability of Decisions Availability of Information Operational Exec Middle Management High Operational Staff High Operational Systems amp Applications Commonly the higher on the pyramid a person is the longer critical analytical information takes to reach that person This is a by product of demands placed o
273. ion FROM target table SMART FIELD DETAILS Your expression can be any valid SQL statement that can be used in a SELECT clause for the target table Two examples of possible Expression Smart Fields are included below Using a SQL Server Function to Return a Value The SQL Server function DATEADD enables you to add a specified interval to a date field In this example we use DATEADDY to build an Expression Smart Field called OneYearLater that returns a date one year after the RE EXPRESS GIFTS DATE DATEADD year 1 RE EXPRESS GIFTS DATE BIZINTEL ID AMOUNT DATE OneYearLater 1 500 00 1 1 2004 1 1 2005 2 400 00 1 2 2005 1 2 2006 3 300 00 2 1 2005 2 1 2006 Refer to your SQL Server documentation for a list of available functions Use a SELECT Statement to Populate the Expression Field You can use a SQL statement that returns a single value as the source of your expression Here we calculate the total number of gifts for a constituent SELECT COUNT RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS BIZINTEL_ID FRO RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS WHERE RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS BIZINTEL_RE_RECORSDID RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL_RE_RECORSDID When this smart field is processed the following SQL statement is executed SELECT SELECT COUNT RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS BIZINTEL_ID RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS
274. ional tabs appear on the wizard and a short description of what that type of smart field does appears at the bottom of the screen For more information about the different types of smart fields see Smart Field Details on page 265 3 Ifyou are creating a new smart field click Next to access the Tables tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the smart field Tables tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the Tables tab 23 Smart Field Wizard Constituent 2 For all smart fields you must select a table from the Available target tables box This is the table in which you want to store the values for the smart field you are creating For some smart field types you must also select a Source Table E Smart Field Wizard Constituent CONSTITUENT MF BIO AGE CONFIGURATION 105 3 From the Available source tables box select the table from which you want to use values that will be processed by the smart field you are creating Only tables with a one to many relationship with the selected target table appear in the Available source tables box This means a record in the source table can have many matching records in the target table but records in the target table have only one m
275. is field dropdown SMART FIELD DETAILS 277 2 Pg p Co 278 7 w APPENDIX A When you select a field it appears in the Expression box so you can use itin a SQL statement To use the Expression Wizard to build statements on the Expression screen click Expression Wizard The Expression Wizard Select Field screen appears Select a field for which you want to create an expression AII fields in the selected target table and any related tables including any other smart fields you have already created are available Click Next The Expression Wizard Select Condition screen appears Expression Wizard x Select Condition Choose the desired condition and supply any necessary values in this step Values for 333 X Condition is one of is not one of is less than is less than or equal to is greater than is greater than or equal to is between is not between zl lt Back L Finish Cancel 10 Select a Condition and specify the Values for that condition The available values vary depending on the selected condition For more information about the available conditions see Expression and Selection Wizard Conditions on page 84 11 Click Finish You return to the Expression screen Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Expression RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITU
276. is implied as parent for every dimension For more information about All Member see About Dimension Hierarchies and Members on page 74 Mark the Preserve the numeric value option if you want the calculated value to display as a number Mark this option if you want the value derived by the expression to be available for further manipulation for example in another expression or a Pivot Table Mark the Format as n with option if you want the value to display as a string You can specify the number of decimal places you want to display with the percentage You should mark this option only if the expression is complete as a standalone and the value will not be manipulated in another expression C l a 72 CHAPTERS Cura Top or Bottom List r Expression Type Parameters MDX Expression List the Top 5S members Difference Percentage of measure from APPEAL Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total ranked by Year to Date Amount m nonet across children v Display value for each member Format Previous date value Delimiter Year to date value This expression creates a list of the top or bottom entries for a field as ranked by a value you select For example you may want to List the Top 5 member s from the Appeal dimension ranked by Year to date amount so you can analyze which of your appeals are performing best Yo
277. is processed before and c PIE Tes 116 CHAPTER 3 gt Searching for selection criteria field values 1 From the Selection Define Criteria screen click the binoculars beside the value field Ebene critica x FUND fis Equal To The Search Criteria screen appears E Search Critieria xj Search Find what PLANNED Match start of Field Results PLANNED hia 2j Select All Deselect All Wait Time w 1of1 2 Inthe Find what field enter a partial or whole name of the field value you want to find In the Match field specify whether you want to match the start whole or any part of the value 3 Click the binoculars to start the search Any results matching your criteria appear in the Results box 4 Wait Time limits the amount of time a search is conducted Searches stop after the specified wait time period even if the search is not complete and return only those results found before the time out occurred Select the entry or entries you want to use as criteria for the selection 6 Click OK to return to the selection Criteria tab where the selected entry or entries now appear CONFIGURATION gt Completing the Selection Results tab 1 While creating or editing a selection select the Results tab BEE E Selection Wizard Over 50 General Criteria Results BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO SYSTEM ID BIO_NAME 199 1
278. istics Cancel Bact Next gt Finish 2 Enter a name to display for this warehouse in the tree view in the Name field Enter a prefix to display with each table entry for this warehouse in the Prefix field Enter text to describe the warehouse in The Information Edge console in the Description field 3 Mark the Maintain field statistics checkbox if you want to view information such as data type how many instances do and do not contain data and the number of different values for each field in the mart Tracking field statistics enables you to determine whether a field is valid for further analysis based on its population 4 Ifyou care creating a new warehouse click Next to access the Data Marts tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing warehouse click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs 227 CHAPTER 7 gt Completing the Warehouse Data Marts tab 1 While creating or editing a Warehouse select the Data Marts tab 2 New Data Mart x Dao Hose Take Festo add X Remove H Properties IV Create cubes for each table in the warehouse Cancel lt Back Nest Finish 2 To add a data mart to your warehouse click Add The Select Master table and columns screen appears Data Mart Properties Select Master table and columns Select the data mart master table
279. iteBacks Count H Publications 3 AMOUNT EHA Segmentation 3 Calculated Members 35 Year to Date Amount Year to Date Gift count Esllamount previous year E Count previous year E of Previous Year Amount E of Previous Year Count E Avg Amount You can add the following items to a cube Dimensions similar to fields in a relational database Measures numeric values assigned to dimensions Calculated Members during creation of some data marts calculated members are created These special types of measures are not stored in the database rather they are instead calculated on the fly You can also create these types of measures Refreshing Data in Cubes You can process the data in a cube at any time by selecting Refresh in the action bar and specifying a cube Only the data in that particular cube is refreshed When you right click a cube on the Cubes page you can also unmark the Automatic Refresh checkbox to specify that a cube not be refreshed when the analytic to which it belongs is refreshed You can also do this from the Tools menu when you have a cube selected A warning message appears stating that the cube will not be refreshed during scheduled updates of the analytic You may want to turn off automatic processing for a cube if for example a cube contains data that does not change often or contains data that is not time sensitive By not including such a cube in your scheduled data mart refreshe
280. k Finish You return to the Expression screen Properties x Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Expression RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT Blackbaud RFM gt 333 B Right Click to select field from list Expression Wizard Preview Value for fields that meet this criteria Use this value True C Use this field BiziNTEL 1b z 13 Your expression now appears in the Expression box When you click Preview a message appears indicating how many records are selected by the expression 2280 4 Ce 200 APPENDIX A The data type for the smart field restricts your options for setting a field value for records that meet the criteria The value for the field must be valid for the data type and only fields with values of the same type are available for the Use this field option If on the Expression Wizard Select Field screen you selected a field from a table other than the target table a SQL Server message appears informing you that the column prefix name does not match the table name used in the query In this case you need to create a subquery to join the tables For more information about subqueries see Expression Smart Field Examples on page 296 14 Enter the value that you want to appear in the table for fields that meet the criteria of this smart field You can select the option to Use this val
281. k Next to access the Attribute Options tab For more information about this tab see Completing the WriteBack Attribute Options tab on page 121 If you are editing the properties of an existing WriteBack click OK to save your changes and exit the WriteBack Wizard A119 e CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the WriteBack Query Options tab 1 While creating or editing a query WriteBack select the Query Options tab E WriteBack Wizard idi 2 Enter a Static Query Name The query appears with this name in Raiser s Edge searches and on the Query page Mark the Overwrite any existing queries with the same name checkbox if you want this query to replace one with the same name in The Raiser s Edge If you are creating a WriteBack from a Pivot Table Drill Through click OK to create your query If you are creating a new WriteBack from the Configuration tree view click Next to access the Filter tab For more information see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing WriteBack click OK to save your changes and exit the WriteBack Wizard CONFIGURATION 121 gt Completing the WriteBack Attribute Options tab 1 While creating or editing an attribute WriteBack select the Attribute If you write back Options tab attributes to a category on records that already have E writeBack Wizard OF x an entry in that category File Edit View Help the existing entry
282. l Discount export definition click Finish If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs 100 72 CHAPTER 3 Smart Fields Smart fields are fields you create to increase your flexibility when working with Information Edge data Many smart field types are included in The Information Edge You can use these types to create smart fields for specific tables in your data marts Your smart fields are then populated with your data and can be incorporated into OLAP cube interactive reports WriteBacks and if you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module segmentations Analysts will find smart fields especially beneficial because they can be used to determine ratios and other metrics such as Median Mode and Average Smart fields enable you to create additional calculated derived fields to use in The Information Edge Once you create a smart field it is automatically repopulated and recalculated from source data each time you refresh a data mart Smart fields can be used as building blocks You can create smart fields then use those smart fields to create other smart fields For example you can create a smart field for donors that gave at least one cash gift of 100 or more in the last twelve months You can then use this smart field to create another smart field that shows donors that gave at least one cash gift of 100 or more in the last twelve months an
283. l Discount tab 000008 99 Adding a smart field i oc e CERE req dede at 101 CONFIGURATION 25 N Completing the smart field General tab lllllleleleleeees 102 Completing the smart field Type tab 0 0 00 0 eee eee eee 103 Completing the smart field Tables tab 2 0 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 104 Completing the smart field Criteria tab 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 105 Completing the smart field Filter tab 00 0 0 cece eee ee ee 106 Completing the smart field Advanced tab 0 0 0 0 00000 107 Setting the order in which smart fields are processed 4 111 Adding Selection ose da rede lad nis alae die ER Rak 111 Completing the Selection General tab 0 0 0 00 0 0 e eee eee 112 Completing the Selection Criteria tab 2 0 0 eee eee eee 113 Completing the Selection Results tab 117 Adding a new WriteBack 0 0 0 eee eee eee 118 Completing the WriteBack General tab 0 0 0 0 cee eee eee 119 Completing the WriteBack Query Options tab 00000 120 Completing the WriteBack Attribute Options tab 121 Completing the WriteBack Filter tab 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 122 Creating a Publication 2 eee eee es 124 Viewing a Publication 00 0 eee eens 125 Scheduling automatic data mart processing 0 0 cece eee ee 127 Adding a data source 1 0
284. l data source appears 4 Ifyou are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Publications tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure 5 Ifyou are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs 56 _2 CHAPTER 3 After you create a data mart to edit its properties select the data mart in the tree view right click on it and select Data Mart Properties gt Completing the FE Express Publications tab 1 While creating or editing an FE Express data mart select the Publications tab General Export Definition i Raiser s Edge Source Additional Tables A Exports Vo Available items HTML Publications No Available items Cancel lt Back NE Finish If you are creating a data mart no items are available for processing yet If you are editing an existing mart any exports and HTML Publications you have created are available as checkboxes Specify which of these items you would like to process automatically when the data mart is processed When you create exports or HTML Publications on a client machine you can specify an output path on the client machine However because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the HTML Publication or export to the specified output path on the server If the path does not exist on the server the HTML Publication or Export f
285. las you can indicate it be displayed as a string with formatting such as currency percent etc MDX This is the MDX CREATE COMMAND statement that defines this particular command Click the ellipses to access the Edit MDX screen NonEmptyBehavior Stores the name of the measure used to resolve NON EMPTY queries in multidimensional expressions If this property is blank the calculated member must be evaluated repeatedly to determine if a member is empty If the NonEmptyBehavior property contains the name of a measure the calculated member is treated as empty if the specified measure is empty SolveOrder Returns a Long specifying the value of the calculated member s solve order multidimensional expression argument The default value is zero Solve order determines two things the order in which dimensions members calculated members custom rollups and calculated cells are evaluated and the order in which they are calculated The member with the highest solve order is evaluated first but calculated last CUBECOMMAND is parent to the COMMANDMDX element which can be used to create multi dimensional expressions for calculations within the cube 253 47 254 x CHAPTER 6 JOINKEY Attributes Comments ForeignKeyField A join key maps to multiple data sources Specify a ForeignKeyField that refers to the primar
286. ld also restricts your options for setting a default value for records that do not meet your criteria Any entry in the Use this value field must be valid for the output data type for example a date for a Date type field and only fields with a matching data type appear in the Use this field dropdown 274 oe APPENDIX A Concatenation Category Miscellaneous What it Does A Concatenation smart field joins the contents of two or more fields or text values When Would I use a Concatenation Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to combine data from multiple fields For example you may have a data mart created from a database that stores First Name and Last Name as separate fields You could use a Concatenation smart field to combine these into a single Full Name field Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Concatenation smart field you must specify the field values or text strings you want to join together as the entry for this field For more information see the following procedure gt Adding Concatenation smart field criteria When creating a Concatenation smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x General Type Tables Criteria Fiter Advanced Input parameters Add 3 Remove M Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel jJ la SMART FIELD DETAILS 275 7 N 2 To specify the information to be concatenated click Add under the Input
287. ld and drill through to the source Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge records Additionally you can group these records into a static Raiser s Edge query or add attributes to them For more information see Accessing Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge Records from Pivot Tables on page 152 You can place your most frequently viewed reports on a personal dashboard which enables you to quickly get information as you need it Reports are live so each time you view them whether in Analytics Configuration or as part of a dashboard they include the latest information from your Information Edge database For more information see Dashboards on page 15 ANALYTICS Pivot Tables Pivot Tables are tools you can use to create custom views of your information by dragging and dropping information gathered by The Information Edge Pivot Tables provide a multidimensional view of the information you choose to include You can rotate the rows and columns of a Pivot Table to see different summaries of your data filter your data by displaying different pages or display the details for specific areas of interest Additionally if you have The Raiser s Edge you can drill through to open a Raiser s Edge record directly from the Pivot Table a The Information Edge File View Go Tools Actions Help Configuration Data Marts Data Sources Schedules Security Custom Properties
288. lds or data marts clicking Refresh begins the process for that item If the selected item cannot be refreshed tables clicking the button displays a dropdown list of items that can be refreshed You can also view dependencies for selected Information Edge objects Dependencies are other items that would be affected if you edited or deleted the selected item For more information see Dependencies on page 21 You can try optional modules before purchasing them For more information contact solutions blackbaud com aly CHAPTER 2 Changing Grid Displays You can change the columns in most Information Edge grids by right clicking For example when you right click on the Data tab of a Table grid a screen appears on which you can select the fields that appear in the grid General Informatior New v SJa dd to Dashboard BIZINTEL In RIZINTFI RF RErnRenin nin SYI 185 BIZINTEL ID 186 BIZINTEL_RE_RECORSDID 187 185 BIO SYSTEM ID 189 BIO NAME tot BIO ID 192 BIO KEY INDICATOR 193 BIO_CONSTIT_CODE ten BIO_GENDER 196 BIO_AGE 197 PREF_ADDRESS_ADDRLINE1 198 TE PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE2 200 PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 ES PREF ADDRESS CITY 203 PREF ADDRESS STATE 204 PREF ADDRESS ZIP 205 206 Reset to defaults 207 More options 208 GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE 15 When you select More options the Customize Columns screen appears Cust
289. lendar month 283 316 APPENDIX A When Would I use a This Month Smart Field Use this field to flag donors who gave at least one gift during the last month Criteria On the Criteria tab for a This Month smart field you must specify the date field to be used This Year Category Fundraising What it Does A This Year smart field indicates donors who have given in the current calendar year When Would I use a This Year Smart Field Use this field to flag donors who gave at least one gift during the last year Criteria On the Criteria tab for a This Year smart field you must specify the date field to be used USA ZIP Distance Category Geographic What it Does A USA ZIP Distance smart field calculates the distance in miles between two ZIP codes When Would I use a USA ZIP Distance Smart Field If you are visiting an area you may want to find out which of your constituents live nearby so you can visit them You can enter a ZIP code and determine how far donors live from that ZIP code based on their preferred address Criteria On the Criteria tab for a USA ZIP Distance smart field you must select a ZIP CODE address field and then enter the ZIP CODE from which you want to determine the distance from those field values Financial Smart Field Calculations The Information Edge smart fields use calculations that are equivalent to some calculations in Excel If you use one of the Excel calculations be
290. length of time between child records for selected time range When Would I use a Latency Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the length of time between gifts from constituents Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Latency smart field you must first specify the date field to be used and whether all records will be included or only those within a specified date range Then you must select an Interval type days weeks etc Finally specify whether this interval should be between first and last gifts or between consecutive gifts If you choose consecutive specify whether the list of gifts should show the shortest or longest interval Latest Gift Category Fundraising What it Does A Latest Gift smart field indicates the most recent gift given by a donor in a specified date range When Would I use a Latest Gift Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine when donors gave most recently Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Latest Gift smart field you must specify the date field to be used and whether all records will be included or only those within a specified date range List Category Miscellaneous What it Does A List smart field creates a comma separated list of values When Would I use a List Smart Field Use this field in tandem with a Concatenation smart field to list a donor name followed by each appeal she has donated to separated by commas Criteria On the Criteria tab for
291. letters numbers and underscores Next gt Finish Cancel Z 3 You can optionally enter a Friendly Name that may be easier to recognize on reports because unlike the Column Name you can use spaces and other punctuation in a friendly name You can also optionally enter a Description For example you can include the function of the field to make it easier to identify on the main Smart Fields page 4 If you are creating a new smart field click Next to access the Type tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard CONFIGURATION 103 A gt Completing the smart field Type tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the Type tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x General Type Tables Criteria Filter Advanced Category Miscellaneous njth Item Concatenation Date Interval Smart Field will determine the number of day week month or year boundaries crossed between two specified dates Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel A 2 You can view all smart fields or select a specific Category Select a type of smart field based on the calculation you want to perform For example you may want to select Average to create a smart field that includes average gift amounts for donors When you select a smart field type addit
292. lication or Export fails In this case you need to create the same path on the server to enable the export or HTML Publication to process If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you are creating a new data mart click Finish to install the data mart A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view RE Express data mart tables contain several ID fields that are generated automatically For more information about these fields see BIZINTEL IDs in RE Express Data Marts on page 46 CONFIGURATION Adding Data from Other Tables to an RE Express or FE Express Data Mart You can include data from sources and tables outside The Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge in Express data marts You have the choice of adding data as a new table in the data mart or appending data from another source to a Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge table in the data mart You can add data in CSV Access Excel and SQL Server formats gt Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart 1 Select the Additional Tables tab when creating or editing an RE Express or FE Express data mart EJ New Data Mart x General Refresh Options Export Definition Cube Options Additional Tables Publications 3FjAdd XRemove ES Properties Cancel lt Back Next gt
293. low to derive certain values in spreadsheets you can use the corresponding smart field to derive that value in The Information Edge Depreciation DDB Returns the depreciation of an asset for a Smart Field Excel Formula Description specified period using the double declining balance method or some other method you specify Effective Annual Interest EFFECT Returns the effective annual interest rate Rate Future Value FV Returns the future value of an investment SMART FIELD DETAILS Smart Field Interest Payment Excel Formula IPMT Description Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period Interest Rate RATE Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity Net Present Value NPV Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate Number of Periods NPER Returns the number of periods for an investment Payment on Principal PPMT Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period Periodic Payment PMT Returns the periodic payment for an annuity Present Value PV Returns the present value of an investment Straight line Depreciation SLN Returns the straight line depreciation of an asset for one period Sum of Years Digits SYD Returns the sum of years digits Depreciation depreciation of an asset for a specified period 317 318 2 APPENDIX A
294. lue from a field be used or enter one in the text box 6 If you are creating a new WriteBack click Next to access the Filter tab For more information see the next procedure 12237 CHAPTER 3 If you are editing the properties of an existing WriteBack click OK to save your changes and exit the WriteBack Wizard gt Completing the WriteBack Filter tab 1 While creating or editing an attribute WriteBack select the Filter tab E wiiteBack Wizard OI x Ele Edit View Help dis General Attribute Option Include all records C Select records based on Smart Field mM Value C Select records based on expression Table RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT lt Back Next Cancel Help Finish 2 Mark the Include all records from option to select all records from the defined constituent table Mark the Select records based on Smart Field option to filter based on a smart field value The Field dropdown contains only those smart fields associated with a table containing a known Raiser s Edge constituent ID For example smart fields from the SEGMENTATION_DATA table do not appear in the dropdown because that table does not include a constituent ID field Select the Value that records must have to be included in the WriteBack Mark the Select records based on expression option if you want to use a SQL expression to filter records The available Tables in the dropdo
295. lues that will be processed by this smart field For this example select the Constituent table as the target 6 Click Next The Criteria tab appears SMART FIELD DETAILS E 7 For this example select an Output Data type of Text Now we need to specify a default value for fields that do not meet the criteria we will specify later in this procedure Select the Use this value option and enter Not Current as the value To create a condition click Add The Expression screen appears 9 Click Expression Wizard The Select Field screen appears Expression Wizard x Select Field Choose the field For which you wish to create an expression in this step Ol Gifts Amount Appeal BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL PARENTID BIZINTEL RE ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID Campaign Fund SEGMENTATION DATA ID zl 10 Under the GIFTS table select DATE 11 Click Next The Select Condition screen appears Expression Wizard x Select Condition Choose the desired condition and supply any necessary values for Gifts Date in this step m Condition r Value is equal to 12 31 2004 m is not equal to is one of is not one of is less than is less than or equal to is greater than or equal to is between is not hehueen zl Back Len Cancel 12 In the Condition frame select is greater than In the Value field enter 12 31 2004 282
296. m Smart Field Use this field to flag the lowest value gifts from your donors Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Minimum smart field you must select the field for which you want to select the lowest value Mode Category Statistical What it Does A Mode smart field returns the most frequently occurring value for a field in a one to many relationship 303 304 APPENDIX A When Would I use a Mode Smart Field Use this field to flag the most frequently given gift amount from your donors Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Mode smart field you must select the field for which you want to select the most frequently occurring value Monitored Field Query Category Miscellaneous What it Does Monitored fields enable you to track changes to your data over time A Monitored Field Query smart field tracks the value of a monitored field during a time period you specify Additionally this smart field enables you to move information from the monitored field table onto the parent table When Would I use a Monitored Field Query Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to discover trends in your data based on changes to a monitored field over time Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Monitored Field Query smart field you must select the monitored field on which this smart field will be based and specify the dates which will be used to compare changes in the data For more information see the following pr
297. mart from an Access database on page 226 and Creating a data mart from an Excel spreadsheet on page 230 Re7Field Can use Re7SpecialFieldEnum to specify a value of None ConstituentID GiftID GiftAmount GiftDate GiftFund or GiftAppeal ConstituentID indicates that the field has the same value as the ID field in the RERECORDS table GiftAmount is used with the Marketing Segmentation optional module when totaling gift amounts GiftID is used to indicate which field in the table matches the ID field in GIFT in The Raiser s Edge The others are reserved for future use NoIndex Set NoIndex to true on every field except those that will be used as criteria for smart fields or dimensions or fields that are foreign keys that will be used during joins between tables For more information see Indexing Fields on page 255 NumericPrecision Specifies the maximum number of digits in a fixed precision numeric data type NumericScale Determines how many digits to the right of the decimal point are used to represent values for a numeric Parameter or Field object SOURCESET The SOURCESET element is used to define the source of the data such as a SQL statement for an OLEDB source You will use this element for most SQL data sources including ODBC and OLEDB You can define more than one source as input for a single table SOURCESET has a number of child elements
298. matically generate the xml structure For the selected tables and views CHAPTER 6 3 To locate a particular SQL Server database click the ellipses button beside the Connection string field The SQL Server Connection String Wizard screen appears f SQL Server Connection String Wizard Enter the appropriate information needed to Form a SQL Server connection string Login name assword Application Name 4 Specify the SQL Server Instance on which the database is located the authentication information that The Information Edge will use to connect to the database and the name of the database As you add information the connection string appears at the bottom of the screen UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 5 Click OK to return to the Microsoft SQL Server Wizard screen where the connection string now appears f Microsoft SQL Server Wizard Enter a SQL Server connection string and click OK to automatically generate the xml structure For the selected tables and views Database FE SAMPLEDATA Server local Integrated Security C dbo ACCOUNTSECURITY C dbo ACTIONREMINDERS C dbo ADDRESSLINKPHONES C dbo ADDRESSLINKS C dbo ADDRESSPHONES C dbo ADJUSTMENTS C dbo AGINGBUCKETS C dbo AP1099BOXES CO dbo AP71099MANUALAMTS C dbo AP7ATTRIBUTETYPES C dbo AP CONSOLIDATIONLINKS C dbo AP7CREDITMEMO1099DISTRIBLUITIONS C dbo APZCREDITMEMOAPPLICATIONS C
299. mber is an implied parent for every dimension We can examine this principle by creating Percent of Dimension Total and Percentage of Parent Total members that are both based on showing the gift Amount as a percentage by Date The two calculated members can appear on a Pivot Table as follows Year Quarter Month PercentDimTotal PercentParentTotal 2001 6 0396 6 03 2002 40 47 40 47 2003 27 50 27 50 2004 26 01 26 01 Grand Total 100 00 In this display the PercentDimTotal and PercentParentTotal amounts match exactly except for the Grand Total row This is because for every value except Grand Total the percentage of the Date dimension by Year and the percentage of the parent of the Year Dimension Date are the same values The Grand Total row however is different because it is actually displaying the All Member dimension Because All Member has no parent no value displays for the PercentParentTotal member CONFIGURATION When we expand the table to show children of the Date dimension we begin to see some more variations between the two calculated members Year Quarter Month PercentDimTotal PercentParentTotal 2001 6 03 6 03 2002 40 47 40 47 2003 27 50 27 50 62004 Quarter 1 17 02 65 44 Quarter 2 3 1896 12 2396 El Quarter 3 2 16 8 30 E Quarter 4 3 65 14 03 Total 26 01 26 01 Grand Total 100 00 Differences in
300. months 6 Click OK to generate your bins and return to the Criteria tab Blackbaud Transaction Data Category Financial What it Does A Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field copies data from a Blackbaud subledger to the TRANSACTIONS table When Would I use a Blackbaud Transaction Data Smart Field Use this smart field when you want constituent and gift information to appear on the transactions table If you specified a relationship between an RE Express data mart when creating an FE Express data mart you can pull Raiser s Edge constituent and gift information onto the Transactions table for each transaction Criteria On the Criteria tab for an Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field you must select the type of data you want to output and other information For more information see the following procedure AL 272 2 APPENDIX A gt Adding Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field criteria 1 When creating a Blackbaud Transaction Data smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x Filter Advanced General Type i Output data type Currency Default value NULL C Use this value C Use this field B ZINTEL GL TRANSACTIONS SYSTEM ID System Record Type Value Target Table FE EXPRESS GL TRANSACTIONS JAdd J Remove M Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 1 la 2 Select an Output data type for the field When you
301. n Once you create a segmentation you must then activate it by specifying a way to distinguish donations made as a result of the segmentation from all other donations received by your organization For more information see Activating Segmentations on page 193 You may want to base segmentations on previous marketing campaigns statistical scoring such as recency frequency monetary values or biographical traits such as age or gender You can specify fixed costs such as processing by a mailing house in the segmentation additionally you can specify variable costs such as cost per piece A variety of features are available in The Information Edge to help you analyze the success of your individual segmentations including Lift Charts Cumulative Response Charts and Response Percent by Segment Charts Additionally when you create segmentations a cube called Segmentation Data is automatically created so you can use the analytical tools in The Information Edge to compare and contrast information from all your segmentations For more information see Analyzing Segmentations on page 198 Navigating in Segmentation When you select Segmentation in the navigation bar the Segmentation page appears E The Information Edge Bixi Go Tools Actions Help peace Groma Cor ily DataMarts Da tion Schedules Security cNew 23 gt lt GA SiRefresh 73 EARE Express Name Description Status
302. n an OLTP system to produce reports containing vast amounts of data possibly from a variety of sources The Information Edge inverts this pyramid by making multidimensional report data available to decision makers virtually instantaneously The Information Edge enables those that need information to get it in seconds and it provides the ability to analyze data with a choice of desktop viewers and interactive tools including Pivot Tables Charts Crystal Reports and Internet Explorer The Information Edge and Other Blackbaud Software Although The Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge are not required to use The Information Edge combining the strengths of the programs helps you better manage your fundraising efforts The Information Edge enables you to achieve the best value from other Blackbaud products through analytical reporting The three programs are highly integrated Because The Information Edge is designed by the creators of The Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge the integration is seamless The Information Edge is able to manage daily changes to data in the other programs and can provide reporting back into them OVERVIEW Ra CHAPTER 1 The Information Edge uses data provided from the Export functionality in The Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge It transforms this data into an optimal design for high speed analysis and reporting Using The Information Edge you can create reports that are interactive easy to na
303. n create a duplicate of the original report gt Copying a report 1 From the navigation bar select Analytics The Analytics page appears 2 Select the report you want to copy and click Copy in the action bar The Report Wizard General tab appears Report Wizard Chart xi General Data source arts xf Name Copy Of Giving By Age Description IV All users may access this Repor v All users may modify this Report 3 The Name defaults to lt Copy of selected report gt The Description defaults to that of the original report on which the copy is based The description is not required but can help identify the report in the tree view 4 Specify whether you want other users to be able to view and edit the report If you do not mark either checkbox only you will be able to view it 5 Click OK You return to the Analytics main page where the new report now appears in the content window on the right ANALYTICS Deleting and Moving Reports An administrator can delete any user created report If it is viewable by others the report is removed from all views and dashboards You can move the location of a report to another folder If you move a report that is viewable by others into a folder that is not the report is removed from any other users views and dashboards Dashboards Dashboards enable you to view specific reports simultaneously D UNICUM Qs Dashboards Dashboards SITE RS
304. n or promise to pay exists Generally these pledges are valued using the published IRS charitable gift rate on the date of the gift The rate does not change over the life of the pledge Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Pledge Valuation smart field you must specify the information that will determine how pledges are valued For more information see the following procedure gt Adding Pledge Valuation smart field criteria 1 When creating a Pledge Valuation smart field select the Criteria tab Smart Field Wizard Pledge_Valuation x Pledge Valuation Parameters Specify the parameters to be used in calculating the pledge value Interest rate Field Federal Interest Rate Percent per period Field Periods Per Year Cash flows BALANCE e Order cash flows by fore el IV Irregular cash flow Irregular _Payment_ Schedules inreg Pledge date DATE lt Back L ves Cancel SMART FIELD DETAILS 2 Inthe Interest rate field indicate the discount rate to apply to pledges If you are using the Core Solution the value is based on a Federal Interest Rate smart field included in the solution and you will need to enter the appropriate values in the smart field s properties Otherwise you need to create a field to track the changing interest rate over time and select that field here 3 In the per period field you can specify to use a Value and enter
305. n right click in the Expression box and select Insert a Subquery Only tables with which the source table has a relationship are available in this case only the GIFTS table Select GIFTS Properties Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Select All The subquery expression appears Properties Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the Fields that meet this criteria SELECT COUNT RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS BIZINTEL_ID FROM RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS WHERE RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS BIZINTEL_PARENTID RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL ID paeo 7 283 284 d APPENDIX A 18 19 20 2 Now that you have created the join between the two tables you must add the original statement specifying the date Click Expression Wizard and on the Select Field screen again select DATE from the GIFTS table Click Next and on the Select Condition screen specify is greater than 12 31 2004 Click Finish to return to the Expression screen Properties Lx Expression Enter the expression to be evaluated as well as the value to be assigned to the fields that meet this criteria Expression SELECT COUNT RE EXPRESS GIFTS BIZINTEL ID FROM RE EXPRESS GIFTS WHERE RE EXPRESS GIFTS BIZINTEL PARENTID RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL ID and RE EXPRESS GIFTS DATE
306. n the Criteria tab for a Bin smart field you must the specify the field containing values you want to group and create and name the bins they will be grouped into You can specify the criteria for each bin manually or you can let The Information Edge create them based on information you provide For more information see the following procedure SMART FIELD DETAILS 269 gt Adding BIN smart field criteria 1 When creating a BIN smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard 2 To manually create a bin click Add The Description screen appears Properties Description Enter the bin name as well as the minimum value For the field to be considered For inclusion in this bin 3 Enter a Bin name and a Minimum value for inclusion in the bin 4 Click OK You return to the Criteria tab where the bin you created appears in the box You can create the rest of your bins this way or you can create them automatically all at the same time For more information see the next procedure d 270 2 APPENDIX A gt Generating bins automatically 1 To discard all the default ranges and automatically generate new ones based on the number of bins you want to use or a specific increment between bins click Generate on the Criteria tab of a Bin type smart field 2 A message informs you that generating bins will overwrite all existing bins If you want to discard all
307. ncluded in it The export fields are grouped by export type available within each product in The Financial Edge suite If you want to use an export you already defined in another FE Express data mart click Copy from Click Save to save the export as a file or Load to use an export you previously saved as a file You may want to save an export as a file if you plan to use it in other data marts so that instead of recreating the export you can load the saved file _ 49 Ce t 7 j P 50 CHAPTER 3 At least one checkbox must be marked under a product to enable editing the export for it 4 To edit or add fields for a particular export mark the checkbox for it and click Edit Export on the lower right of the screen The export parameter tabs for the tables in that particular export appear E FE Express Data Mart OF x File Edit View Help P Save and Clese 1 Filters z Output mOpen Clear All Filters Selected Fiters Products and Billing Items lt All Products and Billing Items gt Products and Billing Item T All lt All Products and Billing Item Types gt Product and Billing Item Att All lt All Product and Billing Item Attributes gt Back Next gt Cancel The export parameter tabs include the same options as those for creating an export from The Financial Edge For more information about these tabs see the Financial Edge Export Guide or press
308. nconsistencies in your entries such as St versus Street This would change entries on some records however changes made in this manner would not appear in an incremental refresh 6 Establish the Frequency for the schedule The available options change according to your selections For example if you select to refresh on a specific day each month additional options appear for you to select a day 7 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Schedules tab where the new schedule now appears Configuration Data Marts Data Sources Schedules Security Custom Properties jNew lt jOpen gt Delete Disable Description Once you establish a schedule for automatically processing data in data marts you can click Open if you want to change the schedule or add or remove data marts for it You can click Delete to delete the schedule If you remove the schedule it is removed from all data marts included in it If you want to temporarily disable a scheduled refresh for a data mart for example a refresh may be scheduled for a time when your server will be offline for maintenance click Disable When you are ready for the schedule to resume you can click Enable 8 Click Close to exit the Data Mart Schedules screen and return to the console Data Sources You can view and add Raiser s Edge database sources to The Information Edge You can add a source manually if you want to view properties as you add it
309. ncremental CurrentTimeStampSQL SELECT CURRENT TIMESTAMP TimeStampFormat yy y y MM dd HH mm ss ON lt FIELDSET gt J ID ACTION ID USER ID SEQUENCE IMPORT ID EJ lt SOURCESET gt DataProvider EJ ACTION SOLICITOR C ActionAttributes 71 ACTION ATEGORIES z Incremental Properties For incremental refresh mode New XML definition Vi SQL Server Connection Enhancements Several new features and wizards have been added to make connecting with SQL Server data sources easier SQL Server Wizard In previous versions you could access the OLEDB Wizard to get started creating a USC data mart even if the datasource was actually a SQL Server source To make accessing a SQL Server source even more convenient there is now a specific wizard for SQL Server that lists out all tables and views for a SQL Server database and has a friendlier connection string screen 210 CHAPTER 6 This wizard does not round trip Through the wizard a set of lt TABLE gt lt FIELDSETS gt etc elements is created but from that point on you have to manually edit any elements attributes that you want to change However you can also use the new SQL Table Wizard which does support round tripping Connection String Wizard A new wizard is available when specifying a connection string for SQL
310. ncrementally checkbox to decrease processing time by specifying that the smart field be processed only for new or changed records This checkbox is available only on the following types of smart fields Bin Condition Expression Aggregate smart fields including Average Count Min Max Standard Deviation and Sum When you mark the Index this smart field checkbox an index is created when the smart field is processed While indexes usually increase speed and performance for reporting and data retrieval creating indexes results in a data mart taking longer to process Without an index all the records in a table have to be read before the records can be retrieved With an index on a referenced field only the index has to be read before data retrieval can begin If you find this increased efficiency in reporting preferable to the increase in processing time mark the checkbox An exception is numeric fields that are used in aggregate calculations These fields typically do not need to be indexed Indexing will generally increase performance in most other fields When you mark the Rebuild index checkbox indexes are dropped and then rebuilt during a refresh With the indexes dropped data updates are faster but all the indexes must be rebuilt If the checkbox is unmarked indexes are not dropped so updates are slower but you save the time needed to rebuild the indexes A109 72 110 7 CHAPTER 3 We
311. nd a fixed interest rate When Would I use a Number of Periods Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the number of periods for an annuity Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Number of Periods smart field you must select the Per Period interest rate whether it should be based on a field or value and whether it should be a percentage or decimal In the Per period field enter 1 if the rate is per period otherwise enter a field or value that will determine the per period rate In the Payment amount field enter the payment made each period You can select either field or value When you use a field payments can be treated as either credit positive or debit negative amounts This amount cannot change during the life of the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series of future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Payment on Principal Category Financial What it Does A Payment on Principle smart field calculates the payment for an annuity based on periodic fixed payments and a fixed interest rate When Would I use a Payment on Principle Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the payment amount for an annuity Criteria On the Criteri
312. ndition The available values vary depending on the selected condition Click Finish You return to the screen from which you accessed the wizard and your expression now appears in the Expression box N 83 7 84 2 CHAPTER 3 Wildcard characters are available with some operators Wildcards include for a single character for a series of characters and for a range of characters or several characters Expression and Selection Wizard Conditions The following conditions are available when creating selections or expressions Is equal to When you choose this condition the records in the field must have the exact value you define For example if you choose Constituency Code is equal to Board Member only records with the exact entry of Board Member in the Constituency Code field are selected Is not equal to When you choose is not equal to as your condition the records in the field must not match the value you define For example if you specify Constituency Code does not equal Board Member the condition selects every record that does not have Board Member entered as the constituent code Is one of Choosing is one of as the condition means that records selected must have at least one of the values you define The is one of condition acts as an or between the entries you select For example if you select Campaign Category one of Annual Capital and Event records selected must con
313. nds and Options Lx General Border Fill Data Details Type 3D view Show Hide D s Pie t XY Scatter C o Bubble 3D Exploded Pie On the Type tab you can specify the type of chart you want to display Select a category on the left and a specific type within that category on the right For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help 3D View Tab General Border Fill Data Details Type 3D View Show Hide View Projection mode Ih P Default view rey Rotation 0 Inclination 45 Perspective 20 Lighting Rotation LN ZZ 245 Inclination eed 15 Distortion 50 On the 3D View tab you can specify special viewing effects for the chart These effects vary according to the type of chart you are creating For most charts you can specify the angle of rotation and inclination change the perspective and change the lighting For more information about this tab right click anywhere in the chart and select Help d 158 7 CHAPTER 4 Show Hide Tab General Border Fill Data Details Type 3D view Show Hide Show by default Field list IV ScreenTips IV Field buttons drop zones v Toolbar Let users view IV Commands and Options dialog box v Allow pivot grouping v Allow pivot filtering Selection marks Errors IV Show passive alerts Reset On th
314. nformation Edge segmentation Mark the Create Constituent Appeals checkbox if you want the appeal you specified in step 5 to appear on the Appeals tab of constituent records included in the segmentation Select the Date to include on the Appeals tab of the constituent records and specify a default Response and Comment The comment can be formatted in a variety of ways and includes information about the segment to which the constituent belongs Mark the Create queries during import checkbox if you want to group constituent records included in the segmentation If you want one query containing all the constituent records in the segmentation mark the Create a single query for this segmentation option and specify a Query Name If you want individual constituent queries to be created for each segment within the segmentation mark the Create one query per segment test segment option Enter a Query Name Prefix to make these queries easier to identify 197 7 198 CHAPTER 5 You can include segmentation charts in your Publications For more information see Publications on page 123 9 If you have already imported data and want new queries to replace any previously generated mark the Overwrite existing queries checkbox 10 No others users should be logged into The Raiser s Edge when you import data Click Show Connections to ensure that no other users are connected 11 Click Import Data The information is
315. nformation about this schema see XML Schema Reference on page 241 Ifloading the file takes an excessive amount of time you may need to set the noIndex property to true for some of your fields For more information see the following section 2219 UP Conn d 220 2 CHAPTER 6 gt Completing the Universal Source Connector Publications tab 1 While creating or editing a Universal Source Connector data mart select the Publications tab General Refresh Options USC Definition P A Exports Mo Available fems HTML Publications No Available items Cancel lt Back IE Finish If you are creating a new data mart no items are available for processing yet If you are editing an existing data mart any exports and HTML Publications you have created are available as checkboxes Specify which of these items you would like to process automatically when the data mart is processed When you create exports or HTML Publications on a client machine you can specify an output path on the client machine However because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the HTML Publication or export to the specified output path on the server If the path does not exist on the server the HTML Publication or Export fails In this case you need to create the same path on the server to enable the export or HTML Publication to process If you are e
316. ng table should be truncated and all data removed from the table For a true staging table this will typically be the case However in advanced Extract Transform and Load processes you may want to keep data in the staging table for the purposes of incremental refresh support In those rare cases you can specify False so that the data remains in the table after the refresh 2442 CHAPTER 6 TABLE Attributes Comments TruncateTable Specifies whether data in a table is deleted before a data mart is refreshed If the property is set to True when the data mart is refreshed the table is first truncated deleting all its contents This means that the data mart will be fully refreshed each time A setting of False enables an incremental refresh in certain circumstances Note If the Use Incremental refresh checkbox is not marked on the General tab of the data mart properties all tables are truncated regardless of the setting you specify for this attribute If the checkbox is marked only records that have actually been deleted from the source are removed Setting the TruncateTable attribute to False is not the same as specifying an incremental refresh using the DATAPROVIDER incremental attributes The incremental attributes work only with direct select statements for an ADO NET connection If you want to enable incremental refreshes for other sourceset types you need to set the TruncateTable attrib
317. ng the View General tab 1 While creating or editing a View select the General tab E view Wizard Wis Rests 2 Enter a Name and Description for the View This information appears on the main Views page of Configuration 3 Mark the Create a cube based on the view checkbox so you can create Pivot Tables and Charts to analyze the data in the View 4 If you are creating a new View click Next to access the SQL tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing View click OK to save your changes and exit the View Wizard 82 2 CHAPTER 3 When creating SQL statements always use true table names not friendly names gt Completing the View SQL tab 1 While creating or editing a View select the SQL tab E view Wizard BEES File Edit View Help aa General SOL Resuts SELECT DBO RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITUENT BIZINTEL_ID AS Constituent ID DBO RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO NAME AS BIO NAME DBO RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO AGE AS BIO AGE FROM DB RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT WHERE DBO RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO AGE gt 21 ORDER BY BIO NAME ASC BIO_AGE ASC CA Query Designer Load w j lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish ZZ You can include SQL statements in a variety of ways 2 Youcan enter any valid SQL statement directly into the text box 3
318. ng the data mart manually your current login is used which in most cases will have a printer installed so the error will not occur When using a client server installation the SQL Server Agent operates on the server so the Local System Account or other specified account on the server must have a printer installed 1 In Configuration select the Schedules tab If you see a message stating that SOL Agent is not currently running Schedules will not be processed you must start the service before data marts can refresh on a schedule The SQL Server Agent service must be running on the machine on which The Information Edge database is located To start the service a Select Start Programs Select Microsoft SQL Server Service Manager b Click the down arrow in the Services field and select SQL Server Agent c Click Start Continue You may also want to mark the Auto Start service when OS starts checkbox to ensure the agent runs automatically N Alla 128 2 CHAPTER 3 C If you are scheduling a data warehouse refresh the individual data marts contained in the warehouse should be refreshed first to ensure the warehouse contains the most up to date information Mark the checkboxes by any data marts contained in the warehouse and use the up and down arrows to specify the order in which they should be processed 2 From the action bar select New The Data Mart Schedules screen appears Data
319. ns s teo bates aaa eens 62 Field Statistics xsv ssec e Ele eee Dr Race ee dg ea 62 Data VAD v 640 E E oe ee ee ew de hd bees ae 63 uad ul are 63 Refreshing Data in Cubes lilseseeleeeeeeeee eens 64 Adding Dimensions 0 00 c eee eee rn 65 e Adding Measures eco ace ce e eG da ese guten deste tds 66 Adding Calculated Members 0 0 0 ee 67 Calculated Member Templates 000 eee eee eee 69 Parameter sss sc 2 dese dod 6 16s 9930 a wei eters E e an eti rU rU Eee 75 Parameter Filter Wizard 0 0 0 cece ees 78 Tips for Creating Parameters 0 cece ene eh 79 bal c EE 80 Expression Wizard 0 eh 83 Expression Wizard Conditions 0 0 00 c eee ence eee eee 84 Snapshots ie side esis ccc me pe her pe E eee Ere EE RU E REPE SoM EE 86 Monitored Fields eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nn 87 Repofr s vere m t ru n RE See en HOTS RUE EOTUEEF D URN EECES 89 EXDOF S 35 05 I e re hy eres RLPE SEE RM ESEXEEUME TEE PPP FE 89 Excel Pivot Exports 0 cc cece cece hh hh 95 Postal Discount Exports llssseeeeeeeeee n 97 smart Fields 22cs den ee hene RR p RR UE aioe be we ens 100 Creating Smart Fields iesus eese s e x xe RE A E E aes 100 Smart Field Dependencies 0 cece eens 110 Smart Field Processing Order 0 0 2 0 00 c eee eens 110 SClECHONS PC 111 Creating Selections es suie o
320. nse rate so Yo Gift amount 500 00 L Create test segments for each segment Package v M3 Sy Cost Response rate 502 Yo Gift amount p0 Sample size sa Percent gt Help OK Cancel A 2 Choose the Field containing the values on which the segmentation will be based You can also click the icon and create a new smart field MARKETING SEGMENTATION 18 _ Packages are the mailings available for a segmentation If you want to assign a default package for all segments in the segmentation enter the package in the Package field You do not have to specify a default package but if you do it is only a default You can specify other packages for specific segments after you generate the segments For information about adding packages see Packages on page 183 You can enter an expected Response rate to your mailing You can also specify the expected Gift amount from respondents Entering this information enables you to compare the expected versus actual response rate when you analyze the segmentation later To enable test segments mark the Create test segments for each segment checkbox If you mark the checkbox you can specify settings for test segments as subsets of your main segments It is important to understand the difference between test segments and test segmentations A test segment is useful if you have a new package or appeal you are introducing When creating test segment
321. ocales other characters may be used to represent the time separator Date separator In some locales other characters may be used to represent the date separator dd Displays the day as a number with a leading zero for example 01 MM Displays the month as a number with a leading zero for example 01 12 01 HH Displays the hour as a number with leading zeros using the 24 hour clock for example 01 15 15 Displays the minute as a number with leading zeros for example 12 01 15 SS Displays the second as a number with leading zeros for example 12 15 05 yyyy Displays the year in four digit numeric format Incremental Command Text Macros and Examples To select the correct records only those that have changed since the last refresh you need to modify the where clause of the command text to contain the following macros LASTENDPOINT the time stamp for the last time the data mart was processed 9 CURRENTENDPOINT the time stamp generated when the data mart starts processing This is set by executing the CurrentTimeStamp SQL statement before the source is processed SQL Server Example This is a simple command text issued against a SQL Server database SELECT FROM P WHERE CUR OR CUR EOPLE ID NAME AGE RENTENDPOINT DATE_LAST_CHANGED BETWEEN LASTENDPOINT
322. ocedure gt Adding Monitored Field Query smart field criteria 1 When creating a Monitored Field Query smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard Oo x General Type Tables Criteria Fiter Advanced Select the monitored field to use as the basis for this smart field Monitored fields for Constituent elo AGE Interval Month Calendar Relative to process date C Last month c m Months ago Changed Between C Asof Sample process date 06 03 2005 If the data mart is processed on 06 03 2005 this field will contain the most recent change between 06 01 2005 and06 30 2006 lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 2 Select the monitored field on which this smart field will be based SMART FIELD DETAILS 3 Select a date Interval For week month quarter or year intervals mark the Calendar option if you want to base them on calendar periods or the Relative to process date option if you want them to be relative to the date a data mart is processed Select a Period based on your Interval entry 4 Specify whether the date range should take place Between two dates or As of a specific date For more information about these options see the next section 5 When you make any selection you can enter a Sample process date at the bottom of the screen The sample text shows how dates are processed according to your selections Monitored Field Query Date Process
323. ocessed the mart For more information see Completing the RE Express Refresh Options tab on page 28 CONFIGURATION 3 You must define the Raiser s Edge export file on which the data mart data is based For more information see Completing the RE Express Export Definition tab on page 32 4 You can specify options such as whether you want to automatically create cubes and measures in the data mart For more information see Completing the RE Express Cube Options tab on page 35 5 You can add data from other tables to the RE Express data mart For more information see Adding data from another source to an RE Express or FE Express data mart on page 39 6 After you add exports WriteBacks and HTML Publications to a data mart you can specify that they process automatically whenever the data mart processes For more information see Completing the RE Express Publications tab on page 38 7 When you are finished establishing the properties of your data mart click Finish to install it A message informs you when the data mart is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view RE Express data mart tables contain several ID fields that are generated automatically For more information about these fields see BIZINTEL IDs in RE Express Data Marts on page 46 gt Completing the RE Express General tab 1 While creating or editing an RE Express data mart select the General tab 2 New Data Ma
324. off UseOpenRowSet ensure that the Use OpenRowSet for fast access to this data source checkbox is not marked in the data source properties available by selecting Data Sources from the Tools menu Then select the source and click Properties N 247 2 a 248 2 CHAPTER 6 Attributes Comments Incremental These attributes enable you to specify criteria used to incrementally update a USC data mart For more information and examples see Incremental Refresh in Universal Source Connector Data Marts on page 255 CurrentTimeStampSQL This provides a way to determine the current date and time from the source system which is needed for an incremental refresh to work properly IDOnlySQL This must be a well formed SQL statement that selects only the primary key field This list of IDs is used to determine which records need to be deleted from the data mart Records in the data mart that are not also in this list are deleted IDsChangedSQL You can specify a SQL statement that returns the set of IDs that have been changed from the standpoint of the incremental timestamp and USC deletes all these rows in a single statement This helps improve the performance of incremental processing and is required when using the FastLoad True attribute to bulk load during an incremental refresh The form of the SQL statement will typically match the FROM and WHERE clause of the CommandText that is configured for incremental
325. oin tables For more information about using subqueries to join tables see Expression Smart Field Examples on page 296 PE 58 _7 CHAPTER 3 If you have the Enterprise version of The Information Edge you can create your own custom data marts using the Universal Source Connector For more information see Universal Source Connector on page 203 After you add a data mart to edit its properties select the data mart in the tree view right click on it and select Data Mart Properties Installing Data Marts Created by Blackbaud You can install a data mart created especially for your organization by Blackbaud Once a data mart is installed into The Information Edge it is added to the tree view in the left pane of the program where you can access functions such as Pivot Tables for each cube in the data mart gt Installing a data mart created by Blackbaud 1 On the menu bar select File New Select Data Mart Core Solutions The Select Core Solutions File screen appears Browse to the location where you saved the file created for you by Blackbaud 2 Select the file and click OK The Select Core Solution file screen appears 3 In the Data Mart Name field the name defaults in for this data mart This name will display for the data mart in the tree view A prefix to display with each table entry for this data mart also defaults into the Table Prefix field Enter text to describe the data mart in Th
326. olmniconsvame OOS O IV This table contains both master and detail records Master columns to include Funds Amount GiftDate GiftType v Key Value For example you would mark the checkbox if you are adding a ticketing database that contains name and address information as well as purchasing history and amounts in one table This checkbox is not enabled for data marts created with RE Express In the Master columns to include box mark the checkbox beside any columns you want to include in the warehouse If your table contains both master and detail columns you should unmark the checkbox by detail records Click OK you return to the Data Marts tab where the data mart now appears Add any other data marts you want to include in the warehouse Mark the Create cubes for each table in the warehouse checkbox if you want to take full advantage of all features in The Information Edge such as Pivot Tables and Charts for the warehouse The only time you may want to unmark this checkbox is if you do not intend to use this warehouse with any interactive features for example you may intend to use the data only in Crystal Reports not in Charts or Pivot Tables If you are creating a new warehouse click Next to access the Publications tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing warehouse click OK to save your changes and exit the pro
327. omize Columns Lx Select the columns you want to view Place a checkmark next to each column you want to see Use the Up and Down buttons to change the order in which the columns will appear V BIO AGE V BIZINTEL ID V BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID V BID SYSTEM ID V BID NAME V BIO ID V BlQ KEY INDICATOR V BID CONSTIT CODE V BIO GENDER V PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE1 V PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE2 V PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 V PREF ADDRESS CITY V PREF ADDRESS STATE V PREF ADDRESS ZIP Reset to Defaults On this screen you can select the columns to appear in the grid and drag and drop them up or down to specify the order in which the columns appear Cancel Dashboards Dashboards offer a convenient central place for you to view Pivot Tables Charts Data Analyzer views and other Information Edge items The first time you access The Information Edge it opens to the Dashboard page To create a Dashboard click New in the action bar and provide a Name and Description When you create the new Dashboard it initially has no content You can add content by right clicking an item in the treeview and selecting Add to Dashboard Because all analysis items you can include on a Dashboard come from data marts if you have not yet created a data mart you must do that before you can include content in the Dashboard For more information see Adding a Data Mart on pa
328. on You must create properties from the Tools menu before you can apply them here For more information about creating custom properties see Custom Properties on page 191 MARKETING SEGMENTATION gt Completing the Segmentation Properties tab You can apply previously created Custom Properties to segmentations segments test segments and packages The method of applying them is similar but accessing Properties differs slightly for each item The following procedure shows how to add Properties to a segmentation 1 When creating or editing a Segmentation select the Properties tab E segmentation Wizard New segmentation p ni x Ele vie Tools Actions Help ave Open ids 0 General Filter Budget Expenses Packages Properties 2 Select a property you want to associate with the segmentation and click Open The Edit Property screen appears Edk Property 0 Property Property Reply env Value Postage Paid x Help Cancel 3 Enter a Value for the property You can enter a new value or click the drop down to select any entry you have previously created for that property 4 Click OK to save your changes 5 To view your defined properties in a Pivot Table or Chart create and activate a segmentation for which you specified a property Then create a Pivot Table or Chart and from the Field Options list drag Segmentation into a drop zone If you added properties to a package yo
329. on 200 lift charts 199 response by segment 199 test segment performance 200 copying 190 creating 174 custom properties 191 exporting 194 filtering 184 importing into The Raiser s Edge 196 packages 183 plug in 196 rearranging order of segments 177 test segmentations 188 understanding 21 selections 111 send data to The Raiser s Edge 19 sequence smart field 313 server SQL logins 135 smart fields average 268 bin 268 concatenation 274 condition 275 contributor 285 copy 285 count 290 creating 100 custom RFM 290 date interval 293 days since 293 decile 293 depreciation 294 effective annual interest rate 294 expression 294 first gift 298 future value 298 interest payment 298 interest rate 299 key value 299 latency 302 latest gift 302 list 302 LYBUNT 302 maximum 303 median 303 minimum 303 mode 303 monitored field query 304 net present value 307 noncontributor 307 nth Item 267 number of periods 307 overview 100 payment on principal 308 percentile 309 periodic payment 309 pledge valuation 309 present value 311 quartile 312 quintile 312 RFM 312 sequence 313 soundex 313 standard deviation 314 straight line depreciation 314 sum 315 sum of years depreciation 315 SYBUNT 315 this month 315 this year 316 understanding 17 USA ZIP distance 316 snapshot tables 86 soundex smart field 313 SOURCESET 245 SQL server logins 135 standard deviation smart fiel
330. on criteria are processed see the next section 6 Use the up and down arrows to specify the order in which the operations are processed 7 f you are creating a new selection click Next to access the Results tab For more information about this tab see Completing the Selection Results tab on page 117 If you are editing the properties of an existing selection click Finish to save your changes and exit the Selection Wizard Selection Criteria Processing Order The order in which you use combining operators when selecting criteria affects the results returned by your statements When more than one operator is used in a statement and operators are evaluated first You can change the order of evaluation by using parentheses For example the statement Gender is equal to Female or Age is greater than or equal to 50 And Gift Amount is equal to 100 returns different results from Gender is equal to Female or Age is greater than or equal to 50 And Gift Amount is equal to 100 These two statements do not return the same results because by default SOL Server processes the and operator first So in the first statement Age is greater than or equal to 50 and GiftAmount is equal to 100 is processed and returns its results then or Gender is equal to Female is processed against only those records returned from the and operation However due to the parentheses in the second statement the or operator
331. on if you want the value derived by the expression to be available for further manipulation for example in another expression or a Pivot Table Mark the Format as n with option if you want the value to display as a string You can specify the number of decimal places you want to display with the percentage You should mark this option only if the expression is complete as a standalone and the value will not be manipulated in another expression Percentage of Parent Total Parameters Show AMOUNT as a percentage of the total for the parent of the current member FUND Preserve the numeric value C Format as n with EE decimal places Expression Type MDX Expression Difference Percentage of measure Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Rank Previous date value Year to date value This expression is somewhat similar to the Percentage of Dimension Total expression except the Percentage of Parent Total calculates the value of a measure as a percentage of the current member s parent dimension For example you can Show Amount as a percentage of the total for the parent of the current member Fund In this case if you look at the cube hierarchy the Fund dimension may not appear to be a child of any other dimension However it is actually a child of the All Member dimension All Member
332. onditions on page 84 c Click Finish You return to the Filter Options screen where your expression appears in the Expression box Only records meeting the criteria of your expression will be included in the export 3 You can click the Check Syntax button to ensure your expression is a valid SQL statement 4 If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you are creating a new export click Finish to save the export A message appears stating that the export has been saved and asking if you want to export the information now 5 Click Yes to export the data and return to the console Your export is saved in the location you specified on the Export Options screen Excel Pivot Exports You can define an export that creates a standalone Pivot table including rows columns and data you specify An Excel Pivot Export contains the same tabs as a standard export as well as an additional tab the Pivot Options tab For information about completing the tabs on a standard export definition see Creating an export definition on page 89 Excel Pivot exports can contain a maximum of 65 536 rows per file l 96 2 CHAPTER 3 gt Completing the Export Pivot Options tab 1 While creating or editing a Excel Pivot export definition select the Pivot Options tab Export Definition PivotTest x General Columns Export Options Pivot Options Fil
333. ons tab Export Definition Ea General Columns Export Options Filters Export type IMEE m EAEE V Include header IV Enclose fields in quotes Open file after export Field delimiter Output type Single file m Dutput path C Mfiles a File name RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT csv Sample path C filesNNE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT csv su Finish 2 Select an Export type If you select Character Delimited you can mark checkboxes to indicate whether you want to Include header and Open the file after export in the program associated with the csv file extension on your computer You can also mark a checkbox to Enclose fields in quotes and select the character you want to use to separate fields in the Field delimiter field If you select the export format of Excel you can specify whether you want to Include header and whether you want to Open the file after export If you select the XML export format you can specify whether you want to Open the file after export in the program associated with the xml file extension on your computer When creating a Postal Discount export the Use fixed column export checkbox is available If you leave this checkbox unmarked during export data shifts to the left to eliminate any blank columns Mark this checkbox if you want to keep any blank columns that may be included in the export In the Output Type field specify whether the export will be a single or multipl
334. optimizations were made to help increase the speed of loading tables particularly during an incremental refresh The USC Incremental refresh option is now more robust Smart fields on a USC data mart can now be specified to process incrementally For more information see Incremental DsChangedSQL on page 208 205 206 CHAPTER 6 d pe M Bulk Load FastLoad Support for DataProvider Sources The lt SOURCESET gt lt DATAPROVIDER gt element has two new attributes that are valid for OLEDB and MSSQL provider types FastLoad and FastLoadBatchSize El The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Edit Tools Help d alr i ag i3 se 1 TreejProperty View Text view web view d lt BIPACKAGE gt CommandText SELECT OOOO ID OO AcTI Gb SHAREDSQLConn1 SHA 5 ACTION REMINDER xl lt FIELDSET gt E FastLoad FastLoadBatchSize lt SOURCESET gt SharedProviderID SHAREDSQLConn1 g DataProvider SourceGuid 3e44a5f0 26cb 43fF2 97b6 40a5e6ad28 E t3 ACTION SOLICITOR SourceType DataProvider 0 ActionAttributes 5 ACTIONCATEGORIES 5 ActionNotepad 0 lt FIELDSET gt 34 lt SOURCESET gt E DataProvider 71 ACTIONS EE CommandText The SQL SELECT statement to use to populate the table
335. or you can click a single button to import all your Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge databases at the same time The Information Edge uses a Raiser s Edge login on SQL Server to connect with The Raiser s Edge database For more information see SQL Server Logins on page 135 gt Adding a data source 1 In Configuration select the Data Sources tab N We recommend you run incremental refreshes often when available to include frequently changing information such as gift and biographical information as well as new records in your data marts You should also occasionally run full refreshes to include data that changes less frequently fund names or code table descriptions in RE Express data marts for example A In a data mart s properties you can select to process exports WriteBacks and HTML Publications automatically each time the mart is refreshed To access properties select the data mart in the tree view right click on it and select Data Mart Properties CHAPTER 3 2 From the action bar select New The Data Source Type screen appears Data Source Data Source Type You can choose the type of Data Source you wish to create in this step The Financial Edge SQL Server 3 Select the source you want to add in the Available types box and click Next Depending on the source you select the Backend Type screen may appear D ata S ource Backend Type Sele
336. or Records For example if you enter 50 and mark Percent the test segment will include a random sampling of records equal to fifty percent of the total records in the parent segment If you enter 50 and mark Records fifty randomly sampled records will be included in the test segment You may want to manually adjust the sample size to ensure segments are equally sized to hold down costs or to account for limits on mailing materials 6 Click OK You return to the Segmentation Wizard The parent segment you selected now has a plus sign beside it Click the plus sign and the test segment appears below the parent 190 CHAPTER 5 The Records column displays the number of records in a segment and the Offers column displays the number of mailing pieces for the segment The Offers column displays the number of pieces in both the parent and test segment so the sum of the offers for a parent and test segment equals the number of records for the segment 7 To view the records included in a test segment click List Members in the action bar A random sampling of records in the test segment appear Because the list is a random sample these members may not necessarily appear in the test segment Only when the segment is activated are the actual records determined that will make up the test segment 8 You can create additional test segments or click Save in the toolbar to save your work gt Adding a test segmentation Y
337. ord ID You will probably never need to use the two IDs related to The Raiser s Edge system record ID BIZINTEL_RERECORSDID and BIZINTEL_REID They exist mainly to enable incremental processing However you may use the BIZINTEL_ID and BIZINTEL_PARENTID fields because they are the Primary Key and Foreign Key used in any JOIN or subquery expression to join tables For more information about using subqueries to join tables see Expression Smart Field Examples on page 296 FE Express The FE Express feature of The Information Edge enables you to bring information into the program from a Financial Edge database When creating an FE Express data mart The Information Edge scans your system to determine which Financial Edge components are available and presents an export screen to help you define the fields you want to export from each of these components The export options are very similar to those in The Financial Edge however certain options may differ slightly in The Information Edge For more information see Completing the FE Express Export Definition tab on page 49 CONFIGURATION For more information about installing an FE Express data mart see the following procedure gt Creating and installing an FE Express data mart 1 On the menu bar select File New Select Data Mart FE Express The New Data Mart screen appears on the General tab For information about entering information on the General tab see
338. ore running the wizard gt Creating a data mart from an Access database 1 From the Information Edge XML Editor Tools menu select Access MDB Wizard The Access MDB Wizard screen appears Microsoft Access Database MDB Wizard x Enter the path to a MDB file and click OK to automatically generate the xml structure for the selected tables Access Database El Include Cancel UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 227 2 2 In the Access Database field browse to the location of the Access database you want to bring into The Information Edge After you select a database you return to the Wizard and the database tables now appear in the Include field Microsoft Access Database MDB Wizard x Enter the path to a MDB file and click OK to automatically generate the xml Access Database C Documents and Settings davidow Desktop ClientContac LJ structure For the selected tables tblCallLog tblContacts tblOrganizations tblReports tblResources tblResults tblSourceOf Contact tblTopics qryCallLogSummary Include SI S S S S S lt lt 3 All tables default as marked to be included in the data mart If you do not want any tables to be included in the data mart unmark the checkboxes by them 4 Click OK You return to the Information Edge XML Editor and the selected tables now appear in the tree view a Th
339. ormation Edge examines The DATE LAST CHANGED field on the records table is updated in the following circumstances CONFIGURATION Any change is made to the data stored in the RECORDS table Mostly this is Biographical information from Bio 1 Bio2 Org 1 and Org 2 tabs Any new record is added Any change to related one to many data that is not a top level entity Such as notepads attributes aliases credit cards addresses phones etc Essentially when a Constituent record is opened and anything in it is changed once Save is clicked the timestamp is updated Both Global Change and Import also follow these same rules This also applies to timestamps for all other records such as Gifts Actions Events and Memberships For example if you add remove or change a gift attribute or soft credit a gift the timestamp on the gift record is updated The only changes that can be made that do not affect timestamps are when things like code tables or campaign fund or appeal names change on the actual entity itself For example if you change a title from Dr to Mr on the record that updates the timestamp However if you change the code table itself in The Raiser s Edge Configuration from something like Dr to Doctor that is not recorded as a change on the RECORDS table How The Information Edge Determines Whether a Record has Changed A changed record from the standpoint of The Information Edg
340. orts are dynamic so each time one is viewed the most up to date information displays When you create your reports you can specify whether or not you want other users to be able to run or change them Creating Reports To create a report you must first specify certain properties for it such as a name and the cube containing the data on which it will be based After specifying properties the designer for the selected type of report appears where you can manipulate and interact with the data gt Adding a report 1 On the Analytics tree view click Reports under the data mart containing the cube on which you want to base a report Click New in the action bar and specify the type of report you want to create 2 The Report Wizard screen appears on the General tab Report Wizard Ea General Report type o Table Name Description Jv Gther users may tun this report v Other users may modify this report 3 Enter a Name to identify the report in the console You can also enter a Description to further help you identify the report 4 The Other users may run this report checkbox is locked as marked so the report can be used by other users of the program If you want to unmark the checkbox you must first unmark the Other users may modify this report checkbox When it is marked other users are able to edit the properties of this report 5 If you are creating a new report click Finish to save the repo
341. ot filtered and 0 for False filtered When you click Filter Wizard on the Expression tab the same conditions are available to help you create an expression as in the Expression Wizard For more information about these see Expression and Selection Wizard Conditions on page 84 When you close the wizard you return to the Expression tab where your statement appears in the Expression box Expression Expression case when RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO CONSTIT CODE Corporate Member then 1 else 0 end If you want to add another condition to the expression place the cursor at the end of the first condition and before the then in the case statement Expression Expression case when RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO CONSTIT CODE Corporate Member then 1 else 0 end Then click Filter Wizard and create the additional statement When you return to the Expression tab AND is added to the statement followed by the second condition Expression Expression Membe RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO GENDER Female then 1 else case rh EXPRESS CONSTITUENT BIO CONSTIT CODE Corporate 0 end d You can add as many filter conditions as necessary in this manner Tips for Creating Parameters When manually writing an expression for a parameter you should explicitly convert to the data type you want the parameter to output If you do not SOL Server guesses which data type th
342. ou can begin creating reports an administrator must create a data mart which contains the data that will be analyzed in your reports 10 CHAPTER 2 When you click Analytics in the navigation bar The Analytics page appears Any available data marts appear in the tree view For each data mart you can generate interactive reports including Pivot Tables Charts and Data Analyzer Views New Delete la Save Rename B Copy X Copy to Clipboard be X S EA 2d Be DATE 7 All DATE GIFTS Count APPEAL 7 El 2000BREAKF AST E 2000DIRECT 2000PHONE o 2001 Phone E 2002 DIRECT E 2002PHONE iil 2003 Direct Mailing E 98ANNUAL E S8PHONE El S8ANNUAL O S98BREAKFAST Bl S9PHONE E ANNUALMAIL E AUCTION O CAMP LETTER For more information see Pivot Tables on page 145 Charts on page 154 and Data Analyzer Views on page 161 Navigating in The Information Edge After you install a data mart many features become available on The Information Edge console The console includes the Information Edge bar on the left and the main content window on the right Menu Bar 2 The Information Edge 2 0 File View Go Tools Actions Help FieldName Alias Lookup Monitored Fiel Information Edge Bar E Gifts C SEGMENTATION DA f Cubes QQ Views 8 Snapshots E Amount agg Monitored Fields BIO AGE GlBIO
343. ou can copy active segmentations to create test segments 1 Select the segmentation you want to copy in the tree view 2 Click Copy in the action bar The Copy Segmentation screen appears E copy Segmentation Winter Mailing Oj xi Use the Copy Feature to create an exact copy of an existing segmentation or create a test segmentation by specifying a default segment sample size Copies will have the same segments as the parent segmentation You can optionally choose to copy packages and test segments as well Default segment sample size 100 Iv Include packages include Standard E I Include test segments T Include Postal Discount Export Expected Response Rates Copy expected response rates C Use actual response rates from this segmentation Expected Gift Amounts Copy expected gift amounts Use average gift amounts from this segmentation 3 Specify a Default segment sample size If you select 100 percent you create an exact copy of the segmentation You can create a test segmentation by specifying a size less than 100 percent 4 Mark checkboxes if you want to Include packages and Include test segments in the copy MARKETING SEGMENTATION 5 The Include Standard Export and Include Postal Discount Export checkboxes are enabled only when copying active segmentations in which you created these types of exports When you mark the checkboxes the export definitions are copied into the new segmentation
344. ource Connector on page 203 GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE To install a data mart click Configuration on the Information Edge bar on the left On the menu bar select File New Data Mart Select the type of data mart you want to install For example when you select to install an RE Express data mart the Properties tabs appear E New Data Mart x Cube Options Additional Tables Publications Name RE Express1 Prefix RE ExPRE SS 1 Description JRE Express Refresh Options Export Definition Dptions Maintain field statistics IV Include support for segmentation Bact Next gt Cancel Help Finish To create a data mart using RE Express you need to create an export to specify the data to be included in the data mart For more information see Creating and installing an RE Express data mart on page 26 You need to perform similar steps to create an FE Express data mart For more information see Creating and installing an FE Express data mart on page 47 For information about installing a data mart provided by Blackbaud see Installing a data mart created by Blackbaud on page 58 After you install a data mart you can use the information in it to create analytical reports in The Information Edge For more information about data marts see Data Marts on page 26 Analytics Analytics are the reports that make up the core of The Information Edge Before y
345. parameters box The Concatenation Field Element screen appears Properties x Concatenation Field Element Select the element to be concatenated Age C Text String 3 Specify whether you want include a field value or text string in the concatenation Click OK to return to the Criteria tab where the information now appears in the Input parameters box Add as many items as you wish to join together Condition Category Miscellaneous After you save a Pe is diti t field What it Does A Condition smart field evaluates one or more conditions you you Fon jh aeih e aia create to determine the value of the field type because doing so could When Would I use a Condition Smart Field Use this smart field when invalidate the smart field you want to specify conditions to create a value for a field For example you may want to create a condition field that shows who has given gifts greater than or equal to a specific amount after a certain date Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Condition smart field you must create the expressions that determine which records are included in the field For more information see the following procedure APPENDIX A gt Adding Condition smart field criteria 1 When creating a Condition smart field select the Criteria tab a Smart Field Wizard BES Filter Advanced Output data type Integer Default value NULL C Use this value Use this field
346. per period field you can specify to use a Value and enter 1 if the interest rate is the per period rate Otherwise enter the value or field to use when determining the per period rate In the Investment amount field select the field that identifies the initial cost of the investment In the Cash flows field select a field to identify values to use for periodic cash flows In the Order cash flows by field select a date field that will be used to sort periodic cash flows in the order in which they were received If there is a field that determines whether the cash flow is irregular mark the Irregular cash flow checkbox Choose the field and the appropriate value for the field Specify an option for when the payments for this investment occur Non Contributor Category Fundraising What it Does A Non Contributor smart field indicates donors that have not given within a specified date range When Would I use a Non Contributor Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine constituents in your database who are not currently giving Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Non Contributor smart field you must select a date field and date range to use when determining non contributor donors Number of Periods Category Financial 307 _ 308 P APPENDIX A What it Does A Number of Periods smart field calculates the number of periods for an annuity based on periodic fixed payments a
347. perties tabs A263 7 264 2 CHAPTER 7 gt Completing the Warehouse Publications tab 1 While creating or editing a Warehouse select the Publications tab 2 New Data Mart x General Data Marts Publications E A Exports No A valable tenrs HTML Publications Mo A valable fens Cancel lt Back Hert Finish If you are creating a warehouse no items are available for processing yet If you are editing an existing warehouse any exports and HTML Publications you have created are available as checkboxes Specify which of these items you would like to process automatically when the warehouse is processed When you create exports or HTML Publications on a client machine you can specify an output path on the client machine However because the Schedule function runs on the server it attempts to output the HTML Publication or export to the specified output path on the server If the path does not exist on the server the HTML Publication or Export fails In this case you need to create the same path on the server to enable the export or HTML Publication to process 2 If you are editing the properties of an existing warehouse click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you are creating a new warehouse click Finish to install the warehouse A message informs you when the warehouse is successfully installed It then appears in the tree view Smart
348. processing but will specify only the ID column in the select statement For example if the CommandText is SELECT ID FIRST NAME LAST NAME OM DBO RECORDS RE RECORDS IS CONSTITUENT AND RECORDS DECEASED 0 ORDS DATE LAST CHANGED EN LASTENDPOINT CURRENTENDPOINT the IDOnlySQL should be ELECT ID DBO RECORDS E RECORDS IS CONSTITUENT AND RECORDS DECEASED 0 I AND wa PI 3S H z C W E O R J ZPT J e Hn o E IQ Q tj O mi ZU RDS DATE LAST CHANGED EN GGLASTENDPOINT URRENTENDPOINT Note that the only difference is in the SELECT clause In more complicated CommandText SQL statements with JOINS included you may or may not need to perform those same joins in the IDOnlySQL the SQL should specify the set of IDs that will match the same criteria as the main CommandText that is used to load the table TimeStampFormat This defines the format for the timestamp field For information about the available format characters see Time Stamp Date Format Characters on page 256 AND wa Pla an UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR Attributes SharedProviderID Comments The ID of a SHAREDPROVIDER element to use for the connection information for this source SourceGUID This is a string u
349. r If the path does not exist on the server the export fails If you are scheduling automatic processing of exports in the mart ensure the same path exists on the server to enable the export to process If you are creating an export that will result in over ten files or folders and you have marked the Open file after export checkbox a message informs you that ten is the maximum number of files that will be opened 4 a 93 7 94 CHAPTER 3 Similar to an export with multiple files the number of folders this export will create appears on screen Depending on your selections some exports may create numerous folders If you are creating an export from the Export Definitions page proceed to the next step If you are creating an export directly from the Data tab of a table or Monitored field or from a View click Finish to save the export to the location you specified If you are creating a new export definition click Next to access the Filters tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs gt Completing the Export Filters tab 1 While creating or editing an export definition select the Filters tab Export Definition x General Columns Export Options Filters Include all records Select records based on a field value Field a 3 Value m
350. r s Edge specify that it run at the end of your fiscal year Use this static query as the basis for your Raiser s Edge export when you install the Pledge Valuation analytic If you do not run the static query at fiscal year end you can modify the gift query to include pledges with payments received between the end of the fiscal year and the date you are processing the pledge values In the analytic data mart properties you can select this query as the basis for filtering gifts in the export definition by clicking Criteria on the Output tab of the Export Definition Installing the Pledge Valuation Analytic To install the Pledge Valuation analytic save the PledgeValuation TIE file you got from Blackbaud in a location accessible from the machine running The Information Edge From The Information Edge menu bar select File New Select Data Mart Core Solution The Select Core Solution screen appears for you to browse to the file Select it and the properties for the Pledge Valuation data mart appear We recommend that you set up a separate data mart specifically for determining values of long term pledges Once the data mart is established in The Information Edge you can drill through directly to Raiser s Edge records from it N A237 4 924 APPENDIX B Payer Creating the Data Mart When you install the Pledge Valuation analytic you should base the export for the data mart on The Raiser s Edge query or queries you
351. r the Dashboard page appears listing any dashboards you have created In Analytics you can add reports to your dashboards When you view items in a dashboard they can be maximized minimized or viewed simultaneously with other dashboard items gt Creating a Dashboard and adding items to it 1 Select Dashboards in the navigation bar The Dashboards page appears 2 Click New in the action bar and provide a Name and Description 169 1702 CHAPTER 4 3 When you create the new dashboard it initially has no content You can add content selecting a report in the Analytics tree view and clicking Add to Dashboard in the action bar aao Darton cy Fund Analyses e Monthly Reports 4 Then you specify the dashboard on which you want to include the item When you return to the dashboard the newly selected report now appears on it gt Renaming a Dashboard 1 Select Dashboards in the navigation bar The Dashboards page appears 2 Right click on the Dashboard you want to rename and select Open The Properties screen appears 3 Change the Name or Description 4 Click OK You return to the Dashboards page where the new name appears Marketing Segmentation Contents Navigating in Segmentation 0 ccc cece cece cece cece ee nnn Creating Segmentations 0 cc cece cece cece cece ence ences Generating Segments 0 ccc cect n ene eee Packages 26 5 schoo co Mandal eed u
352. r appeals in particular your mailings With the Marketing Segmentation module if you are only mailing to select constituents you can use segmentation to determine your best prospects If you have different types of mailings you can determine how to best target each type Using segmentation you can group donors on the basis of characteristics such as demographic geographic recent giving history and wealth Different segments often have different or unique needs Segmentation helps the effectiveness of your fundraising because certain segments may represent more attractive or attainable donors than others and because different segments often require customized appeals You can analyze segmentation using tools such as Lift Charts and export segmentations in standard formats for use by mailing or fulfillment houses or in a format optimized for use in The Raiser s Edge E CjMew 5 3X 23 SiRefresh 7 GhAddtoDashboard 7S SiBudget Expenses E zi K RE Express General Information Lift Chart Cumulative Respon H Cubes Property Name Property Value a i Reports aeos pr Code ques OPE a Y Selections Segmentation Winter Mailing annual Campaign f Building Campaign Budget 0 00 Total Cost 0 00 Filters Include all reco Performance Measure Actuall Expected Variance Responders o 0 0 Responses 0 0 0 Total Given 0 00 0 00 0 00 Response Rate NaN NaN NaN Costs 0 00 0 00 0 00 ROI Amount
353. r left corner of the screen ANALYTICS 165 11 Click OK The Data Analyzer View appears f1New XXDelete Save Rename File Edit View Tools Help egi3 e e E B Ene Tox Bees Constit_BIO_GENDER Constit_BIO_GE DATE Year 200K 400K 600K 800K Unknown ps MIU Iu EX ELE Me Ome x amp gt s E 9 s saoenstit BIO GENDEF 12 For more information about the toolbars and features available on the View from the Help menu click Microsoft Data Analyzer Help Custom Crystal Reports You can create custom Crystal Reports using data from The Information Edge data mart tables Additionally you can import Crystal Reports into the program where they can be previewed in The Information Edge shell The Information Edge enables you to use Smart Fields to perform complex calculations rather than specifying formulas in your reports Because the calculations are performed in the data mart rather than the report the speed of designing and generating the report is greatly increased When you create a custom Crystal Report from within The Information Edge a file is automatically created for the report When you close the report you are prompted to import the file into The Information Edge When a Crystal Report is imported into the program the report is stored in the data mart from which it was created This enables anyone with access to The Information Edge to acce
354. rds then apply calculations for another smart field to that subset of your records If you do not specify an order smart fields are processed in the order in which they are created with the one created first processed first and the most recently created processed last CONFIGURATION 111 2 gt Setting the order in which smart fields are processed 1 Select Smart Fields in the tree view and click Processing Order in the action bar The Smart Field Processing Order Wizard screen appears a Smart Field Processing Order Wizard Iof x Processing Order P Concat Dat SmartField 2 PS CurrentDonor RFM Help OK Cancel 2 To change the order highlight a smart field and drag it up or down to the position you want You can also use the arrow buttons on the right to move it up or down 3 When you finish setting the processing order click OK to return to the Smart Fields page Selections Selections enable you to build groups of constituent records using tools similar to queries in other Blackbaud products Using selections in Marketing Segmentation can reduce the need to create smart fields on the fly and simplify the process of creating segmentations Creating Selections When you create selections you specify the criteria The Information Edge will use to group records in segmentation segments Then you can use these selections to limit the scope of a segmentation to a specific group of records
355. re information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard gt Completing the smart field Advanced tab 1 When creating or editing a smart field select the Advanced tab We strongly recommend you leave E smart Field Wizard 5 x the default processing General Type Tables Criteria Filter Advanced iei Ww n iru you are changing them for a ea TTD z specific reason under unique circumstances Optimizing For Query Time calculates the value of each smart Field when it is refreshed and stores that value on the Target Table so that it can be accessed quickly during query operations This option allows For the Fastest query times but will take the most time to refresh v Enabled If disabled existing values will be maintained but the smart field will no longer be refreshed IV Continue on error If the smart Field Fails during a data mart refresh a warning will be recorded and the data mart refresh will continue Process incrementally When checked the smart field processes only new and changed records All other values remain the same or are reset to the default value based on the Reset values setting on the Filter tab Index this smart field Indexing generally improves data retrieval performance but adds overhead when refreshing Numeric smart Fields that will be used in aggregate calcul
356. re information about using Pivot Tables right click anywhere in a Pivot Table and select Help The Pivot Table component help file appears 145 146 7 CHAPTER 4 d F2 We recommend you leave the Commands and Options screen open as you work in a Pivot Table because the available options on it change as you select different items in the table Pivot Table Field List Screen You can access the Field List from the toolbar or by right clicking anywhere in the Pivot Table and selecting Field List PivotT able Field List Lx Drag items to the PivotTable lisk RE EXPRESS GIFTS o1 lio of Previous Year Am of Previous Year CoL AMOUNT Amount previous year Avg Amount Count previous year GIFTS Count Year to Date Amount Year to Date Gift count APPEAL E CAMPAIGN Constituent BIO GENDE DATE Sl Erin of b Add to pata Area M Pivot Table Field List The information in this list originates from the OLAP cube created from the data mart you select when creating a Pivot Table You can drag and drop fields from the list to quickly and efficiently populate the report with data The information is displayed in a hierarchical tree view format Each field that originates from the OLAP cube lists with a plus sign next to the field Expand the field to select the actual field you want for your pivot table For example from the Totals field select AMOUNT
357. reater than one year with no payments in between The Raiser s Edge includes a pledge installment option of irregular however many users record a pledge consisting of a single payment in the future as simply a single installment By default both of these are treated as irregular in The Information Edge Additionally you may want to use an attribute or some other means to identify your irregular pledges in The Raiser s Edge The Analytic uses two Net Present Value NPV calculations One is used to value pledges with regular installments The other values pledges identified as irregular in The Raiser s Edge Preparing Your Raiser s Edge Data Before using the Pledge Valuation Analytic in The Information Edge you first need to perform several tasks in The Raiser s Edge to make the process more efficient You must determine how your organization will handle pledge write offs Additionally you must create one or more queries Identifying Irregular Pledges You need to identify irregular pledges if they exist in The Raiser s Edge On The Raiser s Edge Pledge Installment screen select Irregular or Single Installment in the Frequency field The Pledge Valuation Analytic automatically assigns the value of Irregular to these pledges Pledge Installment Schedule for Mark D Adamson x Use the Schedule fields then select Distribute to help generate an installment schedule m Installment Schedule
358. recommend you leave this checkbox marked unless your refreshes typically include a relatively small number of records 8 If you are creating a new smart field click Finish save your smart field A message asks if you want to process the smart field now or later If you want to process the field at this time click Yes Depending on the number of records to process this can take some time If you do not want to process the field now you can click No and process it later If you are editing the properties of an existing smart field click OK to save your changes and exit the Smart Field Wizard Smart Field Dependencies Like other Information Edge objects you can view a smart field s dependencies items that would be affected if you edited or removed a smart field Because smart fields can be used as building blocks editing the properties of one smart field impacts any other smart field that uses the field as part of its own properties For example if you created an Average type smart field and then used that field to calculate other smart fields those fields are affected if you edit the Average field Before editing a smart field s properties you should view all the fields that are dependent on the selected field For more information see Dependencies on page 21 Smart Field Processing Order You can specify the order in which your smart fields process In some instances you may want one smart field to filter your reco
359. red groups You must indicate whether you want the groups to be sorted in ascending or descending order and whether to include zero value gifts Periodic Payment Category Financial What it Does A Periodic Payment smart field calculates the payment for an annuity based on periodic fixed payments and a fixed interest rate When Would I use a Periodic Payment Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to determine the payment for an annuity Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Periodic Payment smart field you must select the per period Interest rate whether it should be based on a field or value and whether it should be a percentage or decimal In the Per period field enter 1 if the rate is per period otherwise enter a field or value that will determine the per period rate In the Payment Periods field enter the total number of payments in the annuity In the Present value field enter the lump sum amount that a series of future payments is worth at the present time Again you select either a field or value In the Future value field enter the cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made Specify an option for when the payments for this annuity are due Pledge Valuation Category Fundraising What it Does A Pledge Valuation smart field calculates the value of pledges based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate Different calculations are used to determine the value of r
360. reen over the tree view and navigation bar on the left so you can leave it open as you work without covering up any of your Pivot Table or Chart ANALYTICS 143 To further increase the amount of room you have to work with in a report from the View menu you can uncheck Navigation Bar 144 CHAPTER 4 For example when working on a Pivot Table you can set up your Information Edge workplace to look like the following Fle View Go Toole Ac MEE ERI x ivot Drag items to the PivotTable list je Dashboards E r EY Analytics Gonfiguratioi o Prior Year Amount Prior YTD Amount Amount Appeal Goal FundGoal Gift Avg Gift Avg Per Donor e prine vear amorr Xl Add to Row Area Z Format Fiter and Group Item Properties Captions Captions lt 5 Add to Dashboard pig 4 Ai E59 is ie 0 i En C2 Date Type gt 119 El Annual Campaign E Buildings Campaign 2 300 00 41 945 00 All Date All Type Campaign F eal Count Constit Count Amount Gift Avg El Blank 19 17 27 700 00 1 457 89 460 367 00 1 834 13 460 00 1 075 51 1 000 00 1 000 00 25 00 450375 ad Select caption Item z Capital Campaign Caption and Item name Options Parent field name
361. refreshed data When you create a snapshot table you can include all the fields or only selected fields from a source table gt Creating a snapshot table On the Configuration tree view click Snapshots under the data mart containing the table of which you want to make a snapshot 2 Click New in the action bar The Snapshot Wizard screen appears on the General tab 2 Snapshot Wizard Oy x Columns Name 4 Description Bact Next gt Cancel Help nisn 3 Enter a Name to identify the snapshot field in the console You must use only letters digits and underscores in the name You cannot include spaces or any other characters You can also enter a Snapshot Description This information can be helpful to identify the snapshot field when you have many of them CONFIGURATION 4 Click Next The Columns tab appears 2 Snapshot Wizard OP x General Columns Table name Constituent M Available Fields Selected Fields BIZINTEL ID BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID System Record ID Name ID Key Indicator Constituent Shizzle Gender Preferred Address address line 1 lt Preferred Address address line 2 Preferred Address address line 3 Preferred Address city Preferred Address state Preferred Address ZIP Age AgeRanges LEE lt Back Nest Cancel 5 In the Table name field select the table containing the field or f
362. regular Glossary Analyzer View Using the Microsoft SQL Server Data Analyzer you can view various graphical representations of your analytical reports Business Intelligence Business intelligence BI includes a wide range of technologies for gathering storing analyzing and providing access to data to help you make better business decisions BI applications include query and reporting online analytical processing OLAP statistical analysis forecasting and data mining Calculated Member A calculated member is a measure that is calculated at run time Only the definitions for calculated members are stored in a cube the actual values are calculated when they are needed to answer a query Chart Charts make it easy for you to see comparisons patterns and trends in your data Using the Microsoft Office Chart Component included with The Information Edge you can interact with a dynamic chart that updates to show the latest changes to the data on which the chart is based Child A member that is directly subordinate to another member in a hierarchy Character Delimited Format A type of export in which you select the character for example quotes to use as a separator field These types of files are often referred to as ASCII files Classification A predictive data mining task that assigns records to specific categories according to the rules of a data mining model Closed loop analysis A process tha
363. rror message appears The solution is to share the folder c At any point you can press F5 on your keyboard to check the validity of your XML file If the file is not valid a message will inform you of the location of the trouble area For more information see Validating XML Files on page 240 285220 358 CHAPTER 6 14 where the database resides and manually edit the XML to change the Source location to use the computer name as part of a full UNC path for example Source MyServer MyFolder MyDB MDB This enables the data mart to be processed from any client computer with access to My Machine MyFolder You can now access this file from the Enter XML Data Mart Definition screen when you add a custom data mart For more information see Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart on page 215 Microsoft Access Database Wizard The Microsoft Access Database Wizard helps you to create XML files from Access databases These XML files can then be imported into The Information Edge as data marts using the Universal Source Connector Before you create an XML file from your Access database we recommend you establish as much information as possible in the database For example the Access Wizard recognizes any existing Primary Keys as well as defined relationships between tables in the Access database so it is a good idea to specify as much of this information as possible in the database bef
364. rt EI SJRE Express Lift Chart Cumulative Response Response by Segment Amount Raised by Segment B Cubes elg Reports B Exports HY Selections 2 On the action bar select Export You can select to create a Raiser s Edge Postal Discount or Standard export 3 Ifyou want to create a standard export select Standard and follow the steps in Creating an export definition on page 89 If you want to create a Postal Discount export select Postal Discount See Postal Discount Exports on page 97 for more information 4 To create a Raiser s Edge export select Raiser s Edge The Raiser s Edge Export screen appears E Raiser s Edge Export Winter Mailing Winter Mailing kK eme 5 Enter the Path to the location where you want to save the export files Three files will be created in this directory for use within The Raiser s Edge 6 Specify a File name prefix to be included on the files that will be created in the directory you specified in the previous step 196 CHAPTER 5 7 Click OK A message informs you that the data is being exported When the export completes you can use the segmentation plug in to import the data into The Raiser s Edge For more information see Importing segmentation data into The Raiser s Edge with the segmentation plug in on page 196 gt Exporting the segmentation grid 1 On the tree view select a segmentation from wh
365. rt x Cube ptions Additional Tables Publications Refresh Options Export Definition Name RE Express Prefix RE_EXPRESS_1 Description RE Express1 Options Maintain field statistics I Include support for segmentation Back Next gt Cancel Help Finish A CHAPTER 3 Enter a name to display for this data mart in the tree view in the Data Mart Name field Enter a prefix to display with each table entry for this data mart in the Table Prefix field Enter text to describe the data mart in The Information Edge console in the Description field Mark the Maintain field statistics checkbox if you want to view information such as data type how many instances do and do not contain data and the number of different values for each field in the mart Tracking field statistics enables you to determine whether a field is valid for further analysis based on its population If you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module you can mark the Include support for Segmentation checkbox so that the data mart is optimized for use with this module When you mark the checkbox a cube containing specific dimensions and measures for use with segmentations is created for the data mart These features enable you to easily create lift charts and views such as response percent by segment and cumulative response If you are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Refresh Options tab For more
366. rt properties If you are editing the properties of an existing report click OK to save your changes The Report Wizard closes and the report itself appears For more information about each specific type of report see Adding a new Pivot Table on page 148 Adding a new Chart on page 158 Adding a new Data Analyzer View on page 162 Creating a custom Crystal Report on page 165 Quick Tips for Using Pivot Tables and Charts Several general tips can enhance your efficiency when working with The Information Edge reports Remember the right click menu Pivot Tables and Charts are loaded with right click options The options usually change depending on the particular screen you are on A Commands and Options screen is available in both Pivot Tables and Charts by right clicking anywhere in the report and selecting Commands and Options from the shortcut menu that appears This screen contains numerous formatting display and other selections for reports We recommend you leave the Commands and Options screen open as you work in a report because the available options on it change as you select different items in the report The Field List screen lists all available fields you can include in a report The screen is accessed by right clicking anywhere in the report and selecting Field List You can drag and drop fields from the list into a Pivot Table or Chart to include them in your analysis We suggest you drag the Field List sc
367. rt parameter tabs appear RE Express The export parameter tabs include the same options as those for creating an export from The Raiser s Edge For more information about these tabs see the Query amp Export Guide 5 On the General tab determine which records you want to consider for your export You can choose to use all records from your database selected records from your database using a query or one record from your database Determine how you want to process individuals marked as Head of Household and whether inactive deceased or constituents with no valid address should be included in the export 34 2 CHAPTER 3 Cou 6 Select the Output tab E RE Express OE x File Edi View Help EA Save and Close Iz 1 General 2 Dutput m Available Fields to Export m Output Show op o rl RE Express Package Biographical tz Biographical B System Record ID Spouse B Name H Aliases B io f Credit Cards B Key Indicator 4G Constituent Codes B Constituent Code Solicit Codes BD Gender H Solicitor Goals B Age Primary Alumni information Address FH Primary Business information B Preferred Address a Address E Address line 1 Addressee S alutation E Address line 2 FE Relationships zl D Address lina 2 gue eoo SS Pees Preset al When you select to 7 On the Output tab
368. rted So the data is first sorted then the top or bottom first or last values are selected from the sorted data Response By Segment Use the Response By Segment chart to review the percentage of your overall response generated by each individual segment within a segmentation You can filter the Response By Segment chart by percentage Range of response for each segment When you select a range any segments that fall outside that range are excluded from the chart You can sort the information in a variety of ways including ROI Percent ROI Amount Expected Response and Expected Gift Amount You can sort this information in ascending or descending order You can also specify to Show a specific number of top or bottom segments When you select to show the top or bottom number of segments you are not specifying to see the largest and smallest values You are actually specifying to see the first or last values from the list after it has been sorted So the data is first sorted then the top or bottom first or last values are selected from the sorted data N A199 72 2007 CHAPTER 5 Amount Raised By Segment Use the Amount Raised By Segment chart to review the amount generated by each individual segment within a segmentation If you specified an expected gift amount for each segment you can compare the expected with the actual results You can filter the Amount Raised By Segment chart by Range of monetary
369. s When creating several types of items in The Information Edge including Condition or Expression smart fields and Parameters you may want to use an expression to specify that a target table include information from a field in another table If the target table has a relationship with the other table you need to create a subquery which forms a join or link between the two tables For example the constituent table has a one to many relationship with the gift table because a constituent can have many gift records but a gift record corresponds to only one constituent record If you create a smart field view or parameter with the constituent table as the target and use an expression that pulls information from a gift table field you must first join the tables by creating a subquery If you do not join the tables first a SQL Server message appears when you preview or run a statement Condition Properties x i The column prefix RE EXPRESS GIFTS does not match with a table name or alias name used in the query The data type for the smart field restricts your options for setting a field value for records that meet the criteria The value for the field must be valid for the data type and only fields with values of the same type are available for the Use this field option 280 APPENDIX A ay To create a link between the tables right click in the Expression box and select Insert a Subquery Tables with whic
370. s The rest of this guide includes details on the different functions and areas of the program You will also find procedures on how to use The Information Edge We suggest reading these sections thoroughly so you can use the program to its full potential Accessing The Information Edge To access The Information Edge click the The Information Edge shortcut on your desktop The Connect to SQL Server screen appears Enter the log in information you specified for your installation of SQL Server The Information Edge console appears The Information Edge console houses all the functions of the program in one master location but before most of these functions are available you need to add a data mart Adding a Data Mart To begin using The Information Edge you must install a data mart in Configuration A data mart is a copy of your data optimized for high speed reporting You can obtain data marts in several ways Blackbaud can construct a custom data mart based on the data sources you want to include in your Information Edge analyses Additionally using the RE Express or FE Express features you can construct a data mart based on fields you specify using Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge export functionality Also if you have The Information Edge Enterprise the Universal Source Connector enables you to use XML to describe the tables and cubes that make up a data mart For information about the Universal Source Connector see Universal S
371. s Users can create and view reports however they cannot change the structure of the database tables For example those with user rights cannot add dimensions to a cube Additionally users with administrative rights have full access to records in The Raiser s Edge even if those rights are not explicitly set in The Raiser s Edge When editing an export definition for an RE Express data mart an Information Edge user can view and edit Raiser s Edge records without security restrictions The same is true of The Financial Edge and FE Express data marts gt Adding database users and setting security access for them 1 In Configuration select the Security tab Configuration Marts Data Sources Schedules Security Custom Properties j pen gt Delete Server Login Name Database User Name Type Database Administrator BUILTIN Administrators dbo Windows Group Permit sa dbo Standard Permit No test dbo Standard Permit Na You can view details about an existing user by selecting the user and clicking Open You can remove a user by selecting the user and clicking Delete CONFIGURATION 2 On the menu bar select New The Authentication screen appears The Information Edge User Properties x Authentication Select the means by which SQL Server will verify a user s credentials e Windows Authentication Name C SOL Server Authentication Name Password Confirm lt Ba
372. s you can export the history grid Click Export on the lower right and the Data Mart History Grid Export screen appears The Information Edge Data Mart x Data Mart History Grid Export Select the export Format For your data Use the Options button to customize settings For a given Format Export Format Character Delimited E Path C files C3 File N ame Data Mart csy a Specify the format for the export the path to the location where you want to save the export and the file name for it b Click OK to export the grid information 4 If you want to delete processing history information click Clear History on the lower right of the page A message appears Click OK to delete the history Tables You can view all the data tables included in each cube of a data mart 62 2 CHAPTER 3 eu Fields Tab The Fields tab displays the table name the number of rows it contains and other information To access this view select Tables in the tree view You can then select an individual table for which you want to view general information Click Add to Dashboard if you want the general information for the table to appear on your Dashboard Field Name Friendly Name Data Type Size Indexed Monitored Field Smart Field BIZINTEL_ID BIZINTEL_ID VarChar 200 Yes No No BIZINTEL_RE_RECORSDID BIZINTEL_RE_ Int 10 0 Yes No No BIO SYSTEM ID System Record Int 10 0 Yes No No BIO NAME Nam
373. s you can reduce processing time You can still process the cube manually whenever necessary CONFIGURATION Adding Dimensions A multidimensional database can examine each piece of data from a different perspective Each of these perspectives is called a dimension Dimensions help form the structure of a cube which is an organized hierarchy of categories levels that describe data in the database The categories usually describe a similar set of items upon which you can base an analysis Dimensions based on other dimensions create the hierarchy For example a geography dimension may include dimensions for Country Region and City Using any of the data visualization tools such as Charts or Pivot Tables in The Information Edge you can click on a hierarchy to drill down and see more detail Because of the cubelike structure of the multidimensional database The Information Edge can locate the intersection of dimensions side by side top to bottom or in any other way within the cube You can add new dimensions to the cubes based on the tables created from your data sources You can also add new measures for each dimension Measures are numeric values assigned to dimensions These are the actual numbers on which you base your reports For example you may have a dimension of Gift Type Within that dimension you may measure count and amount gt Adding a dimension On the Configuration tree view click th
374. s Help aoe v I x d TreejProperty View E Text view 2 web view lt BIPACKAGE gt f Calllog cH lt FIELDSET gt CallId ContactId CallDate Resourceld ResultsId Comments mam H E Contacts H E Organizations H E Results H E tblorganizations DataType Int og bbic_auto_pk field NoIndex ACI CS CSCS CSS IsIdentity True if this is an autoincrement field Not recommended New XML definition Z The BBIC AUTO PK field is the last field in the list of fields for the table and the SELECT statement should not include a column for this field If n fields are defined BBIC AUTO PK must be the nth 1 field and the SELECT statement must only contain n columns The IsIdentity property is set to true for the BBIC AUTO PK field When there is no true Primary Key in the source and if you do not want to use the BBIC AUTO PK field you can remove the BBIC AUTO PK field and set the sIdentity property to True for another field to indicate that it should be used as the Primary Key for a table The field should be the last field in the list of fields for the table and it should not be included in the SELECT statement For example if you have three fields in a table the Primary Key should be the last field and only the first two should be included in the SELECT statement You may want to use concatenation to create a Primary
375. s as Object CustomParams Enables you specify custom parameters to pass the class NOP Does nothing on its own You can use this to fill the table for the source via other means such as COMCLASS or CMDSHELL 249 250 CHAPTER 6 CMDSHELL Executes the given command line You can use this to execute for example a DTS package from SQL Server using the DTSRun EXE utility Attributes Comments ExeName Full path to the executable file to run Arguments Any command line arguments to pass to the executable program ThrowErrorlfNotExitCode The exit code that specifies a failure of the command TimeOutMinutes Number of minutes after which the command will time out if it has not completed executing UseXPCmdShell Set to true if you want to use the SQL Server xpCmdsShell to execute the command line This ensures that the command line is always executed on the server instead of the context of the refresh UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR 251 2 CM CURRENTDATAMART Attributes Comments CommandText SQL SELECT statement that populates the table IsExecuteCommand Uses a SQL statement executed against the The Information Edge SQL Server database If True this is not a SELECT statement For example it may be an UPDATE or INSERT statement ConnectAsUser The user context under which to execute the SELECT statement For some operations you want to
376. s here you are sending the test out with the main mailing all at the same time If the test segment is successful in a future mailing you may want to switch from the old package to the new package Test segmentations can be created by copying a percentage of an existing segmentation You can then send a mailing to only that percentage to test its success For more information see Test Segments and Test Segmentations on page 188 Inthe Sample size field enter a number and specify whether the number represents Percent or Records For example if you enter 50 and mark Percent the test segment will include a random sampling of records equal to fifty percent of the total records in the segment If you enter 50 and mark Records fifty randomly sampled records will be included in the test segment The Sample size is typically 100 percent However it may be less if the segment belongs to a test segmentation For more information about test segmentations see Test Segments and Test Segmentations on page 188 Additionally you may want to manually adjust the sample size to ensure segments are equally sized to hold down costs or to account for limits on mailing materials Specify a default Package for the test segments You can enter an expected Response rate for your test segment and specify the expected Gift amount from respondents in the test segment Click OK to return to the Segmentation Wizard General tab
377. s or names Soundex is a method of indexing based on the way words sound instead of the way they are spelled This gives you the ability to identify similar sounding but differently spelled words or names because they have the same soundex code 263132 xil APPENDIX A When Would I use a Soundex Smart Field Soundex fields can be useful with the Warehouse feature available in the Enterprise version of The Information Edge For example because Smith Smythe and Smyth all have the same soundex code you can easily identify a donor listed as Smith in one data mart and Smyth in another Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Soundex smart field you must select the field containing values you want to convert to soundex codes The soundex code consists of the first letter of the last name followed by three digits The digits are generated based only on certain consonants and vowels are not used 1 B EP V 2 C S K GJ Q X Z 3 D T 4 L 5 M N 6 R If two or more adjacent letters not separated by a vowel have the same numeric value only one is used If the first and second letter in the name have the same value the second letter does not generate a digit If the converted consonants do not generate three digits the code is completed with zeros For example the name Lee has no consonants after the L resulting in a soundex code of L000 Standard Deviation Category Statistical What
378. s with an RE Express data mart you can use an incremental refresh If however you select incremental here and later need to run a full refresh you can change this setting when you schedule refreshes for the data mart For more information about scheduling refreshes for data marts see Scheduling automatic data mart processing on page 127 When you mark the Process deleted records checkbox records deleted from the source system since the last time the mart was processed are deleted from The Information Edge during an incremental refresh If you unmark the checkbox deleted records are removed only during full refreshes Marking the checkbox ensures that your Information Edge data always reflects the current data in The Raiser s Edge For example if you have a constituent who gave three gifts and you compute an average if one of the gifts is deleted in The Raiser s Edge and you do not mark this checkbox the deleted gift would still be factored into the average in The Information Edge so the figure would no longer be correct However identifying deleted records is time consuming If you typically do not have many deleted records in your Raiser s Edge data you will probably want to unmark the checkbox to reduce the processing time of your data marts during incremental refreshes 4 When you mark the Rebuild indexes checkbox indexes are dropped and then rebuilt during an incremental refresh You should leave this checkbox marked unles
379. s your incremental refreshes typically include a relatively small number of records When you mark the checkbox indexes are dropped before processing With the indexes dropped data inserts are faster but all the indexes must be rebuilt Without dropping them inserts are slower but you save the time needed to rebuild the indexes If the data mart takes a long time to refresh and the Messages frame shows that the indices took as much time to create as the tables did to refresh you may want to consider unmarking this checkbox If you are creating a new data mart click Next to access the Export Definition tab For more information about this tab see Completing the RE Express Export Definition tab on page 32 If you are editing the properties of an existing mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION 29 7 N We recommend you run incremental refreshes often to include frequently changing information such as gift and biographical information as well as new records in your data marts You should also occasionally run full refreshes to include data that changes less frequently fund names or code table descriptions for example Even when Rebuild indexes is not marked you may see an Adding Indexes status message during a data mart refresh The status almost always displays while the system checks to see whether any indexes are missing Pcie CHAPTER 3
380. sage appears asking if you are sure you want to activate the segmentation 7 Click Yes The activation processes This may take some time depending on the properties of the segmentation 8 You return to the Segmentations page of The Information Edge The segmentation is now active and ready for analysis Rows highlighted in red in an activated segmentation indicate that the amount a segment has brought in is less than the total expenses for the segment When the donations for a segment exceed the expenses the row is no longer highlighted in red For more information about analyzing the segmentation see Analyzing Segmentations on page 198 Exporting Segmentations You can create a standard export definition for a segmentation or create an export file especially for The Raiser s Edge When you create a segmentation export for The Raiser s Edge a plug in enables you to import the segmentation data associate it with a specific appeal create packages for that appeal and associate constituents with the appeal For more information about the plug in see Importing segmentation data into The Raiser s Edge with the segmentation plug in on page 196 In addition to exporting the entire segmentation you also export just the segmentation grid to provide a hard copy of segmentation details and counts MARKETING SEGMENTATION 195 gt Exporting a segmentation 1 On the tree view select a segmentation you want to expo
381. sed to uniquely identify a data mart and track refresh time stamps If this ID is not unique for each data mart an incremental refresh may not process correctly Multiple data marts can have identical SourceGUIDs For example you can save the XML from a data mart that contains a SourceGUID and use it to create a second data mart However you cannot copy the XML from one table and paste it in to create a second table because then two sources in the same data mart would be using the same SourceGUID SourceType The type of the source containing the data to be used to fill the table DATAPROVIDER is the parent of the COMMANDTEXT element CSVFILE Attributes Comments FileName Loads data from a specified comma separated text file The full path to the file must be entered FirstRowIsFieldNames If True indicates that the first row of the spreadsheet contains field names rather than data COMCLASS Attributes Comments ProgID Specifies the COM Prog ID used to identify a class the implements IBICustomTableSource or a method with the following prototype LoadTable byval oLoadArgs as Object CustomParams Enables you specify custom parameters to pass the class CLRCLASS Attributes Comments AssemblyQualifiedName The NET assembly qualified type name of a creatable class that implements IBICustomTableSource or a method with the following prototype LoadTable Byval oLoadArg
382. select the fields containing the data you want to include certain top include in your export The Available Fields to Export box displays a list level records such as of all fields available for your export The Output box displays the fields campaigns funds or appeals you select for your export You can also select formatting for certain in the data mart the Selected output fields Records screen appears and you are prompted to select Additionally from the View menu you can select Export Field Names the records you want to This changes the display in the Output box to show the actual field include You can select all names as they appear in the database tables which is how they will current records by clicking appear in The Information Edge the double arrow button Remember that this includes all current records If you later add another record of this type in The Raiser s Edge and want it to appear in the data mart you will need to edit the export to include it CONFIGURATION In either view an icon indicates tables that have a one to many relationship with the constituent RE Express Data Mart OF x File Edit View Help Z Save and Close m 1 General 2 Dutput m Available Fields to Export Dutput Show op o RE Express Data Mart Biographical H E Volunteer B CONSTITUENT BIO SYSTEM ID Prospect B CONSTITUENT BIO NAM
383. selected right click and select Group Items The selected items display as a group in the Pivot Table 10 You want to view only information about gifts given by females Click the down arrow beside Constituent BIO GENDER and unmark all checkboxes except Female Drop Filter Fields Here Constituent BIO GENDER v all Male Unknown 11 Similarly you want to view only information for a five year period Click the down arrow beside Year and unmark all checkboxes except 2001 2005 Drop Filter Fields Here Constituent_BIO_GENDER Female of Previous Year Count AMOUNT lt Lj rj E Ec Ed EB EE EE EE EE FE EH KI IKI ISI amp I KI L1EICII ANALYTICS 151 12 Now that you have established the rows and column for your Pivot Table you can specify the information you want to appear in it For this example we want to include the gift Amount and Gifts Count data fields Drag and drop those two fields to the Drop Totals or Detail Fields area W Gs 2 4 2 x E ee Microsoft Office PivotTable 10 0 Drop Filter Fields Here 5 ie 3 al Drag items to the PivotTable list Constituent BIO GENDER RE EXPRESS GIFTS Female Grand Total Grand Total Drop Totals or Detail Fields Totals Avg Amount Count previous year
384. sers An administrator can delete any user created report If itis viewable by others the report is removed from all views and dashboards You can move the location of a report to another folder If you move a report that is viewable by others into a folder that is not the report is removed from any other users views and dashboards For more information about creating and using reports see Analytics on page 141 Exports You can export information from tables within your data marts You can export the data from as many fields within a table as you wish For example you may want to create an export containing table or segmentation data to send to a mailing or fulfillment house For more information specific to exporting segmentations with the optional module Marketing Segmentation see Exporting Segmentations on page 194 Do not confuse Information Edge Export functionality with Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge export Raiser s Edge export is used to create data marts for The Information Edge Information Edge Export functionality enables exporting information from The Information Edge for use in other programs You can define an export that creates a standalone Pivot table For more information see Excel Pivot Exports on page 95 Additionally if you have the Postal Discounts optional module you can create an export of records using country specific mail sort options For more information see Postal Discount Exports
385. so deleted You can move items from one folder to another If you move a report that is viewable by others into a folder that is not the report is removed from any other users views and dashboards Friendly Names To make reading reports easier to understand in many cases database table and field names are replaced automatically with more readable friendly names For example a constituent table in an RE Express data mart has the name of the data mart appended to the front of it in the database however the friendly name for the table would simply be Constituent Menu Bar File When you select an item in the tree view you can create a new item of that type or open or delete an existing item If you have administrative rights you can also install and remove data marts and exit the program Additionally you can select the Core Solutions option in Configuration to import data marts created by Blackbaud View You can specify whether or not you want to view the navigation bar and friendly names You may want to turn off the navigation bar to increase the amount of available screen space when working with reports Friendly names can help make items easier to identify but in some cases when working with SQL statements for example you may want to turn them off GETTING STARTED WITH THE INFORMATION EDGE 13 2 Go Use this menu as an alternative to the navigation bar to access different areas of the program
386. ss 47 data mart with RE Express 26 export definitions 89 HTML publication 124 segmentations 174 snapshot table 86 XML file for XML editor 222 Crystal Reports 165 cubes 63 about cubes 63 adding calculated members 67 adding dimensions 65 adding measures 66 cumulative response 199 custom data marts 214 custom properties 191 custom RFM smart field 290 D Dashboards creating and adding items to 169 renaming 170 dashboards 15 3347 INDEX Data Analyzer Views about Data Analyzer Views 161 adding a Data Analyzer View 162 data flow in The Information Edge 4 data marts BIZINTEL IDs FE Express 57 RE Express 46 bringing in data from The Financial Edge 46 bringing in data from The Raiser s Edge 26 creating FE Express with 46 RE Express with 26 creating custom 214 creating from Access database 226 database tables 16 exporting data from 19 FE Express 46 installing marts created by Blackbaud 58 processing data manually 59 RE Express 26 refresh history viewing 60 refreshing data 59 scheduling automatic data processing 127 universal source connector data marts adding 214 warnings when processing 59 data sources about 129 adding 129 importing Raiser s Edge databases manually 134 data tables see tables data types Excel Wizard in Universal Source Connector 231 linking tables to an RE Express data mart 45 data warehouses adding 260 database tables 16 database users 136 date interval smart field 293 days since smart f
387. ss the report The report displays live data it is not a snapshot of data To design reports you must have Crystal Reports Professional 8 5 installed on the client machine from which you are accessing The Information Edge If Crystal Reports Professional 8 5 is not installed reports can be viewed but not designed gt Creating a custom Crystal Report 1 From the Analytics tree view select the data mart containing the data you want to include in a custom Crystal Report 2 Select Reports in the tree view and click New Crystal Report on the action bar The Report Wizard opens to the General tab You can click the Export to PowerPoint button in the toolbar to save the View as a PowePoint slide If you specify that a data mart containing a Crystal Report be processed automatically on a schedule the user specified in the properties for the MSSQLSERVER service Local System Account is the default must have a printer installed CHAPTER 4 3 Enter a Name and optionally a Description for the report and click OK The Crystal Reports program opens to the Design screen E File Edit View Insert Format Database Repot Analyzer Window Help 18 xl OS H SRA Fs 2B Omar SAS Gye ape HF cl44leruleza s xeelm I e m oF S R LR Report Header Details Report Footer For Help press F1 The data tables from the selected data mart are available for us
388. sureAggregateEnum specifies the aggregate function on which the measure is based Sum Max Min Count or DistinctCount DIMENSION Attributes Comments Name Name of the dimension SourceField Field providing the data for the dimension ParentDim If the dimension is a child of another dimension this is the unique ID of the parent dimension in a hierarchy ID Unique ID for this dimension so it can be referred to by other dimensions UnaryOperatorColumn The ID of the field in the fact table that contains a unary operator for rollup overrides This property provides a simple way to control how member values are rolled up to the values of their parents When the value of this property is assigned to the name of a column the contents of that column are used as the unary operator for the member This unary operator is applied to the member when evaluating the value of the member s parent The DIMENSION element is also parent to the DATEOPTION creates the date hierarchy and MEMBERPROPERTY elements CUBECOMMAND UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR Attributes Name Comments The name of the calculated measure at it will appear in Pivot Charts CommandType Specifies the type of MDX command to create Can use cubeCmdTypeEnum to create various items and calculations within cube FormatString If the value will not be manipulated in other formu
389. t CONFIGURATION 59 2 You cannot automatically process Postal Discount exports as part of a data mart refresh For more information see Postal Discount Exports on page 97 e The Restart Refresh option is available if a previous data mart refresh was interrupted for some reason To save time you can begin processing from the last checkpoint instead of starting over AS CHAPTER 3 During processing elapsed time information appears at the top of the tab and status messages appear in the text box When the refresh completes the status shows whether any errors were encountered You can also schedule data marts to process automatically at set intervals For more information see Scheduling automatic data mart processing on page 127 Viewing or exporting refresh history for a data mart On the Configuration tree view select the data mart for which you want to review the refresh history hee ES J Data Marts es Schedules Security Custom Propertie cjNew jOpen Delete 2340p 5 Refresh Ei lij RE Express Property Value amp C Tables Name RE Express Ef Cubes Description RE Express d GIFTS Last Processed On 02 09 2005 9 30 44 AM Process Completed On 02 09 2005 9 31 28 AM amp CONSTITUENT Time To Process 44 0 seconds Segmentation Data Last Checkpoint Complete HQ Views Status OK EE Snapshots Last Processed By BBNT DavidOw H Monitored Fields
390. t Fields Select New Smart Field The Smart Field Wizard appears opens to the General tab On the General tab specify basic information such as the friendly name and description of the smart field For more information see Completing the smart field General tab on page 102 On the Type tab select the type of smart field you want to create You can select from all types or categories of types For more information see Completing the smart field Type tab on page 103 On the Tables tab you must select the table in which you want to store the values for the smart field you are creating For some types of smart fields you must also select the table from which the values will come For more information see Completing the smart field Tables tab on page 104 On the Criteria tab you must specify settings to determine which records will be included in your smart field For more information see Completing the smart field Criteria tab on page 105 On the Filter tab you can use SQL statements to filter the records included in your smart field For more information see Completing the smart field Filter tab on page 106 On the Advanced tab you can specify processing options such as whether you want to drop and rebuild indexes clear existing values before refreshing to ensure only the most current values are processed and more For the most part the default settings will offer the most efficient proc
391. t Tables about Pivot Tables 145 accessing Raiser s Edge or Financial Edge records from 152 adding a Pivot Table 148 drill through 152 pledge valuation smart field 309 plug in for segmentation 196 Postal Discount exports 97 present value smart field 311 previous date value calculated member template 73 primary keys Access Wizard 229 Excel wizard 233 processing data marts 59 Publications static reports 125 understanding 20 Q quartile smart field 312 query creating in The Raiser s Edge 118 quick start The Information Edge 8 quintile smart field 312 R Raiser s Edge The integration with 3 4336 7 INDEX query 118 sending data to 19 rank calculated member template 73 RE Express about RE Express 26 adding data from other sources 39 BIZINTEL IDs 46 creating a data mart with 26 additional tables tab 37 cube options tab 35 export definition tab 32 general tab 27 publications tab 38 refresh options tab 28 Raiser s Edge export in 33 RE WriteBack about RE WriteBack 118 adding an RE WriteBack 118 understanding 19 refresh history data marts 60 refreshing data 59 full 30 in individual cubes 64 incremental 30 response by segment 199 RFM smart field 312 S sample expression smart field 296 schema 241 security 136 segmentation about segmentation 171 activating 193 adding a segmentation 174 analyzing all segmentations 201 amount raised by segment 200 cumulative response 199 individual segmentati
392. t and a test segment globally change the segment first then change the test segment The WriteBack Query for the segment includes members of the test segments so you need to change records in the test segments after changing the records in the segment If you changed the test segments first and then changed the segment all the records would have the value you assign for the segment You can run a separate change for any other test segments that you want to have a different value from the segment or other test segments Analyzing Segmentations You can analyze the effectiveness of your segmentations using a variety of tools You can analyze all your segmentations using the tools available in The Information Edge such as Pivot Tables and Charts Additional tools such as specific charts to track response percent by segment and donation amount by segment are available to analyze the success of individual segmentations When you create segmentations an OLAP cube named Segmentation Data is created in the data mart You can use the analytical tools in The Information Edge to examine your segmentation data MARKETING SEGMENTATION Lift Charts You can use Lift Charts to gauge the success of individual segmentations The purpose of a segmentation is to identify a subgroup from a larger group that is more likely to give than the entire group A segmentation is successful when the giving response within the target group is better than aver
393. t enables end users to act on the outcomes of their analyses to automatically drive business processes Clustering A data mining task that divides data into small groups based on similarity without predefinition of the data groups gt T T O O a 328 7 GLOSSARY Cube A multidimensional data structure that represents the intersections of each unique combination of dimensions At each intersection there is a cell that contains data Dashboard The Dashboard page offers a convenient central place for you to view Pivot Tables Charts Data Analyzer views and other Information Edge items Data Analyzer View When you have SQL Server Analysis Services you can use Data Analyzer as an alternative way to view data Data Analyzer is an advanced analysis application that enables you to graphically view the data in your database Data Mart Data marts drive The Information Edge providing the data and OLAP cubes for analysis A data mart is a collection of data that is structured in a way that facilitates analysis Data marts support the study of a single subject area by bringing together into a single location relevant data from all the programs you use to gather data Data Mining Data mining is sorting through data to identify patterns and establish relationships Data mining techniques include Association looking for patterns where one event is connected to another event Sequence or pa
394. t the value that you want to appear in the field on records that do not meet the criteria you will later establish When you select NULL no entry appears in the field 4 5 SMART FIELD DETAILS 287 Cad You can mark Use this value and enter a value or mark Use this field and select a field whose value will populate the smart field on records that do not meet your criteria To specify the information you want this smart field to copy click Add at the bottom of the screen The Join Properties screen appears Join Properties Please select the Following information that will identify the field or value to copy Copy field value Target table key to join on BizivTEL 1D z Data Mart RE Express Join target table to RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS Join to field BIZINTEL 1D Copy field from RE_EXPRESS_GIFTS Copy this field feIZINTEL_ID v Back Next gt Finish Cancel You can enter a value must match the data type you selected previously or select to copy the contents of a field If you select to Copy field value you must specify the key value in the target table which will form the basis for the join between tables You must also select the data mart the table your target table should be joined to the join to field the table the field should be copied from and the field to be copied You must then specify the criteria that will determine which records include the cop
395. t to optimize for Query Time But if you have a field you use very rarely Refresh Time optimization may be better suited because refreshing the smart field every time you process the data mart may be unnecessary CONFIGURATION The checkboxes that are available on the rest of the tab are dependant upon the type of optimization selected for the smart field If you unmark the Enabled checkbox existing values are kept during subsequent incremental refreshes but no new values are added After the column is dropped which will occur during the next full refresh a NULL value appears for each record You may want to unmark this checkbox if for example you no longer want to process a smart field but do not want to delete it so you can save the calculations in it for later use Marking the Continue on error checkbox enables a data mart to continue processing even if the smart field fails for some reason In such a case a warning is written to the processing history but the data mart continues to process However any other data mart elements that are dependent on the smart field such as other smart fields exports and reports will likely be invalid or out of date If you receive a warning you must investigate the cause of the smart field failure typically a badly formed SQL statement or bad or unexpected data from the source system and then manually refresh the smart field and all of its dependencies Mark the Process i
396. tab llle Adding a test segment 0 0 0 nia ia e E A ee uU Q m Q 4 ic O 172 2 CHAPTER 5 Adding a test segmentation 0 2 eee es 190 Creating custom properties 2 llle 192 Activating a segmentation 0 2 0 ee eee ee eee 193 Exporting a segmentation 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 195 Exporting the segmentation grid 196 Importing segmentation data into The Raiser s Edge with the segmentation plug in 196 Analyzing an individual segmentation 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 200 Analyzing all segmentations 0 0 cee cee e 201 MARKETING SEGMENTATION 173 2 M The optional module Marketing Segmentation enables you to use segmentation to group donors on the basis of a wide variety of different characteristics such as recent giving history and wealth Segmentation helps the effectiveness of your fundraising by enabling you to target your best prospects with customized mailings Most organizations have finite resources that may be directed toward appeal mailing efforts Segmentation can help you determine where you can generate the greatest return on your investment The main reason to use segmentation is that different groups of donors will have different responses to appeal mailings Targeting specific groups enables you to increase the effectiveness of your mailings You can specify different packages mailings and apply them to particular segments within a segmentatio
397. tab see Completing the Export Columns tab on page 91 If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION Postal Discount exports also contain one other unique tab the Postal tab For more information see the next procedure gt Completing the Export Postal Discount tab 1 While creating or editing a Postal Discounts export definition select the Postal Discount tab Export Definition x General Address Fields Columns Export Options Filters Postal Discount 7 Certify addresses al Sort Class Standard Presort Presorted Type Flats Rate Profit Entry None EC Piece Weight 1 0 oz Pieces Per Inch 25 0 Payment Stamp Cancel lt Back Herts Finish 2 If you want to enable address certification mark the Certify addresses checkbox You must then enter the path to an address certification file The filename is based on your country ADDRESS CAS for the United States AUADDR PAF for Australia DATAFILE DAT for Canada 3 To specify settings for Postal Discounts click Options The Postal Discounts Wizard appears For more information about these settings click Help on any of the Postal Discounts Wizard screens 4 To copy presort settings and a certification file path from an existing export in any data mart click Copy 5 If you are creating a new Posta
398. tab for a Copy smart field you must specify the information you want to copy the table you want it copied to and the criteria that determines onto which records in that table the information is copied For more information see the following procedure 282552 286 72 APPENDIX A gt Adding Copy smart field criteria 1 When creating a Copy smart field select the Criteria tab E Smart Field Wizard oy x Filter Advanced Output data type Integer Default value NULL C Use this value Use this field BIZINTEL_AP_INVOICE_SYSTEM_ID y JAdd 3 Remove M Properties lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 7 2 Select an Output data type for the field When you specify the information for this field to copy later in this procedure the value you specify to copy for records that meet your criteria must be valid for the type you specify here Currency Value can be any positive or negative numeric value Currency values can include as many as four places to the right of the decimal Values with more than four decimal places are rounded to the last number e Date Value must be a valid date for example 06 05 06 Numeric Value must be numeric can contain a decimal point Integer Value must be negative or positive whole numbers Text Value can be text or mixed value types such as a date and a numeric value 3 In the Default value frame selec
399. tain on of the campaigns chosen Is not one of Choosing the is not one of condition means that records selected must not contain any of the values you define For example if you select Campaign Category is not one of Annual Capital and Event records selected must not contain any of the campaigns you defined Is less than Selecting the is less than condition limits the records selected to those with an entry less than the value you define For example if you select Gift Amount is less than 100 only those records with a gift amount of 99 99 or less are selected Records with a gift amount of 100 are not included Is less than or equal to Selecting is less than or equal to as the condition indicates that the records selected must have an entry less than or equal to the value you define For example if you select Gift Amount is less than or equal to 100 only records with a gift amount of 100 or less are selected This operator includes records with the value you selected in this case 100 Is greater than If you select is greater than as your condition the records selected must have a value greater than the one you define For example if you select Gift Amount is greater than 100 only records with gift amounts of more than 100 are selected Is greater than or equal to Selecting is greater than or equal to as your condition limits the records selected to those with a value greater than or equal
400. te is cancelled and the dependency view does not appear gt Viewing dependencies 1 In the tree view select the item for which you want to view dependencies 2 On the Actions menu select Dependencies The Dependencies screen for the selected item appears E smart Field Dependencies RFM m ni x Everything listed below is dependent on the selected item Deere ower RFM A SmartFields Decle BBNTiDavidOw The screen lists all objects that will be affected if you edit the properties of the selected item You can click toolbar buttons to open a selected item in the list export the list or view a separate list of dependencies for a selected item in the current list 3 Click Close to return to the console Configuration Contents c Data Marts 2e nce T0 TE VE EUR A TEE Ehe Tn P re END 26 RE BXpt SS4 sexe eu bak RAE RS nia ene Mae ee ree Ne 26 Incremental vs Full Refresh 0 0 0 0 0c 30 Adding Data from Other Tables to an RE Express or FE Express Data Mart 39 Y BIZINTEL IDs in RE Express Data Marts 0 000000 0000s 46 BE BXpress 222125 nde eR De er CO ERR die wee eae ER a eee 46 BIZINTEL IDs in FE Express Data Marts 0 000 000 eae 57 Installing Data Marts Created by Blackbaud 0 0000 58 Refreshing Data in Data Marts 0 000 eens 59 Tabl S s rrr rosin inset e val deos pU P uea ned ri PER Rare 61 Fields Fabii iue deseo ride
401. tems that appear in an export based on a field value or SQL statement For more information see Completing the Export Filters tab on page 94 gt Completing the Export General tab 1 While creating or editing an export definition select the General tab Export Definition x Columns Export Options Filters Name amp ge and Gender Description Constituent age and gender Export type Character delimited Source table RE_EXPRESS_CONSTITUENT Output type Single file Output path C files Filter Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish 2 Enter a Name and Description for the export The rest of the information on the tab appears for reference purposes and is actually specified on the other tabs of the Export Definition screen If you are creating a new export definition click Next to access the Columns tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs CONFIGURATION 9 2 C uz gt Completing the Export Columns tab 1 While creating or editing an export definition select the Columns tab Export Definition x General Columns Export Options Filters Table name RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT Available Fields Selected Fields BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO SYSTEM ID BIO ID BIO KEY INDICATOR BIO CONSTIT CODE PREF ADDRESS ADD
402. ters Available fields Rows BIZINTEL_ID gt BIO CONSTIT CODE BIZINTEL RE RECORSDID BIO SYSTEM ID lt BIO ID C BIO KEY INDICATOR PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE1 gt BIO GENDER PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE2 PREF ADDRESS ADDRLINE3 PREF_ADDRESS_STATE PREF_ADDRESS_ZIP BL BID NAME o Page ERES een The fields from the table you selected on the General tab appear in the Available Fields box 2 Select fields and click the right arrow to specify that they appear as Rows and Columns in the export 3 Select one or more fields that you want to represent Data in the Pivot table When you click the right arrow to move a field into the Data box the Properties screen appears Properties BIO_AGE x Aggregate Cancel 4 Specify a method to Aggregate the data in the selected field Click OK to return to the Pivot Options tab If you later want to edit the aggregation properties click the icon to the right of the Data box 5 To enable filtering on one or more fields in the Pivot table select the fields and move them into the Page box CONFIGURATION 6 If you are creating a new Excel Pivot export definition click Next to access the Filters tab For more information about this tab see Completing the Export Filters tab on page 94 If you are editing the properties of an existing export click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs
403. th analysis looking for patterns where one event leads to another later event Classification looking for new patterns May result in a change in the way the data is organized Clustering finding and visually documenting groups of facts not previously known Forecasting discovering patterns in data that can lead to reasonable predictions about the future Data Warehouse A repository for data A centralized data store that feeds into a series of subject specific data stores called data marts A data warehouse can consist of a collection of integrated data marts Descendant Any member at any lower level in relation to another specific member Dimensions A categorically consistent view of data All members of a dimension belong together as a group For example a geography dimension might include levels for Country Region and City GLOSSARY Extract Transform and Load ETL Processes Processes responsible for transporting and integrating data from one or more sources such as The Raiser s Edge into The Information Edge Flatten Data The process of combining data from multiple tables in a relational database into one table in the multidimensional database For example a donor table in The Information Edge may contain data from address relationship and other tables in a relational database Hierarchies The organization of levels within a dimension reflects how data is aggregated from detaile
404. the Segmentation page gt Completing the Segmentation General tab 1 From the tree view select a data mart from which you want to create the mailing segmentation MARKETING SEGMENTATION 175 2 From the tree view click Segmentation On the Action bar click New The Segmentation Wizard appears open to the General tab iix Eile view Tools Actions Help Save New 23 Generate segments E v licis Members amp General Fiter Budget Expenses Packages Properties Name Fall Mailing Description Property Value Property Name Segments Records Expenses 100 00 Budget 0 00 Expected 0 00 Filter Include all records from RE EXPRESS CONSTI bal gt Records Package Variable Cost Expected Responders Expected Gift Amount Expected Res On the Segmentation Wizard you can specify all the settings for the segmentation 3 Enter a Name and Description for the segmentation For example you may be creating a segmentation based on RFM Scores with description of Groups donors based on breakdown of RFM scores Segmentation names must be unique even segmentations in different data marts cannot share the same name 4 You can Generate Segments based on Selections or Fields For more information see Generating Segments on page 178 4176 CHAPTER 5 Cua The Records column displays the number of records in a segment and the Offers column displays
405. the values for the two calculated members now appear For example in the Quarter 1 row the PercentDimTotal column current member displays the percentage of Quarter 1 for the entire Date dimension while the PercentParentTotal current member now displays the total of Quarter 1 for its parent dimension the year 2003 The Total row contains the same value for both members because it represents the Year dimension in this case 2003 Parameters Parameters enable you to store field values in one place instead of in a separate column of each table The parameter values can be static or based on expressions Storing a value as a parameter reduces maintenance by enabling other tables and functions to reference it instead of including the specific value in each function As a basic example you may have ten different smart fields that filter on gift type equals cash You can reference that filter in a parameter instead of including the actual filter on each smart field Then if you later decide you want to perform the same analyses on your pledge gifts instead of changing the filter on each smart field you could change it once in the parameter and all the smart fields would return their results accordingly i 46 gt CHAPTER 3 When creating many types of smart fields parameters you have previously saved are available to include in the Criteria of the smart field On some smart fields when you create the expression that determines th
406. tion see Creating an export definition on page 89 gt Completing the Export Address Fields tab 1 2 While creating or editing a Postal Discounts export definition select the Address Fields tab Export Definition x General Address Fields Columns Export Options Filters Postal Discount Table name RESS CONSTITUENT RecodID BIOSYSTEMID H Name BI_NaME s Address line 1 PREF_ADDRESS ADDRLINE Address line 2 PREF_ADDRESS_ADDRLINE2 City PREF_ADDRESS_CITY m State PREF_ADDRESS_STATE H ZIP PREF_ADDRESS ZIP x Carrier route m DPC m Lot number m Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish In the Table name field select the table containing the fields you want to map to those required for address processing with Postal Discounts Specify the field from the selected table that you want to map in each of the address field dropdowns Fields that are not required have a blank entry you can select in the dropdown The list of fields is based on the installed country information from the computer on which The Information Edge is installed Once the export is defined the program uses the country used to create the export so changing the computer s country setting does not affect existing exports If you are creating a new Postal Discount export definition click Next to access the Columns tab For more information about this
407. to be written or submitted each time the report is generated the View is queried instead Views are good analysis tools because you can create cubes based on them Additionally Views are especially well suited for use in Crystal Reports Because Views are presented as a single table even though they may actually query multiple tables they are easily manipulated in Crystal Reports without using visual linking and other complex operations You can export the contents of a View in Excel XML or character delimited formats gt Creating a Data View 1 In the Configuration tree view click the plus sign beside the data mart from which you want to create a View Right click on Views and select New The View Wizard screen opens to the General tab 2 On the General tab specify basic information such as a name and description of the view For more information see the next procedure 3 Onthe SQL tab specify the SQL statement that determines which records are included in the view For more information see Completing the View SQL tab on page 82 4 The Results tab displays the first one hundred records included in the View For more information see Completing the View Results tab on page 83 5 Click Finish A message informs you that view has been saved If you want to process the view now click Yes After the view processes you return to the Views page where the new view appears CONFIGURATION 81 P gt Completi
408. to define a custom data mart click Load and browse to the XML file Select the file and it appears in the XML Data Mart Definition box UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR Additionally if you have already created a custom data mart you want to tweak to create another data mart you can click Copy From The Copy XML Data Mart Definition screen appears listing the available marts from which you can copy an XML definition Select a mart and click OK The tables and cubes defined in the data mart now appear in the box New Data Mart x Publications Tables E TIE CONSTIT CU TIE GIFTS p Gf Amount Gf Date Gf Campaign Gf Appeal Gf Fund Gf Type Bf System ID Gf Date amp dded Bf DateChanged Gf CnBio System ID EJ B B B CJ CJ C C Cubes e jLoad a Save B3 Copy from 7 Edit Export Sancel lt Back Next gt Finish You can click Save to specify a name and location to save your data mart definition XML file If you are creating a new custom data mart click Next to access the Publications tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing data mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If for any reason your XML file is not valid against the BIPACKAGEDEFINITION XSD schema a message appears with details about the problem For more i
409. to rebuild the indexes If you are creating a new custom data mart click Next to access the USC Definition tab For more information about this tab see the next procedure If you are editing the properties of an existing data mart click OK to save your changes and exit the properties tabs If you ever specify a different data source for a data mart you should perform a full refresh on the mart Even when Rebuild indexes is not marked you may see an Adding Indexes status message during a data mart refresh The status almost always displays while the system checks to see whether any indexes are missing 218 2 CHAPTER 6 gt Completing the Universal Source Connector USC tab 1 While creating or editing a Universal Source Connector data mart select the USC tab Publications Tables amp 5 TIE CONSTIT TIE GIFTS Gf Amount Gf Date Gf Campaign EJ Gf Appeal Gf Fund Gf Type Gf System ID Gf Date amp dded Bf DateChanged Gf CnBio System ID B B EB B EBE 3 3 3 Cubes ejload g Save B3 Copy from 2 Edit Export Barcel lt Back ETE Finish 2 Tocreate a data mart using The Information Edge XML Editor click Edit Export The XML Editor appears For information about using the XML Editor see Creating an XML file in the XML editor on page 222 If you have already created an XML file
410. total Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Rank Previous date value Year to date value You can calculate the difference between two values by specifying an initial value you want to subtract from another value For example you may want to Subtract your Year to date gift count from your gift Count previous year so you can compare your progress so far this year with your total from last year Percentage of Measure Expression Type Parameters MDX Expression Show Year to Date Amount Difference Percentage of measure as a percentage of Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Amount previous year Top or Bottom List Statistics across children Preserve the numeric value Rank Previous date value C Format as n with EE decimal places Year to date value You can calculate a percentage of a measure For example you may want to Show the value of your Year to date amount as a percentage of the total Amount previous year to see how your total giving numbers compare with last year Mark the Preserve the numeric value option if you want the calculated value to display as a number Mark this option if you want the value derived by the expression to be available for further manipulation for example in another expression or a Pivot Table Mark the Format as n with option if you want the value to display as a string
411. u can also mark a checkbox to specify whether you want to Display value for each member and enter a character to appear as Delimiter between the entries If you display the value you can select the Format in which it will appear For example you may want monetary values to display as currency Statistics Across Children r Expression Type Parameters MDX Expression Get the Avo of GIFTS Count Difference Percentage of measure in the dimension Percentage of dimension total Percentage of parent total Constit BID CONSTIT CODE Top or Bottom List E z Statistics across children across all members of the dimension or the Rank children of the current member Previous date value Year to date value This expression calculates a function such as average standard deviation or variance for a member of a dimension and all children of the current member of the dimension For example you may want to Get the Avg of the Gift count in the dimension Constituent Code across all members of the dimensions or the children of the current member In a Pivot Table the value in a cell is the intersection of a pivot In the Statistics Across Children expression current member refers to a cell that is current in context selected or in view The calculation retrieves the information for the current member as well as any children of the current member s dimension For more information
412. u can drag Packages 187 CHAPTER 5 To view the properties right click on the Segmentation or Package in the drop zone and select Show Properties In Report 3 Responses a ROI Amount ROI Percent Move lio how Ares Total Amount Variable Cost Moye Tia etat E Package EE Se zl Segmentation Show All Show Properties in Screen Tips Hide All Field List Color Commands and Options Weight 6 Select the property you want to display It then appears in the Pivot Table or Chart 7 Click OK to save your selections and return to the Segmentation Wizard Test Segments and Test Segmentations A test segment is useful if you have a new package or appeal you are introducing When creating test segments you are sending the test out at the same time as the main mailing If the test segment is successful in a future mailing you may want to switch from the old package to the new package Test segments are part of a parent segment If a segmentation is over budget you may want to create a test segment that receives a less expensive mailing than the parent segment to bring down the total cost This gives you the ability to not only bring the mailing in line with your budget but to compare the response to the test segment with that of the parent to ensure the more expensive mailing is really performing better than the less costly one Test segmentations differ from test segments T
413. ue and enter the value You can also select the option to Use this field and select a field from the table to use as the value when the condition you establish is true For example your condition may specify to include only gifts of the type Pledge or Cash and you may want to copy the value from the AMOUNT column to the smart field for these gifts 15 Click OK You return to the Criteria screen where your expression now appears in the box Count Category Statistical What it Does A Count smart field counts the number of records in a one to many relationship When Would I use a Count Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to count the records in a one to many field For example you may want to count the number of records in the gift table Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Count smart field you must specify the one to many field containing the records you want to count If you mark the Count only distinct values checkbox duplicate values are eliminated before the count is performed Custom RFM Category Fundraising What it Does The Custom RFM smart field enables you to segment donors by comparing recency frequency and monetary values of gifts with other values you specify When Would I use a Custom RFM Smart Field You could use this smart field as the basis for a marketing segmentation For example you can create a Custom RFM smart field that segments donors according to whether they have giv
414. ue gifts Quintile Category Statistical What it Does A Quintile smart field breaks data from a selected field into five groups When Would I use a Quintile Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to divide data into five distinct groups For example you may use a quintile field as part of a marketing segmentation to divide the mailing into five segments Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Quintile smart field select a field containing data you want to break into five groups You must indicate whether you want the groups to be sorted in ascending or descending order and whether to include zero value gifts RFM Category Fundraising What it Does An RFM smart field segments donors by applying a score based on recency frequency and monetary value of gifts When Would I use an RFM Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to want to segment donors based on how recently how frequently and how much they give Criteria On the Criteria tab for an RFM smart field you must specify the date and amount ranges you will use to group your donors SMART FIELD DETAILS Search and Replace Category Transformation What it Does A Search and Replace smart field replaces all occurrences of a string within a string with a third string When Would I use a Search and Replace Smart Field You may want to use this smart field when you want to make corrections to your data entry or scrub your data For example if
415. use the security context of the BBMINE APP application role the default This role has full rights in the BBMINE database However for some operations you need to use your actual SOL Server login For example issuing xp CmdShell or connection to a linked server CommandTextHasMacros You can use pre defined macros as placeholders for certain text strings For more information see Macros on page 254 You can also use macros to select the correct records to enable an incremental refresh For more information see Incremental Command Text Macros and Examples on page 256 CUBE The CUBE element supports creation of OLAP cubes when you bring the information into The Information Edge It is parent to several elements SOURCETABLEFILTER CUBECOMMANHD v JOINKEY DRILLTHROUGHFIELD DRILLTHROUGHJOINKEY SEGMENTATIONINFO 252 CHAPTER 6 SOURCETABLEFILTER Attributes Comments SourceField The ID of the field in the fact table to which the criteria is applied Criteria A SQL WHERE clause applied to the fact table that evaluates to either True or False and can be used to limit data included in the cube MEASURE Attributes Comments Name Name of the measure as it will appear in Pivot Tables SourceField The ID of the field in the fact table upon which the measure is based Aggregate The Mea
416. ute is created according to the properties you established and you return to the main WriteBacks page Publications Publications enable you to save Pivot Tables Charts and Crystal Reports as Web pages which can be viewed on your intranet by other members of your organization You can publish the files to a shared network location or if you have Internet Information Services IS installed to a virtual directory When the page is stored in a location with access to the instance of SQL Server used by The Information Edge and viewed with Internet Explorer version 5 x or higher with scripting enabled on a machine with Office Web Components installed the report can be interactive This means the person viewing the report can manipulate the tables in a Pivot Table or change the views and display in a Chart through the browser When accessed on a machine without Office Web Components installed with scripting disabled or with no connection to the database server the page can be viewed as an image only The publication generates a file called menu html which serves as a Home page or central location with links to all the items you select to appear in the publication If you have the Marketing Segmentation optional module you can also publish charts for your active segmentations Crystal Reports are viewed as pdf files within a publication l 12472 CHAPTER 3 A n gt Creating a Publication 1 On the
417. ute to False and specify your own properties that either delete the existing data or implement some sort of incremental refresh functionality You must also ensure that there are no duplicate primary keys FIELDSET The FIELD element is a child of FIELDSET The available properties for the FIELD element depend on the DataType of the field FIELD Attributes Comments Name Name of the field in the data mart table DataType Specifies the SQL Server data type i e DateTime Image Text etc Size Specifies the maximum number of characters for a data entry in the field ForeignKeyTo If this field is a foreign key the ID of the Primary key field to which this field points ID A unique identifier for this field This must be unique across all elements of the XML file The Information Edge XML Editor can auto assign field IDs UNIVERSAL SOURCE CONNECTOR FIELD Attributes IsIdentity Comments Determines whether the field is the Primary Key for the table Set to True if the field is an autoincrement field Using this property should be necessary only in rare circumstances For example if you are importing data from a spreadsheet and want to manually specify a field as the Primary Key and will not be using the data with Information Edge features that are dependant upon the Primary Key data never changing such as Snapshot tables For more information see Creating a data
418. vate new 9 3X 23 3 T8 Hi Budget Expen SRE Express Property Name E ut Cubes M Segments 10 Reports Records 2 390 H AXExports Expenses 6 446 60 E Selections Budget 4 000 00 E e Segmentation Expected 7 260 00 winter Mailing Filter Include all records from RE EXPRESS CONSTITUENT e Building Campaign Segment Records Package Offers Variable Cost Expected Res 1 239 Calendar 239 478 00 2 On the action bar click Activate The Activate Segmentation screen appears E Activate Segmentation Annual Campaign Ef xl Activate By activating the segmentation you are specifying a way to distinguish donations made as a result of the segmentation From all other donations received by your organization Use the options below to activate this segmentation Program field APPEAL zj Value ANNUALMAIL Amount field AMOUNT v Create segment for indirect responses Name Indirect Responses Description Donations that were not solicited as part of this segmentation Activate when data mart is refreshed Help OK Cancel 1042 CHAPTER 5 Once you activate a segmentation you should not change the appeal ID or any other value you may have used to activate the segmentation If you do no records will appear in the segmentation If for some reason you must change the value used to activate a segment
419. view the members of each individual segment within the segmentation gt Adding a segmentation 1 On the tree view under the data mart for which you want to create a segmentation right click Segmentation New The Segmentation Wizard appears opens to the General tab 2 Onthe General tab you specify information such as the name of the segmentation and create the items that will make up the segmentation including segments packages and more For more information see Completing the Segmentation General tab on page 174 3 On the Filter tab specify which records will be included in your segmentation For more information see Completing the Segmentation Filter tab on page 184 4 Onthe Budget Expenses tab you can enter the amount you have budgeted for a segmentation so you can view at a glance whether or not it has exceeded the budget For more information see Completing the Segmentation Budget Expenses tab on page 186 5 On the Packages tab you can specify the mailings that are available for a segmentation For more information see Completing the Segmentation Packages tab on page 183 6 On the Properties tab you can specify that custom properties you created previously such as whether a reply envelope is included with a mailing be applied to the current segmentation For more information see Completing the Segmentation Properties tab on page 187 7 Click OK to save the segmentation You return to
420. vigate and fast to generate even when they contain vast amounts of data Additionally because The Information Edge operates separately from The Raiser s Edge the burden placed on The Raiser s Edge when you run large queries is removed thereby speeding up the program for data entry The end result is a solution that has the best of both worlds High speed transactional entry in The Raiser s Edge and Financial Edge and high speed reporting and analysis with a database structured specifically to support that role in The Information Edge Information Edge Data Flow This diagram illustrates the flow of information with The Information Edge Blackbaud takes data from sources such as The Raiser s Edge The Financial Edge and other databases you may maintain and creates a data mart A data mart is a collection of data structured in a way to facilitate analysis When a data mart is installed in The Information Edge the data is extracted transformed for optimum analytical reporting and loaded into The Information Edge Extract Data Data Sources Transform amp Load Data Mart Visualization REFE Accelerator Marketing Segmentation Data Mart WriteBack Query After installing data marts you can then display analytical data in Pivot Tables Charts or Data Analyzer Views You can publish Pivot Tables Charts and Crystal Reports as interactive HTML pages on your intranet giving key personnel access to the information gather
421. want to process the field at this time click Yes Depending on the number of records to process this can take some time If you do not want to process the field now you can click No and process it later You return to the console where the smart field now appears After processing the smart field is available for use in OLAP cube interactive reports RE WriteBack queries and if you have the optional module Marketing Segmentation segmentations Contributor Category Fundraising What it Does A Contributor smart field indicates donors that have given within a specified date range When Would I use a Contributor Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to create a field containing values of constituents who have given within a date range you specify For example you may want a field with values of donors between June and August Criteria On the Criteria tab for a Contributor smart field you must specify the date range for which you want to determine contributors Copy Category Miscellaneous What it Does A Copy smart field copies data from one table to another based on a field they have in common and a expression you specify When Would I use a Copy Smart Field Use this smart field when you want to copy values from a field or fields into another field For example you may want to copy the constituent name onto the gifts table so that you can create a report that shows this information Criteria On the Criteria
422. wn are those containing the known constituent ID Right clicking in the Expression box enables you to select from a list of fields in the selected table You can enter text directly in the Expression box You can also use the Expression wizard to create your SQL expression To access the wizard click the button at the top right of the Expression box a On the Select Field screen select the field for which you want to create an expression All fields in the selected table including any other smart fields you have already created are available CONFIGURATION 123 b Click Next The Select Condition screen appears Select a Condition and specify the Values for that condition The available values vary depending on the selected condition For more information about the available conditions see Expression and Selection Wizard Conditions on page 84 c Click Finish You return to the Create Raiser s Edge Static Query screen where your expression appears in the Expression box Only records meeting the criteria of your expression will be included in the WriteBack You can click the Check Syntax button to ensure your expression is a valid SQL statement 3 If you are editing the properties of an existing WriteBack click OK to save your changes and exit the WriteBack Wizard If you are creating a new WriteBack click Finish You are asked if you want to process the WriteBack now If you click Yes A static query or attrib
423. xt The Access Role screen for the user appears The Information Edge User Properties x Access Role for BBNT DenKa Select the role that most clearly defines the tasks that this user is expected to execute Database Administrator Has full access to all data marts and is permitted to add users to the system Data Mart Roles Assigned Role Add Aemove f Properties lt Back Levin Cancel 8 If you want this user to have full access to The Information Edge database mark the Database Administrator checkbox Database administrators have full access to all data marts and can add and remove other users If you want the user to have limited access leave the checkbox unmarked and click Add under the Data Mart Roles frame The Data Mart Role Properties screen appears The Information Edge x Data Mart Role Properties Select the desired data mart and access role For this user here Data Mart Select the data mart to be used for this access role Name RE Express i Access Role Select the role for this user C Administrator User Cancel CONFIGURATION 139 2 9 On this screen you can select a data mart in the Name field and specify whether the user should have Administrator or User access for that individual data mart Click OK to return to the Access Role screen User rights enable users to create and view reports however they cannot
424. xt procedure CONFIGURATION 4 On the Options tab specify information about the query or attribute you are writing back to The Raiser s Edge For more information see Completing the WriteBack Query Options tab on page 120 or Completing the WriteBack Attribute Options tab on page 121 5 On the Filter tab specify which records should be included in the query or be given the attribute For more information see Completing the WriteBack Filter tab on page 122 gt Completing the WriteBack General tab 1 While creating or editing a WriteBack select the General tab E wiiteBack Wizard OI x File Edit View Help di General Attribute Options Filter Name Description M Gtherusers may ron this WriteBack v Other users may modify this WriteBack Type RE WwriteBack Attribute Back Next gt Cancel Help Fns 2 Enter a Name and Description for the WriteBack This information appears on the main WriteBacks page of Configuration 3 The Other users may run this WriteBack checkbox is locked as marked so the WriteBack can be used by other users of the program Mark the Other users may modify this WriteBack checkbox if you want other users to be able to edit the properties of this WriteBack 4 If you are creating a new Query WriteBack click Next to access the Query Options tab For more information see next procedure If you are creating a new Attribute WriteBack clic
425. y key field or fields in another table This is the ID of the field that is the foreign key for this join The foreign key can be used to cross reference tables DRILLTHROUGHFIELD Attributes Comments TableFieldID Drill through enables you to drill from the summarized and calculated data stored in your multi dimensional database into detailed data stored in a relational database You can specify the TableFieldID to indicate the drill through field This is the ID of the field in the table that will be returned by the drillthrough DRILLTHROUGHJOINKEY Attributes Comments ForeignKeyField Specify a ForeignKeyField that refers to the primary key field in another table that you want to drill through SEGMENTATIONINFO Available with the Marketing optional module Attributes Comments DonorIDField If you have the Marketing Segmentation GifTable Optional module you can create a i segmentation cube for your custom data GiftIDfield mart You must first set the GiftDonorldField SupportSegmentation property to True GIA Field Then you can select the fields to use in Ie OOUDUEIE segmentations GiftProgramField GiftDateField Macros For some attributes you can use pre defined macros as placeholders for certain text strings that you may not know at the time you create your XML file For example because the exact name of the table to be filled is defined by the user when they choose a table prefix during data mart install
426. y xml 6 Select Add Cube on the right The new cube appears in the tree view 7 Select the new cube in the tree view and the properties for it become available on the right Commands Collection Dimensions Collection DrillThroughFields Collection DrillThroughJoinKeys Collection FactTable JoinKeys Collection Measures Collection Name Cube 1 SourceTableFilters Collection Remove Name The name of the Analysis Services Cube to create 8 Specify the properties for the cube For more information about these properties see CUBE on page 251 9 When you are finished creating your XML file select File Save as from the menu bar and specify the name of your file and the location where you want to save it 10 You can now access this file from the USC Definition tab when you add a custom data mart For more information see Adding a Universal Source Connector data mart on page 215 Primary Keys and the Access Wizard Before using the Access Wizard to create an XML file from a database it is best if every table has a unique Primary Key in the source data This is a unique ID for a particular row in the source data The Access Wizard in the XML Editor recognizes existing Primary Keys in the Access database However in the event that a table does not have a Primary Key aBBIC AUTO PK field is added to the table E The Information Edge XML Editor New XML definition File Tool
427. you establish for the publication 5 In the Comment field enter any text you want to appear under the banner 6 Click OK to return to the Define Your Publication screen 10 11 12 13 You can optionally enter a Description to help you identify this particular publication in The Information Edge console Click the icon beside the Folder field and browse to the location where you want to store the publication For example you may want to place the files in a specific shared folder You cannot enter text directly into the Folder field The Other users may access this publication checkbox is locked as marked so the publication properties can be viewed by other users of the program If you want to unmark the checkbox you must first unmark the Other users may modify this publication checkbox When it is marked other users are able to edit the properties of the publication Please note that these checkboxes affect access to the properties rather than the actual output of the publication Publications access The Information Edge database to produce reports that are dynamic and fully interactive However to enable users to view reports on workstations without the Microsoft Office Web Components installed or with no connection to the database server you can mark the Publish static reports checkbox to create static versions of the selected reports The static version is actually a gif image of the report However

The Information Edge User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents